JP2020028393A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately performing an error process and managing the game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing control related to the progress of a game on the basis of any one of a plurality of set values includes: setting change state control means for controlling a state to a setting change state in which one of the set values can be changed; determination means for determining whether or not the operation state of a movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in one game; and recovery control means capable of executing a recovery process so as to be normalized when the determination means determines that the operation state of the movable member is not normal. The determination means determines whether or not the operation is normal in a plurality of games. The recovery control means executes a recovery process in the plurality of games each time it is determined that the operation is not normal. When the number of executions of the recovery process reaches a predetermined number, the state is determined as an operation-disabled state in which the operation of the movable member is disabled. The operation-disabled state is cancelled when one of the set values is changed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 108

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variation display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on a result of the lottery. When the symbol stops in a specific combination, the game shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. In addition, various effects are performed when the symbol fluctuation display is performed,

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable auditorium, when a problem occurs such that the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position, processing for returning the movable auditorium to the initial position (retry processing) ) Has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is present at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and retry processing is performed based on a detection result of the reference position sensor. Running. Then, when a problem that the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position occurs, if the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position even if retry processing is continuously performed, it is determined that an error has occurred, and a predetermined error is determined. Processing is being performed.

JP 2007-268038 A

  However, as a problem related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the symbol change display is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that such a minor error is an error, unnecessary error processing increases, which is not appropriate. On the other hand, production using movable auditoriums is an important factor in enhancing the entertainment interest, so if a game is played on a gaming machine with an error related to the operation of the movable auditorium, the decrease in interest will be denied Absent. Therefore, it is preferable that the gaming machine in which the movable auditorium cannot operate normally be managed by an authorized person in charge of the hall, including the determination whether to continue or stop the operation.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately perform error processing and management of the gaming machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Control relating to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and a predetermined symbol is displayed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the change display of the symbol when the end condition is satisfied;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one set value;
Effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member;
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
With
The game control means,
At least when the power-on operation is performed in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, the setting change state control unit that controls the setting value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, in step S24). A main CPU 101 capable of executing processing, and capable of transmitting various information (for example, information relating to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 and step S19147) that determines whether the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game;
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, recovery processing is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset processing in step S19176). ), A recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100),
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means,
The determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine at a predetermined timing in each game whether the state of the operation of the movable member is normal,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the determination means is not normal in the plurality of games, the recovery process is configured to be executable,
The effect control means further comprises:
Counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing the processing of step S19144 and step S19177) for counting the number of times the recovery processing is executed by the recovery control means;
When the result of the counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory operation disabling means (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) in which the operation of the movable member is impossible (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) A host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19146 and step S19179);
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory operation disable means based on receiving the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed (for example, executing the process of step S311 And a host control circuit 2100).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the recovery process is performed only by determining that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal by the determination means, without setting the operation disabled state. Then, when the number of times the restoration process has been performed reaches the specified number, the movable member is set in the operation disabled state. For this reason, a minor error does not result in an inoperable state, but a recovery error is executed over a number of games, but when recovery is not possible, the inoperable state is set and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

  By the way, the effect using the movable member is an important element for enhancing the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, if the game is played on a gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally, the entertainment interest cannot be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine of (1), the movable member can be operated by releasing the inoperable state based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. It is possible to make an important determination as to whether or not to operate a gaming machine that has become inoperable by an authorized person in the hall, and prevent an unauthorized person from canceling the error motor operation stop state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Position detecting means (for example, a group of accessory detection sensors 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, an initial position);
The determining means includes:
A position determining unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when it is not at least at the specific position,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the position determining means that the movable member is not at the specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, an initial position restoration operation shift setting in step S19147) is performed. Position recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19147)
The release means,
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times the position restoration process has been executed counted by the counting unit is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the operation is not in the disabled state, when the number of times the position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position is performed is one or more, the position restoration process is performed. Can be reset based on receiving the setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. Therefore, the resetting of the number of times the position restoration process is executed is also performed by the person having the authority having the authority, not by the person having no authority, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) that can move the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepared,
The determining means includes:
When the drive unit cannot move the movable member from the specific position to at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal (for example, A host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S19171),
The recovery control means,
Operation restoration control for executing operation restoration processing for resetting the driver of the driving means (for example, motor driver reset processing in step S19176) each time the operation judging means judges that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Means (for example, a host control circuit 2100),
The release means,
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times that the operation restoration process has been performed counted by the counting unit is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the operation is not in the disabled state, when the number of times the operation recovery processing for resetting the driver of the driving means has been executed is one or more, this operation recovery processing is performed. The number of executions can be reset based on receiving setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times that the operation restoration process is executed is also performed by a person who has the authority and is not performed by a person who does not have the authority, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing error processing and management of the gaming machine.

It is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the figure showing the operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example showing an exploded front perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, as viewed obliquely from the upper right. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display sections. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a voice / LED control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining an example of an output signal of a voice and LED control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the built-in relay board and the speaker of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the display control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a sub board and a CGROM board (NOR type) of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a sub board and a CGROM board (NAND type) of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a truth table for explaining an operation of an AND circuit provided on a sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a truth table for explaining an operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver provided on the sub board of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a table which shows the probability of a big hit of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in a sub main ROM of a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub main ROM of the sub control circuit. It is a figure for explaining the outline of the drawing control processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game permission processing. 6A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting process, and FIG. 6B is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of abnormal time processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a system timer interrupt process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input detection process performed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting opening winning detection processing by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting check process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sub-control main process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command transmission process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message setting process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a directory table registration process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message transmission process executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 13 is a table showing an example of a selectivity of the number of limiters in a pachinko gaming machine of an extended example 1 for each set value. In a pachinko gaming machine of an extension example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right-gate for continuously operating accessory. In the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 4, it is a figure showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a left-gate for continuously operating the role of the role. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-control main process performed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process performed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example for explaining sub-device input discrimination information created in a pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sub-device input processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 65. It is a figure for explaining notionally the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing accompanying the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing which shows the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for describing a first example of a process of adjusting the brightness of a backlight and various LEDs. . In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for describing a second example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. . In a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by a host control circuit for describing a third example of a process of adjusting the brightness of a backlight and various LEDs. . It is a flow chart which shows an example of RTC acquisition processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of animation control main processing in a pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition reproduction control processing in a pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of normal amplifier check processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the amplifier check processing for heavy bass in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check process which performs the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (collective) check process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a more preferred form of sound amplifier check processing in a pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. 83 is a flowchart showing a more preferable example of the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 83. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st example of sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd example of sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd example of sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 4th example of sound request control processing at the time of volume adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a fifth example of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is an attenuation table showing an example of a luminance attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to light emission intensity of strong, medium, and weak LEDs in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state of an LED port, an LED, and a solenoid in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the data loading process performed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number initialization process performed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number regular update processing in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, (a) a flowchart showing an example of a random number 1 acquisition process, (b) a flowchart showing an example of a random number 2 acquisition process, and (c) an example of a random number 3 acquisition process It is a flowchart, (d) It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random number 4 acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random number acquisition process performed when a random number is used in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for describing a modification of the sub-random number process in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reception interruption process performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory initial operation process performed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process about the accessory performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the reception of a production command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the change start command reception about the accessory performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial position restoration operation | movement process about the accessory performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the demonstration command reception about the accessory performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the fluctuation confirmation command about the accessory performed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of receiving a hit-related command for an accessory executed by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the whole menu task performed by a sub CPU. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a hole menu screen is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display processing is executed. It is an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display processing is executed. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hole menu screen displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device when a hole menu redisplay process is performed. It is an example of the screen in which the content of the error was displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device. Screen indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed, and (c) both the execution of the backup clear processing without the setting change processing and the start opening abnormal winning error Screen after the notification period indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed in a state where the backup clear processing has been executed. 10 is a flowchart of another example of the hole menu task executed by the host control circuit, in a case where the host control circuit executes a setting determination process for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a hole menu process executed by a sub CPU. It is an example of the error information history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. FIG. 129 is an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 117. It is a figure showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure showing an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure showing an example of a data clear screen where each history data was cleared in a setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, which is an example of an initial screen. FIG. 14 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when a new set value is displayed. FIG. 18 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device, which is an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a set value can be confirmed is displayed on a hole menu screen displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a maintenance process performed by a sub CPU. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a maintenance screen is displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a maintenance screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example when a guide initial image is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a unimemo initial image is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example when a password request screen is displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in Modification Example 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. is there. 13 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device when an input password is inappropriate in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. On the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a set value can be confirmed is displayed. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure up to the completion of the operation. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process in a modified example 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a password request screen is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device when a setting change / confirmation history process is executed in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. is there. 15 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for confirming a setting value of setting change / confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the game system concerning the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing performed by sub CPU. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in a pachinko gaming machine that constitutes a gaming system according to Modification Example 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in a portable wireless communication terminal and a server device of a gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in a pachinko gaming machine of a gaming system according to a modification 3. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for confirming a setting value of setting change / confirmation history information in a gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in a portable radio communication terminal of a game system according to a modification 3. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating an example of a password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification 3.

[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the operation button group. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention from the rear side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. The directions shown in the drawings are directions in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" described in the right direction of the drawing means "right" in the drawing is "left" in a front view since the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where “right” is described in the left direction of the drawing, “left” in the drawing is “right” in the front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, the front-rear direction is defined as the front side and the back side is defined as the front side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front is a surface that is visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is a surface that is visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 and FIGS. 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a firing device 15, a display device 16, and a game board unit 17. , A payout unit 18, and a substrate unit 19.

  The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the firing device 15, the display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. To support.

  The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be freely opened and closed. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protection glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board unit 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. A speaker 24 and an LED 25 are provided above the glass door 13. The loudspeaker 24 performs, for example, notification by voice, production, error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, an effect light emitting unit for performing notification or effect with light, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be performed, and may be, for example, a lamp.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, the term “select button 664” means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform an operation on a later-described guide menu screen, hole menu screen, or the like using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position at which the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, on the upper plate 26.

  The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The plate unit 14 is arranged at a lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are fired from the launch device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. Game balls to be lent out or game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, a “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on a result of a special symbol big hit determination described later.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

  The firing device 15 is for firing game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The firing device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the plate unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the firing device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 31. The driving device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31 and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the firing handle 32 is operated by the player in the firing device 15, a game ball is fired by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

  The display device 16 displays a result of a special symbol big hit determination (hereinafter, the special symbol big hit determination may be simply referred to as a "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game, for example, a liquid crystal display. A device is used. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 16 include, for example, an effect design symbol (decorative design), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during the big hit, a demonstration effect image, and a special effect image. This includes the number of suspended symbols (variable display) and the like. The display device 16 (for example, a display area of a liquid crystal display device) is disposed substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  In the present embodiment, one display device 16 is provided for displaying the various effect images. However, two liquid crystal display devices are provided, and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. You may do it.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). Sub-control board 40, a payout / firing control board 50 having a payout / firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling payout / firing of game balls, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having a power supply unit 60 (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 described later) are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 40 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs are provided on one board), but is not limited thereto. (For example, the host control circuit 2100, the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, and the like).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of “1” to “6” in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting “6” is most advantageous to the player, and the smaller the value of the set value, the lower the advantage for the player gradually.

  In the main board case accommodating the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both refer to FIG. 9 described later) are accommodated. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and setting values described later. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security from the viewpoint of the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “gaming machine manager”). ) To prevent the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 from being easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player). In addition, in the main board case, in addition to those in which the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, only the position corresponding to the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager and the back is exposed, Also includes those in which the responsible person can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the shot game balls can roll down.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central part of the game area 20 and a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which the shot game balls can be rolled down is formed. A center unit 174, a normal electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes an accessory group 1000 such as an upper accessory (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the display device 16. At least one or more of the character groups 1000 or the operating members constituting the character functions as a character effect that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery. There is also.

  An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a position where a display area of the display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, a guide rail 26 is provided, and game nails and the like are implanted. The game ball fired from the firing device 15 jumps out of the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20 and collides with a game nail or the like and flows downward under the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 includes two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 26a” and “inner rail 26b”). The game area 20 is defined (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the shot game balls to an upper portion of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is disposed on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is disposed above the game area 20, and divides a downflow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls fired by the firing device 15 are divided into left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with a game nail or the like provided, the water flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down areas of the shot game balls are distributed according to the operation amount of the firing handle 32. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742. Note that the method of hitting the game ball down the left area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hit", and the method of hitting the game ball down the right area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hit", It is allowed to be separated by the player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right in the game area 20 and below the pass gate 49.

  The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 9). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later. It is performed when it is done. In addition, the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later is displayed in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 in the special symbol. Is indicated by the stop display mode.

  In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol and second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

  The first starting port 420 provides an opportunity for a jackpot determination on the condition of winning (passing) of a game ball, and an opportunity for displaying the result of the jackpot determination on the display device 16 or a first special symbol display unit 73 described later. Is to give. The first starting port 420 is provided with a first starting port switch 421 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a predetermined number of game balls are discharged from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handing.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in a front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in a front view. Conventionally, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 has often been arranged, for example, below the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, the display device 16 has been required to be larger, and it has been difficult to arrange the display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially at the lower left of the gaming area 20.

  The second opening 440 provides an opportunity for a jackpot determination on the condition that a game ball is won (passed), and an opportunity for displaying the jackpot determination result on the display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is to give. The second starting port 440 is provided with a second starting port switch 441 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out 61 From the outlet 63 to the lower plate 27 (discharged). The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. Note that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handing in principle.

  The normal electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 rotatable rightward, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). When the blade member 4620 is driven by the starting port solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state where game balls easily pass and a closed state where game balls hardly pass. It is composed of When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is driven, the game ball wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The pass gate 49 normally gives an opportunity for symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially at the lower right of the game area 20 is that the display device 16 is required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized display device 16.

  The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 9). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and is shifted to the big hit game state. Done in

  The general winning openings 53, 54 and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning opening 56 is arranged at the lower right of the gaming board unit 17. The general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a are provided in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 have three prize balls, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 have 10 prize balls, and the large winning port 540 has three prize balls. The number of prize balls is set to 15, respectively. This value (the number of award balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost portion of the center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 finally flows in when the fired game ball does not win any of the starting ports or winning ports.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 26 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display sections, a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol display section. It has a symbol holding display section 75 and a second special symbol holding display section 76.

  The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game for determining whether or not to drive the normal electric accessory 460 to be in an open state based on the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display section 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is usually displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter, referred to as “normal hit”), a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (normal symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning the game ball to 440 is changed.

  The ordinary symbol reserved display section 72 displays the number of times of execution of the suspended display of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspended regular symbols of variable display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of held normal symbol variable displays by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol variable display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. When the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or the maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

  The first special symbol display section 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a fluctuation display in response to a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (start winning), and also displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbols) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display section 74 includes a display LED group 74a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a fluctuation display in response to a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 440 (start prize), and displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the prize of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbol) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  As described above, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, a normal display is performed. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state which is a state advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the game is shifted to the big hit game state in which the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  The first special symbol holding display section 75 and the second special symbol holding display section 76 indicate the number of times of execution of the change display of the special symbol held (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of holdings of the special symbol change display”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol holding display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display section 75 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 display the number of held special symbol change displays by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 for controlling a game, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338. Hereinafter, each of these components will be described in the order of the main control circuit 100, the dispensing / firing control circuit 300, the power supply circuit 338, and the sub-control circuit 200 for convenience.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

  The main CPU 101 is connected to a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol start storage area of up to four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

  Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 for generating a reset signal when power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is turned off (power is turned off).

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol hold display section 75, The second special symbol holding display section 76, the starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the big winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 transmits data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 for managing a pachinko gaming machine in the entire hall. An external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

  In the main control circuit 100, a first starting port switch 421, a second starting port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure in accordance with an operation of a game arcade manager.

  Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is a key or a key which is a trigger for executing a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 is operable to be pressed, and is used to change a set value set in a setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting key.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / firing control circuit 300. The payout / firing control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a firing device 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 350 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370 in accordance with a player operation.

[1-2-2. Dispensing / Launch Control Circuit]
Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / firing control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 350, Control is performed to cause the payout device 350 to pay out game balls. When the firing handle 32 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise, the payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotating angle (the amount of rotation). ) To control the firing of game balls.

  Further, a sub-control circuit 200 (relay board 2010) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the display device 16, control on sound generated from the speaker 24, control on light of the LED 25, and the like according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, while a signal is not supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control circuit 200 may be configured to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and lending balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out gaming balls, and a game. A launching device 15 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of a power failure in response to an operation of a game room manager, and the like are connected.

[1-2-3. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply a power supply voltage required for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like. .

  The power supply circuit 338 is connected to the power switch 35 and the like. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the information is stored in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. . Even in such a case, in the predetermined case, in addition to the case where the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, the correspondence between the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the above case. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager, , And those in which the gaming machine manager can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  Here, display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. The performance display monitor 334 displays performance display data under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the jackpot game state to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also referred to as a base value.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 totals the base value based on the past game history, and stores the totaled result in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even when a backup clear process described later is performed. It should be noted that the totaling of the base values may be performed based on a predetermined operation being performed, or the totaling may be always performed and the base value may be constantly displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes: all history totaling means for totalizing all base values based on all game histories from the initial power-on (first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present; A set value-based history tallying means for executing tallying of set value-based base values based on past game histories for each set value.

  For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of the above all base values. All the base values totalized by the all history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. When the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history tallying means executes the tally of the set value-based base values. The set value-based base values totaled by the set value-based history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  The set value-based history tallying means can also tally only a base value for an arbitrary set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set value that has been set, but also the base value for another set value other than the set value can be totaled. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base value of another set value on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

  In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in response to an operation by a gaming machine manager or the like, both the total base value totalized by the total history totalizing means and the set value-specific base value totalized by the set value-specific history totaling means. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

  Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of the specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Alternatively, both the total base value and the set value-specific base values may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list or displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, the performance display monitor 334 and both other display means are used. It may be displayed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totalizing unit and a set value-specific history totalizing unit. A post-setting change history summarizing means for summing up the post-setting change base value based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

  In this way, by displaying all or a part of the entire base value and the set value-based base value and / or the set value-based base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game is performed. It is possible to easily confirm information based on past game history in the machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric auditorium (large winning prize port) or an ordinary electric auditorium. You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by the accessory). In addition, it may be a display for the total number of shots, or may be a display for a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors (large winning opening). They may be displayed for each setting.

  The error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. The error notification monitor 336 may display, in addition to the error code, a setting change code indicating that a setting change process described later is being performed, a setting checking code indicating that a setting check process is being described later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[1-2-4. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the sub-control circuit 200 and a connection relationship between the sub-control circuit 200 and various peripheral devices thereof.

  The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect or the like in accordance with the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. 10, a relay board 2010 and a sub-board 2020 (first board) ), A control ROM board 2030, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) board 2040 (second board). The sub board 2020 is connected to the relay board 2010, the control ROM board 2030, and the CGROM board 2040. In the sub-control circuit 200, the sub-board 2020 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CGROM board 2040) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the sub control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the main button 662, and each select button. The select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned ON / OFF by operating the buttons 664a to 664d, and the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects that the accessory group 1000 is at the initial position are connected. These are not shown. In addition, actually, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the respective select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively. However, in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as a select button switch 6641. Also, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is provided by the number of motors provided corresponding to the movable accessory.

  The relay board 2010 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and transmitting the received command to the sub-board 2020.

  When the sub-control board is the above-mentioned one-board board as the receiving means for receiving the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control board itself may have a function as the receiving means. Alternatively, the command may be received as a result via a relay board or the like.

  When the sub-control board is composed of a plurality of boards, any of the boards may be provided with the receiving means. Even in this case, it is interpreted that the sub-control board has the receiving means. can do. Also in this case, even when a sub-control board including a plurality of boards receives a command via a relay board or the like, one of the boards constituting the sub-control board consequently receives information related to the command. Is recognized, it can be expressed that the sub-control board has received the command.

  The sub-board 2020 includes a host control circuit 2100, an audio / LED control circuit 2200, a display control circuit 2300, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 250, and a built-in relay board 2600. Among them, at least the host control circuit 2100, the audio / LED control circuit 2200, and the display control circuit 2300 are configured as one board substrate.

  The host control circuit 2100 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub-control circuit 200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and includes a CPU processor, a sub-work RAM 2100a, an SRAM 2100b, an RTC (real-time clock), It is configured to include a watchdog timer. The host control circuit 2100 is connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, and the built-in relay board 2600 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the control ROM board 2030.

  The host control circuit 2100 has a subwork RAM 2100a and an SRAM (Static RAM) 210b. The sub work RAM 2100a is a storage device that acts as a temporary storage area for work when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes, and various flags and variables required when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes. Is stored. The RAM 2100b is a storage device for backing up predetermined data in the sub work RAM 2100a. In this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the host control circuit 2100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used as the temporary storage area. .

  The audio / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 and the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, and based on a control signal (sound request and LED request to be described later) input from the host control circuit 2100, the speaker 24 Is a circuit for controlling the sound reproduction operation by the controller and the light emission operation by the lamp group 25. Therefore, functionally, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 has an audio controller 2200a and a lamp controller 2200b. The sound controller 2200a and the lamp controller 2200b are substantially included in a sound lamp control module 2260 described later. The internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

  In this embodiment, when a control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 are transmitted to the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, the audio / LED Communication between the control circuit 2200 and the lamp group 25 is performed by a SPI (Serial Periperal Interface) communication method (a type of serial communication method). In this embodiment, the lamp group 25 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

  The display control circuit 2300 is connected to the display device 16 and displays an image (decorative design image, background image, effect image, etc.) related to the effect based on a control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 2100. Is a circuit for controlling various processing operations at the time of displaying the image. Note that the display control circuit 2300 includes a display controller (a first display controller 2380 and a second display controller 2390 described later) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 237.

  The display control circuit 2300 is connected to the SDRAM 2500 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the CGROM board 2040. Further, the display controller in the display control circuit 2300 is directly connected to the display device 16 without going through the relay board. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

  The SDRAM 2500 is configured by a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate 2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in the drawing control processing of images (moving images and still images) displayed by the display device 16. Specifically, for example, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

  The built-in relay board 2600 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200, and transmits the received various signals and various data to the speaker 24, the lamp group 25, and the accessory group 1000. This is a relay board to be transmitted to.

  The built-in relay board 2600 has an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 2610 and a digital audio power amplifier 2620 (amplifying means). In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the I2C controller 2610 and the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are mounted on the same relay board. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided separately from the relay board on which the power amplifier 2620 is mounted.

  The I2C controller 2610 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 and the motor controller 2700 of the accessory group 1000. That is, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. Then, control signals and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100 are input to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700.

  In the present embodiment, communication between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 is performed by an I2C communication method (a type of serial communication method). In the present embodiment, the accessory group 1000 includes one or more motors, and the motor controller 2700 includes one or more motor drivers for driving each motor. Although FIG. 10 shows an example in which only one accessory group 1000 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory groups 1000 may be provided.

  Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 directly controls the actuating member of the accessory constituting the accessory group 1000 and the motor of the operating member constituting the accessory, without using the motor controller 2700. The motor may be driven, or a control circuit for controlling the motor may be separately provided. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of motor drivers (motors) are controlled by one control circuit, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits. One motor (motor driver) may be controlled, or one control circuit may control one motor (motor driver).

  The digital audio power amplifier 2620 is connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200 and the speaker 24. That is, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620. Therefore, an audio signal or the like output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

  The control ROM substrate 2030 is provided with a sub main ROM 2050. The sub main ROM 2050 stores various programs for controlling the staging operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the host control circuit 2100 and various data tables (for example, see FIGS. 21 to 28 described later). Then, the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, a CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) executes various processes according to a program stored in the sub main ROM 2050.

  In the present embodiment, the sub main ROM 2050 is applied as a storage unit for storing the programs used in the host control circuit 2100 and various tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage unit, a storage medium of another mode may be used as long as it is a storage medium readable by a computer having a control unit. For example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, and the like May be applied. Further, each of the programs may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from outside or the like after power-on, and may be recorded in sub-main ROM 2050.

  The CGROM board 2040 is provided with a CGROM 2060. The CGROM 2060 is configured by a NOR or NAND flash memory. Further, the CGROM 2060 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 16 and audio data reproduced by the speaker 24 (sometimes referred to as sound data in this specification). At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 2060, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 2060 without being compressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration in which various ROM boards (the control ROM board 2030 and the CGROM board 2040) and the sub board 2020 are connected by the board-to-board connector in the sub control circuit 200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into ports such as sockets provided on the sub-board 2020, and the sub-board 2020 may be configured by a single board having a ROM function or a ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 2020 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. When the sub-substrate 2020 is configured by a single substrate having a ROM function or a ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 200 determines whether to use a sub-controller according to the type of memory used as the CGROM. Switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the board, or switching means for switching information of the circuit on the sub-board used according to the type of the memory may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 2050, CGROM 2060, built-in VRAM 2370, SDRAM 2500) and the corresponding control circuit is as follows: built-in VRAM 2370> SDRAM 2500> sub-main ROM2050 ≒ CGROM2060. That is, in the present embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 2370 and various circuits in the display control circuit 2300 is the fastest, and then the communication speed between the SDRAM 2500 and the display control circuit 2300 is fastest. Then, the communication speed between the sub main ROM 2050 and the host control circuit 2100 and the communication speed between the CGROM 2060 and the display control circuit 2300 become the lowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage units and the corresponding control circuit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the magnitude of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that of the present embodiment, or the communication speed between each of the storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different. May be all the same.

  Here, possible configurations of the various storage units described above will be described. In the present embodiment, a storage unit for storing information (compressed (encoded) image data) related to image data stores information (transparency alpha table described later) related to transparency data that can be used when setting transparency for the image data. The configuration example that is the same as the storage means (CGROM 2060) has been described. That is, the configuration example in which the “first information storage unit” is physically the same as the “second information storage unit” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the “first information storage unit” may be configured by a storage unit (storage medium) that is physically different from the “second information storage unit”.

  Further, the term "information storage means" as used herein means not only a storage means such as the CGROM 2060, but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, or the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" and the "second information storage means" may be different data storage areas or different tables in the same storage means, Further, the data may be stored in different register addresses. In other words, the term "information storage means" used in this specification is different not only when the storage means (storage medium) is physically different, but also when the storage means is physically the same (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, this also includes a case where the data area (a storage area distinguished by an address, a register, a table, a structure, and the like) in the storage means is different.

  The meaning of the “information storage means” in the present specification described above can be applied to the “third information storage means” (SDRAM 2500) and the “fourth information storage means” (built-in VRAM 2370). Therefore, for example, the “first information storage unit” to the “fourth information storage unit” may be configured by storage units (storage media) that are physically different from each other, or the “first information storage unit” to the “first information storage unit”. The "fourth information storage means" may be constituted by different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

  In the present embodiment, the “first information storage unit” and the “second information storage unit” are configured by different data areas in one storage unit (CGROM 2060), and the “third information storage unit” is used. , A storage unit (SDRAM 2500) physically different from a storage unit (CGROM 2060) including a “first information storage unit” and a “second information storage unit”, and the “fourth information storage unit” An example will be described in which a storage unit (CGROM 2060) including “first information storage unit” and “second information storage unit” and a storage unit (built-in VRAM 2370) physically different from “third information storage unit” (SDRAM 2500) are described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Whether the "information storage means" is composed of a data area or a storage means, and how the combination of the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means The mode can be appropriately set according to, for example, the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the gaming machine. For example, in the present embodiment, the “first information storage unit” to the “third information storage unit” are configured by different data areas in one storage unit, and the “fourth information storage unit” A storage unit physically different from a storage unit including “first information storage unit” to “third information storage unit” may be used.

[1-2-5. Voice / LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an internal circuit configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 and a connection relationship between the audio / LED control circuit 2200 and various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units. In FIG. 11, illustration of a relay board and the like provided between the audio / LED control circuit 2200 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted for simplification of the description.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integration) interface 2210, a memory interface 2220, a digital audio interface 2230, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, and a sound lamp. A control module 2260, a main generator 2270, and a multi-effector 2280 are provided. The connection relation of each part in the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is as follows.

  In the audio / LED control circuit 2200, the sound / lamp control module 2260 is connected to the memory interface 2220, the peripheral interface 2240, the command register 2250, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280. The command register 2250 is connected to the LSI interface 2210 in addition to the sound lamp control module 2260. The main generator 2270 is connected to a memory interface 2220 and a multi-effector 2280 in addition to the sound / lamp control module 2260. Further, the multi-effector 2280 is connected to a memory interface 2220 and a digital audio interface 2230 in addition to the sound / lamp control module 2260 and the main generator 2270.

  Next, the configuration of each unit in the audio / LED control circuit 2200 will be described.

  The LSI interface 2210 is an interface circuit used when performing an input / output operation of a control signal or the like (for example, a sound request, an LED request, or the like) between the host control circuit 2100 and the command register 2250. That is, the command register 2250 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 via the LSI interface 2210.

  The memory interface 2220 is an interface circuit used when performing an input / output operation of audio data and the like between the sub main ROM 2050 and each of the sound / lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280.

  The digital audio interface 2230 is an interface circuit used when outputting an audio signal or the like from the multi-effector 2280 to the speaker 24. Also, the digital audio interface 2230 outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effector 2280.

  The peripheral interface 2240 is an interface circuit used when performing an input / output operation of a lamp signal or the like (eg, LED data described later) between the lamp group 25 and the sound / lamp control module 2260. Further, the peripheral interface 2240 is provided with three physical systems as physical systems (SPI channels) when outputting data to the LED drivers included in the lamp group 25. In the present embodiment, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used as described later.

  The command register 2250 includes a large number of register groups (for example, a large number of voice control registers) accessed from the host control circuit 2100. The command register 2250 sets the function control of the sound / lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280. The command register 2250 also sets the operating conditions of each interface (LSI interface 2210, memory interface 2220, digital audio interface 2230, peripheral interface 2240).

  Note that an IC (Integrated Circuit) is mounted on each register constituting the command register 2250, and each register is constituted by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When a register having such a configuration is used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced. Therefore, by increasing the number of memory chips (registers), the capacity per memory module ( Command register 2250).

  The sound / lamp control module 2260 comprehensively controls the sound reproduction operation and the like, and controls the operation of each component (each block) in the sound / LED control circuit 2200 according to the setting contents of the command register 2250. . As shown in FIG. 11, the sound / lamp control module 2260 includes a simple access controller 2260a, a sequencer 2260b, a lamp control unit 2260c, and a peripheral control unit 2260d.

  The simple access controller 2260a is a circuit unit that processes commands collectively. The sequencer 2260b has various sequencers (automatic reproduction function unit) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lamp lighting and audio. Then, each sequencer controls various operations in accordance with a timer and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step processing during sequence reproduction such as LED animation and audio, which will be described later).

  The lamp control unit 2260c calculates the set luminance value for all channels (eight channels) for which LED data described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). Further, the peripheral control unit 2260d performs physical transmission control when transmitting the calculation result data output from the lamp control unit 2260c to the LED driver.

  Main generator 2270 is a circuit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 2270 obtains predetermined audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 based on a control signal input from the sound / lamp control module 2260, and converts the obtained audio data into a predetermined audio signal. Convert to The main generator 2270 includes a decoder 2270a for reproducing compressed data divided into reproduction channels CH1 to CH32, a channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) for adjusting the volume, and a channel mixing unit 2270c for mixing the reproduction sound of the decoder 2270a. And a remix unit 2270d for executing a final mixing operation.

  The multi-effector 2280 has a mixer for synthesizing an audio signal input from the main generator 2270 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 2230, and various effectors for giving various audio effects to the audio. Then, the multi-effector 2280 outputs an audio signal synthesized by the mixer, an output signal from the effector, and the like to the speaker 24 via the digital audio interface 2230.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating output signals of the audio / LED control circuit. The CGROM 2060 stores up to 8192 types of sequence code groups and up to 8192 types of SAC data groups. Sequence code and SAC data, respectively, have been identified in the 13 bit long sequence code number or SAC number, a relationship of 8192 ^{= 2 13.}

  In the case of this embodiment, 16 sequences (SQ0 to SQ15) operating in parallel are provided as the sequencer 2260b, and 4 systems (SAC0 to SAC3) operating in parallel are provided as the simple accelerator controller 2260a. I have. Corresponding to this configuration, the command register 2250 is provided with an audio control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer (SQ0 to SQ15) and an audio control register RGj1 for controlling the SAC (SAC0 to SAC3).

  When the host control circuit 2100 composed of the CPU processor writes the SAC number and its attached information into a predetermined voice control register RGj1 for SAC control based on the voice command transmission operation, the corresponding simple The access controller 2260a starts the function, and the simple access controller 2260a writes a group of setting data specified by the SAC number to a group of voice control registers indicated by the SAC data. In the present embodiment, a complicated setting operation can be completed by transmitting one SAC number and its accompanying information.

  On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 including the CPU processor stores the sequence code number and its additional information in a predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer 2260b (SQ0 to SQ7) based on the transmission operation of the voice command. Upon writing, the corresponding sequencer SQi starts functioning, and writes a group of setting data specified by the sequence code to a group of voice control registers specified by the sequence code.

  Here, a predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencers (SQ0 to SQ7) has a plurality of (up to eight) sequence code numbers for any sequencer SQi and loop information for the effect of each sequence code number. Can be filled in. Therefore, for example, when n + 1 sequence code numbers (X0, X1,..., Xn) are specified for the sequencer SQi, the setting operation of the sequence code number X0 → the setting operation of the sequence code number X1 → ···································································································································· 音 声 ···

  Further, since the loop information such as the number of repetitions can be specified for each sequence code number, after repeating the sound effect specified by the sequence code number a predetermined number of times, the sound effect specified by the next sequence code number Can be migrated.

  As described above, the data to be set in the sequencer SQi is diversified, and it is necessary to appropriately set these sequence code numbers and accompanying data in the audio control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire sequence code number and the accompanying data are divided in units of 1 byte, and the divided 1 byte data and the register address of the sequencer control register RGj2 to which the 1 byte data is to be set are defined. A set of SAC data as a set is secured in the CGROM 2060 (hereinafter, this is referred to as SAC data for starting the sequencer).

  Then, the host control circuit 2100 activates the simple access controller 2260a by designating a predetermined SAC number in the audio control register RGj1 for SAC control. Here, the SAC number naturally specifies the SAC data for starting the sequencer. Then, based on the operation of the SAC (Simple Access Controller), necessary data is developed in the sequencer control register RGj2. Therefore, the setting operation of the start-up data of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15 is easy.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 12, a group of sequence codes specified by one sequence code number includes a plurality of operation units (sequence steps) separated by a step end code (FFFEH). After all, after all the plurality of sequence steps specified by one sequence code number are executed, the plurality of sequence steps specified by the next sequence code number are executed.

  Since a standby time can be set for each sequencer, the first sequence step (operation of writing a group of setting data) is started after the standby time pointed out by the host control circuit 2100 constituted by the CPU processor. , Until the step end code (FFFEH), the next group of setting data is written into the group of voice control registers after the waiting time. As the standby time, single time information can be set for each sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7). For example, in the preceding sequence step, the standby time applied to the succeeding sequence step following this is set. By doing so, the standby time for each sequence step can be set arbitrarily.

  Continuing the description of the internal configuration of the audio / LED control circuit 2200, as shown in FIG. 11, the output signals (mixed L0, mixed R0, mixed L1, mixed R1, mixed R1, mixed SUB0, mixed output) of the six channels of the channel mixing unit 2270c. The mixed SUB1) is subjected to digital filter processing based on an operation parameter specified in a predetermined voice control register of the command register 2250 in the multi-effector 2280, and then supplied to the total volume 2290 (TV0 to TV3), It is amplified based on TV.

  The total volume value TV is defined by an operation parameter written in a corresponding audio control register. As described above, this operation parameter is basically set in this embodiment by a setting switch (hardware) operated by an attendant. Wear switch). However, when the player operates the volume switch (screen operation) during the game operation (however, during the sound effect standby), the total volume TV is defined (changed) based on the set value. When the player operates the volume switch, the channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) is defined (changed) instead of or in addition to defining the total volume TV based on the set value. You may do it.

[1-2-5-1. Speaker volume control]
Next, the volume control of each speaker 24 performed by the host control circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit.

  The sounds such as game sounds output from the respective speakers 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) are the audio signals of the total volumes TV0 to 3 output to all the channels and the individual signals of all the channels. The volume is controlled by a volume transition operation that changes the volume value of the audio signal stepwise by multiplying the volume of the audio signal by the audio signal for each reproduction channel output to the channel.

  The “audio signal” has volume information (for example, information such as wattage) and can be simply called “volume”. For example, in this specification, “audio signal for each reproduction channel” may be referred to as “volume for each reproduction channel”.

  The audio signals of the total volumes TV0 to TV3 are output by the total value of the audio signal output by the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch and the audio signal output by the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging. And the audio signal is multiplied. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging corresponds to a “first volume control unit” of the present invention.

  The volume of each reproduction channel is obtained by multiplying the audio signal of the primary volume and the audio signal of the secondary volume. The audio signal of the primary volume is composed of the audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840 affected by the volume adjustment and the audio signal output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 not affected by the volume adjustment. It is defined by the total value. In the first reproduction channel primary control 2840, control for changing the volume of a normal game sound (that is, an audio signal (the same applies hereinafter)) is performed based on, for example, an operation of changing the volume by a player or the like. Will be In the second reproduction channel primary control 2850, a control for outputting a specific game sound (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of an illegal act) at a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Is performed. This constant volume may always be the maximum volume. As described above, in the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 which is not affected by the volume adjustment, a specific game sound is controlled to be output at a constant volume, so that only the specific reproduction channel, not the whole, is specified. It is possible to execute control for keeping the volume of the game sound constant. The audio signal of the secondary volume is a volume incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number, and is output by volume controls 2860, 2870, and 2880. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the first playback channel primary control 2840, the second playback channel primary control 2850, and the volume controls 2860, 2870, and 2880 incorporated in the audio data is the “second volume” of the present invention. Control means ”.

  As described above, the sound output from each speaker 24 (L0 / R0 / L1 / R1, SUB0, SUB1) includes the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3, the volume of the primary volume which is the volume for each reproduction channel, and the volume of the secondary volume. Since the volume is defined by multiplying the volume of the game, the volume of the game sound can be varied. In particular, since the volume of the total volumes TV0 to TV3 is also defined by the volume output by the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging. Work efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, with respect to the volume of the normal game sound, the volume can be changed based on an operation performed by the player or the like to change the volume. Regarding the game sound, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 outputs a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to hide the occurrence of an error or an illegal act, and it is possible to enhance security.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch has, for example, three stages of large, medium, and small. There are seven levels of user volume control 2820 on the volume setting screen, and [Small] = [1], [Medium] = “4”, and [Large] = “7” in conjunction with hardware switches.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for a specific sound such as an error sound, the volume can be maintained only by the control of the second reproduction channel primary control 2850. It is possible to easily perform volume control such as changing the volume of other normal sounds in accordance with the volume adjustment while maintaining the volume. The processing by the host control circuit 2100 when the volume adjustment is performed will be described later with reference to FIGS.

[1-2-5-2. Connection configuration between digital audio power amplifier and speaker]
Next, a connection configuration between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 provided in the built-in relay board 2600 and its peripheral circuit and the speaker 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24. Note that FIG. 14 shows a state in which the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, a speaker box 24a provided with a speaker 24 is connected to a built-in relay board 2600 via a harness 3000.

  The built-in relay board 2600 includes a digital audio power amplifier 2620, an LC circuit 2630, a connection terminal group 2640 including four connection terminals (first to fourth connection terminals), two resistors 2650 and 2660, and a capacitor. 2670 and a NOT circuit (logic circuit) 2680.

  The digital audio power amplifier 2620 amplifies the input audio signal (audio data), outputs the amplified audio signal to the speaker 24, and drives the speaker 24. LC circuit 2630 is configured by a resonance circuit including a coil and a capacitor. A NOT circuit 2680 is a logic circuit that inverts the level of an input signal and outputs the inverted signal.

  A clock input terminal (MCK) and a data input terminal (SDATA) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the audio / LED control circuit 2200. The clock signal (master clock signal) output from the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is input to the clock input terminal (MCK) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and the audio / LED is input to the data input terminal (SDATA). The audio signal (audio data) output from control circuit 2200 is input.

  Further, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the first connection terminal and the first connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 via the LC circuit 2630, respectively. Connected to the second connection terminal. In the present embodiment, an example in which two output terminals of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are provided is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately changed according to, for example, the function or specification of the speaker 24. Can be.

  Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a mute terminal (MUTE: audio output control terminal). When the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is LOW, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 outputs the audio signal from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). It has a function of stopping output or bringing these output terminals into a grounded state via a high resistance (hereinafter, referred to as a mute function). That is, when the level of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is a LOW level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 transmits the first audio signal from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) to the first terminal of the internal relay board 2600. A function of generating a state in which the output of the audio signal to the connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped;

  On the other hand, when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal (MUTE) is HIGH, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 outputs the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). To output an audio signal.

  The third connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 via the resistor 2660. An output terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 is connected to a mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. The signal wiring between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the resistor 2660 is connected to the power supply voltage (+5 V) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the resistor 2650. Further, a signal wiring between the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 and the resistor 2660 is connected (grounded) to a ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the capacitor 2670. Further, the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to a ground (GND) terminal.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the speaker 24 is attached to a speaker box 24a formed of a wooden frame. Further, the speaker box 24a is provided with a connection terminal group 24b including four connection terminals (first to fourth connection terminals). Then, the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected to the speaker 24 via signal wiring. Further, the third connection terminal (specific connection terminal) of the speaker box 24a is electrically connected to the fourth connection terminal by the signal wiring W1.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the harness 3000 is configured by bundling four signal wires. Then, one of the four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings is connected to the first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal of built-in relay board 2600, respectively. On the other hand, the other four connection terminals (fifth connection terminal to eighth connection terminal) of the four signal wires are connected to the first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a, respectively. That is, the first connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the first connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the first connection terminal and the fifth connection terminal in the harness 3000, and And the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the second connection terminal and the sixth connection terminal in the harness 3000. Further, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the third connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the third connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the harness 3000. The fourth connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the fourth connection terminal and the eighth connection terminal in the harness 3000. Thereby, speaker 24 is connected to built-in relay board 2600 via harness 3000.

  Note that the number of signal wires included in the harness 3000 is not limited to four, and may be appropriately changed according to, for example, the specifications of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, the connection configuration between the two, and the like. The harness 3000 has at least signal wiring for connecting the output terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24 and signal wiring for grounding the mute terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 via the speaker box 24a. Should just be included.

  When the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 are connected via the harness 3000 as described above, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected via the harness 3000. Connected to the speaker 24. The mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is grounded via the NOT circuit 2680, the harness 3000, and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.

  As a result, when the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620) via the harness 3000, a LOW level voltage signal is input to the NOT circuit 2680. The level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) becomes HIGH level. In this case, an audio signal is output to the speaker 24 from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

  On the other hand, when the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is opened. In this case, since the power supply voltage (+5 V) is input to the NOT circuit 2680, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 becomes the LOW level, and the digital audio power amplifier The above-described mute function of 2620 is activated.

  That is, when the speaker 24 is separated from the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. Is generated such that the output of the audio signal to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped. As a result, occurrence of a resonance phenomenon between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (output terminal) and the first and second connection terminals of the built-in relay board 2600 is suppressed, and failure such as failure of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is prevented. Can be prevented.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be operated regardless of software control by the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the speaker 24 is detached from the built-in relay board 2600, even if the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200 recognize that the output stop control of the audio signal is being performed, the program may not be executed. In the case where the audio signal is output erroneously due to a bug (defect) or the like, or in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the gaming board cannot be replaced unless the speaker 24 is removed from the harness 3000, after the replacement of the gaming board is completed. Even if the door is closed and the audio output is started without connecting the speaker 24 and the harness 3000 by mistake, the above-described mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 operates in hardware. In this case, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be reliably protected, and the safety of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the harness 3000 and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a. It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided in built-in relay board 2600. In such a configuration, when the signal level of the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is LOW, is this factor due to the grounding of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600? Since the determination can be made by measuring the signal level of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, the digital output operation from the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be managed more accurately.

[1-2-6. Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 2300 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the display control circuit 2300 includes a memory controller 2310, a command memory 2320, a command parser 2330, a moving image decoder 2340, a still image decoder 2350, an SDRAM controller 2360, a built-in VRAM 2370, a first A display controller 2380, a second display controller 2390, a 3D (Dimension) geometry engine 2400, and a rendering engine 2410 are provided. The connection relation of each part in the display control circuit 2300 and the connection relation between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

  In the display control circuit 2300, the memory controller 2310 is connected to a command parser 2330, a moving image decoder 2340, and a still image decoder 2350. The command parser 2330 is connected to a command memory 2320, a moving image decoder 2340, a still image decoder 2350, and a 3D geometry engine 2400, in addition to the memory controller 2310. The video decoder 2340 is connected to the SDRAM controller 2360 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330. The still image decoder 2350 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330.

  In the display control circuit 2300, the SDRAM controller 2360 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370, the first display controller 2380, and the second display controller 2390, in addition to the moving picture decoder 2340. The built-in VRAM 2370 is connected to a first display controller 2380, a second display controller 2390, and a rendering engine 2410 in addition to the still image decoder 2350 and the SDRAM controller 2360. Further, the 3D geometry engine 2400 is connected to a rendering engine 2410 in addition to the command parser 2330.

  The SDRAM 2500 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the SDRAM controller 2360 in the display control circuit 2300. The CGROM board 2040 is connected to a memory controller 2310 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to a memory controller 2310 and a command memory 2320 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the display device 16 is connected to a first display controller 2380 and a second display controller 2390 in the display control circuit 2300.

  Next, the configuration of each unit in the display control circuit 2300 will be described.

  The memory controller 2310 mainly performs communication control between various external memories (the CGROM board 2040 and the SDRAM 2500) and the display control circuit 2300. For example, the memory controller 2310 performs transmission / reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, processing of memory ready, busy management, and the like, and data (effect data) stored in designated addresses for various memories. , Command data, etc.).

  The command memory 2320 is a built-in memory for storing a command list. Note that the command list can be stored in the SDRAM 2500 and the CGROM board 2040 (CGROM 2060) in addition to the command memory 2320.

  The command parser 2330 acquires a command list from a specified memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500, or CGROM 2060). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the type of the memory in which the command list is arranged (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060) is stored in the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 2300 by the host control circuit 2100; The start address is set. Then, the command parser 2330 accesses the start address in the memory specified in the system control register (not shown) to acquire the command list.

  In addition, the command parser 2330 analyzes the acquired command list to generate a specific control code, and outputs the control code to the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. In this embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 2300 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 2330.

  The moving image decoder 2340 decodes (decodes) the moving image compressed data obtained from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the moving image decoder 2340 outputs the decoded moving image data to the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM). Note that the moving image data (decoding result) output from the moving image decoder 2340 is stored in a movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500.

  Still picture decoder 2350 decodes still picture compressed data obtained from CGROM board 2040 or SDRAM 2500. Then, still image decoder 2350 outputs the decoded still image data to built-in VRAM 2370. The still image data (decoding result) output from still image decoder 2350 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer described later provided in built-in VRAM 2370.

  The SDRAM controller 2360 is a controller that controls operations such as a process of storing decoded moving image data and still image data in the RAM and a process of transferring image data between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500.

  The built-in VRAM 2370 operates as a work RAM when performing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in the drawing control process by the display control circuit 2300. Further, in image data transfer processing between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500, which is performed in each processing step in a drawing control process described later, various image data is temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 2370.

  Each of the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 acquires a rendering result (rendering result) generated by the rendering engine 2410, and outputs the rendering result to the display device 16. Thereby, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16. When two display controllers are provided as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two screens are provided on the display device 16 by one display control circuit 2300 (one chip) and each screen is provided. Can be controlled independently.

  The 3D geometry engine 2400 converts a three-dimensional information into a two-dimensional information (projection conversion process) based on a control code input from the command parser 2330, and performs affine transformation such as enlargement, reduction, rotation, and movement of a figure. (Graphic conversion) processing is performed. Then, the 3D geometry engine 2400 outputs the result of the conversion processing to the rendering engine 2410.

  The rendering engine 2410 refers to a texture source (SDRAM 2500 in the present embodiment) in which the expanded still image data and moving image data are stored, and performs a rendering (drawing) process on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to a rendering target (in the present embodiment, the built-in VRAM 2370 or the SDRAM 2500).

  Note that “rendering (drawing)” in the present specification refers to editing decoded data in accordance with designation information (in this embodiment, information output from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as scaling and rotation of a moving image. It is to be. The “rendering engine” here includes, for example, a “rasterizer”, a “pixel shader”, and the like. Therefore, in the rendering engine 2410, similar to the pixel shader, the ARGB value (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component, on a pixel-by-pixel basis for image data , And B: the luminance value of the blue component).

[1-2-6-1. Connection configuration between display control circuit and CGROM]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration that can cope with different types of CGROM (NOR type or NAND type) connected to the display control circuit 2300. Here, a connection configuration between the display control circuit 2300 provided in the sub-substrate 2020 and its peripheral circuits and the CGROM mounted on the CGROM substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  FIG. 16 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040a when the CGROM is a NOR-type CGROM 2060a (NOR-type flash memory). FIG. 17 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040b when the CGROM is a NAND CGROM 2060b (NAND flash memory). FIGS. 16 and 17 show a state in which the CGROM board is detached from the sub-board 2020 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion. However, actually, both boards are connected via the board-to-board connector. Connected.

(1) Configuration of Sub-Substrate First, the internal configuration of the sub-substrate 2020 will be described. As is clear from the comparison between FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the configuration of the sub-board 2020 when the NOR-type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a is different from that when the NAND-type CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b. The same is true.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a display control circuit 2300 is provided on the sub-substrate 2020, and a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and an AND circuit 302 (AND gate) are provided as peripheral circuits thereof. The sub-board 2020 is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3030 including a plurality of connection terminals connected directly or indirectly to the display control circuit 2300 via the various buses.

  The bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 includes four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3 in FIG. 16) and another four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3) connected to the four input / output terminals (terminals A0 to A3). And two input / output terminals (terminals B0 to B3 in FIG. 16). The bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 has two control terminals (terminals in FIG. 16) for switching control of the communication direction of signals among the input / output terminals A0 to A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to B3. OE and terminal DIR).

  The bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected between the input / output terminals A0 to A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to B3 according to the combination of the signal levels of the voltage signals applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR. Switch the communication direction of the signal. Accordingly, even if a mismatch occurs in the communication direction (communication operation) for some reason, the safety of the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be ensured. The communication direction switching control operation in the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 will be described later in detail. In addition, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 used in the present embodiment can support a system having two power supplies of 3.3 V and 5 V.

  The display control circuit 2300 is provided with four input / output terminals (terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to GMA28 / GRB0 in FIG. 16). These input / output terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to input / output terminals GMA28 / GRB0 function as address bus output terminals when the CGROM is a NOR type CGROM 2060a, and ready when the CGROM is a NAND type CGROM 2060b. / Busy signal input terminal. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with 26 output terminals (terminals GMA27 to GMA2 in FIG. 16) serving as output terminals for data relating to the address of the data storage area in the CGROM (such as address designation data). Can be

  Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with two CG memory chip enable output terminals (terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 in FIG. 16). In the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has two memory spaces corresponding to two CG memory chip enable output terminals (GCE_0, GCE_1: specific output terminals), and each memory space has a memory Information such as type, bus width, and access timing is set. However, in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has a configuration that cannot support (use) the case where the ROM in the synchronous mode and the ROM in the asynchronous mode are mixed.

  Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with a plurality of data bus input terminals for acquiring image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM via the data bus.

  Note that the electrical connection relationship of the above components provided on the sub-substrate 2020 is as follows.

  The input / output terminals GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output terminals GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the input / output terminals B0 to B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 as shown in FIGS. Is done. The input / output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are connected to the first to fourth connection terminals of the terminal group 3030, respectively. That is, the input / output terminal GMA31 / GRB3 to the input / output terminal GMA28 / GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the first to fourth connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 via the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively. You.

  The output terminals GMA27 to GMA2 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the ninth to thirty-fourth connection terminals of the terminal group 3030, respectively, and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0 and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 , Of the terminal group 3030, respectively. Further, the plurality of data bus input terminals of the display control circuit 2300 are respectively connected to corresponding connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 from the 37th connection terminal.

  The control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, and the control terminal OE is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 302. One input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 are connected to a power supply voltage (+3.3 V) terminal provided on the sub-board 2020, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the sub-board 2020. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal.

(2) Configuration of CGROM Board (NOR Type) Next, an internal configuration of a CGROM board 2040a on which a NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the NOR-type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a, the CGROM board 2040a includes, together with the NOR-type CGROM 2060a, various signal wirings (buses) and terminals including a plurality of connection terminals connected to the CGROM 2060a via the various buses. A group 3110 is provided.

  The first to fourth connection terminals and the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a are connected to the CGROM 2060a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, the CGROM 2060a is a NOR flash memory (random access flash memory), so the first to fourth and ninth to thirty-fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 3110 are included. The connection terminal is connected to an input terminal (not shown) of an address bus of the CGROM 2060a. Further, the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to a CG memory chip enable input terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060a, and the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to the CGROM 2060a by the display control circuit 2300. Is connected to a data output terminal of a CGROM 2060a used when acquiring image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the.

  The fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the eighth connection terminal via the signal wiring W2, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the CGROM board 2040a. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal. That is, when the CGROM 2060a is a NOR flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is grounded via the signal wiring W2. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to a power supply voltage (+3.3 V) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040a.

  The number of connection terminals included in terminal group 3110 is the same as the number of connection terminals of CGROM board connection terminal group 3030 provided on sub-board 2020. When connecting (mounting) the CGROM board 2020a to the sub-board 2020, the two boards are connected such that the connection terminals of the CGROM board 2020a are connected to the connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,..., The 37th connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a are replaced with the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,. 37 connection terminals.

(3) Configuration of CGROM Board (NAND) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM board 2040b on which the NAND CGROM 2060b is mounted will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b shown in FIG. 17, the same components as those of the CGROM substrate 2040a having the NOR type CGROM 2060a shown in FIG.

  When a NAND CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b, a transistor circuit 312 is provided on the CGROM board 2040b as a peripheral circuit along with the NAND CGROM 2060b. The CGROM board 2040b is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3110 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the CGROM 2060b via the various buses.

  First to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the drain terminal of the transistor circuit 312. Note that the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312 is connected to the CGROM 2060b, and the source terminal is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 2040b. That is, the first to fourth connection terminals are connected to the CGROM 2060b via the transistor circuit 312.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 17, the CGROM 2060b is a NAND flash memory (sequential access flash memory), and thus the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312, that is, the first to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 3110. The terminal is connected to a ready / busy output terminal (not shown) provided in the CGROM 2060b.

  The fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal via the signal wiring W3, and is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal. The terminal is connected to a power supply voltage (+3.3 V) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b. That is, when the CGROM 2060b is a NAND flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3 V) terminal via the signal wiring W3.

  The eighth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b.

  Further, the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b are connected to the CGROM 2060b. At this time, the ninth to thirty-fourth connection terminals are connected to input terminals (not shown) of data relating to addresses provided in the CGROM 2060b, and the thirty-fifth connection terminal and the thirty-sixth connection terminal are connected to the CGROM 2060b. Connected to memory chip enable input terminal. The 37th connection terminal and the subsequent connection terminals are connected to a data output terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060b used when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM 2060b. You.

  Note that even when the CGROM board 2040b is mounted with the NAND-type CGROM 2060b, the number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is the same as that of the CGROM board connection terminal group 3030 provided on the sub-board 2020. It is the same as the number of connection terminals. When connecting (mounting) the CGROM board 2020b to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected such that the connection terminals of the CGROM board 2020b are connected to the connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,..., The 37th connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b are replaced with the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,. 37 connection terminals.

[1-2-6-2. Communication operation between display control circuit and CGROM]
Next, an operation when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image / still image) from the CGROM will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is a truth table showing the correspondence between input signals and output signals in the AND circuit 302 provided on the sub-board 2020. FIG. 19 is a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 provided on the sub-board 2020. 5 is a truth table showing the correspondence between the signal levels applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR and the communication direction.

(1) Operations of AND Circuit and Bidirectional Balance Transceiver As shown in FIG. 18, the AND circuit 302 operates as a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 only when a HIGH-level signal (voltage signal) is input to both input terminals. A high-level signal is output to the control terminal OE, and a low-level signal is output to the control terminal OE under other input conditions.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 receives a LOW level signal (voltage signal) at the control terminal OE and a LOW level signal at the control terminal DIR, as shown in FIG. The input / output terminals A0 to A3 of 3010 function as output terminals, and the input / output terminals B0 to B3 function as input terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is a direction from the display control circuit 2300 to the CGROM.

  In addition, when a low-level signal is input to the control terminal OE and a high-level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 outputs input / output terminals A0 to A0 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010. The terminal A3 functions as an input terminal, and the input / output terminals B0 to B3 function as output terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is a direction from the CGROM to the display control circuit 2300.

  When the combination of the signal level input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and the signal level input to the control terminal DIR is a combination other than the above (the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is set to HIGH). When a level signal is input, the input / output terminals A0 to A3 and the input / output terminals B0 to B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are in a HIGH impedance state (“Z” in FIG. 19). That is, the state is equivalent to the open state, and no communication is performed between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

(2) Communication Operation Between Display Control Circuit and CGROM (NOR Type) First, a case where a CGROM board 2040a on which a NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020 is considered.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, a LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 of the display control circuit 2300. Therefore, the LOW signal is supplied to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010. A level signal is input. The signal levels of the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 are set in hardware initialization processing (see FIG. 63 described later).

  In the present embodiment, since the amplitude values of the output signals from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals), which are preset by the sub-control circuit 200, differ according to the type of the CGROM, the display control circuit The amplitude value of the signal output from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 provided in the 2300 changes according to the type of storage means. However, the mode in which the amplitude value of the output signal changes according to the type of the CGROM is not limited to this mode. As will be described in a modified example 7 described later, the display control circuit 2300 detects the type of the connected storage means, and, based on the detection result, changes the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals). The amplitude value of the output signal may be set.

  The fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is grounded via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a and the signal wiring W2 as shown in FIG. Therefore, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

  Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted is connected to the sub-board 2020, as shown in FIG. 19, the input / output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are used as output terminals. The input / output terminals B0 to B3 act as input terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060a in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is a direction from the display control circuit 2300 to the CGROM 2060a.

  In this case, signal wiring connected via the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 and the first to fourth connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040a can be used as an address bus, and display control can be performed. The circuit 2300 can normally execute a memory addressing operation on the NOR-type CGROM 2060a. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can directly specify an address via the address bus and perform a data read operation.

(3) Communication Operation Between Display Control Circuit and CGROM (NAND) Next, a case where a CGROM board 2040b on which a NAND CGROM 2060b is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub-board 2020 is considered.

  Also in this case, in this embodiment, since a LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals CGE_0 and CGE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected to the control terminal OE. Is a LOW level signal. That is, in this embodiment, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 regardless of the type of the CGROM, either the NOR type or the NAND type. As shown in FIG. 17, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b and the signal line W3 via the signal wiring W3. + 3.3V) terminal, a HIGH-level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

  Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040b on which the NAND-type CGROM 2060b is mounted is connected to the sub-board 2020, as shown in FIG. 19, the input / output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are used as input terminals. The input / output terminals B0 to B3 act as output terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060b in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is a direction from the CGROM 2060b to the display control circuit 2300.

  In this case, the signal wiring connected via the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 and the first to fourth connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040b is used as the communication wiring for the ready / busy signal. Can be. That is, in this case, it is possible to execute a process of transmitting a ready / busy signal referred to by the display control circuit 2300 from the CGROM 2060 to the display control circuit 2300 when reading data from the NAND CGROM 2060b by the sequential access method. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can normally execute the operation of acquiring the memory state (ready / busy state) for the NAND CGROM 2060b.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the type of the CGROM changes, the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be performed normally without changing the configuration of the sub-board 2020. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an optimal CGROM can be selected in consideration of, for example, data capacity, communication speed, price, and the like. Also, for example, when manufacturing a new pachinko gaming machine 1, only the type of CGROM is changed by diverting a sub-board 2020 used in a pachinko gaming machine manufactured in the past from conditions such as data capacity and communication speed. Can be easily dealt with. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CGROM can be selected according to the embodiment, and the expandability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be secured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, by using the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, the first to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 3030 of the sub board 2020 and the first connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040 are used. The terminal to the fourth connection terminal can be used as data input / output terminals. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide a data input terminal and an output terminal corresponding to the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040. Can be achieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the “communication mode” between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be switched by the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 according to the type of the CGROM. However, the “communication form” between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM as referred to in this specification means the overall transmission and reception of various information between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

  For example, the “communication form” between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM referred to in the present specification includes data (image data (compressed data of moving image / still image data) required when displaying information related to the rendering operation on the display device 16. Not only the transmission / reception mode between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, but also the transmission / reception mode when information specifying the address of the data stored in the CGROM is communicated between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, and This also includes a transmission / reception mode when the control circuit 2300 receives a ready / busy signal from the CGROM. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the “communication form” referred to in the present specification may mean only the communication form of a portion where the information transmission / reception mode changes according to the type of CGROM.

[2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a view illustrating a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various kinds. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When the "big hit" in the special symbol game or the "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

  In addition, in various winnings, a special symbol start winning prize, which is one condition for performing a special symbol variable display in a special symbol game, and one condition for performing a normal symbol variable display in a normal symbol game. It also includes certain regular symbol starting prizes.

  Hereinafter, an outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

  (1) When a special symbol starting prize is won in the special symbol game, various random numbers (for example, a random number for a jackpot determination and a random number for a symbol determination) are read from various counters (for example, a jackpot determination counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and the extracted random numbers are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 20).

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol starting prize, and the change display of the special symbols is performed on the condition that various data such as random numbers are stored as one condition. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

  Next, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, the big hit determination random number value extracted from the big hit determination counter is referred to, and a big hit determination as to whether or not the big hit is made is performed. Thereafter, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined with reference to the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern (variable display pattern) is referred to. ).

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the special symbol change display is determined.

  Next, as a result of the determined big hit determination, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, a variation pattern of the special symbol, and an effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and a variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that "big hit" has been reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of the various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, the big hit gaming state control process is not executed.

  If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or if the big hit game state control processing has been completed, a game state shift control processing for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control processing, management of a normal game state different from the big hit game state is performed.

  As the gaming state at the time of normal, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a gaming state determined as “big hit” with a predetermined probability (hereinafter, referred to as “normal gaming state”) or a probability determined as “big hit” A game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability game state”) that is greater than a normal game state, or a game state in which a special symbol starting prize is easily obtained as a result of a normal hit determination described below (hereinafter, referred to as a “time reduction game state”). ). After that, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins during a special symbol fluctuating display, various data extracted at the time of the start winning (a random number value for a jackpot determination, a random number value for a symbol determination, etc.). ) Are stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. As described above, storing various data (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit) until the condition for starting the change display of the special symbol is satisfied is referred to as “holding”, and the various data to be held is referred to as start storage.

  That is, when the game ball wins during the special symbol change display, the execution of the special symbol change display corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and is suspended after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The fluctuation display of the special symbols is started in order. Hereinafter, various data on the reserved special symbols are also referred to as “reserved balls”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first and second starting opening prizes) are provided, and up to four special symbol starting prizes are provided for each special symbol starting prize. Until the execution of the special symbol change display can be suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a maximum of eight in total of four first special symbols and four second special symbols.

  Although not shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines a hit of the reserved ball (whether or not a “big hit” has been won) based on the information of the reserved ball described above. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

  (2) When a normal symbol start prize is won in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 20). Refer to the winning process flow).

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol starting prize, and assuming that the random number value is stored as one condition, the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

  Next, when starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the “normal hit” is set. Thereafter, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this processing, the result of the ordinary hit determination is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, the determined result of the normal hit determination and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. .

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not “normal hit” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that "normal hit" is achieved, a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

  In the normal winning game control processing, the possibility of the various winnings described above, especially the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not become "normal hit", the normal hit game control processing is not executed. Thereafter, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described normal symbol control process are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a “big hit” is obtained in the special symbol game, a transition state of the gaming state, and whether or not the “simple hit” is generated in the normal symbol game. The ease with which the control process is performed changes.

  In the present embodiment, as a method of extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method in which a random number value is generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals, a random number value is counted from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. May be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random numbers.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 22 is a hit type when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “main symbol”). FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table stored in the main ROM 102. As shown in FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub main ROM 2050 of the sub control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

  In describing the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 21, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

  When detecting the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the first special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter, and stores the random number stored in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a "big hit determination of the first special symbol") is performed on the extracted random numbers for big hit determination. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the big hit game state is controlled.

  Similarly, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the second special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “big hit determination of the second special symbol”) for the extracted random number for big hit determination is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

  When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be one of “big hit” and “losing” as in the big hit determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is stored in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ), The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be “big hit” or “losing” and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data” and “losing determination value data”) Is stipulated.

  In this embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

  The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”.

  The time reduction flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is “non-time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “0”. In the time saving game state, the number of time savings is also managed by the main CPU 101, and each time the special symbol fluctuates once, the number of time savings is decremented by one.

  In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (normal hit probability) is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of the ordinary electric auditors goods 46 changing from the closed state to the opening state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, in the time-saving gaming state, instead of increasing the normal winning probability as compared with the non-hours-saving gaming state, for example, by increasing the frequency of executing the normal winning lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric winning combination The frequency at which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the normal electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three of the above three aspects may be combined.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal game state in which both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the probable change time short game state in which the probable change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the time reduction game in which the probable change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 in one of the game states.

  When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts a random number for a jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the extracted random for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as the start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the first special symbol, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the extracted big hit determination randomness of the second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the change display of the second special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the second special symbol, a big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. In a low-probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability is relatively low (probable change flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 in setting 1, about 1/290 in setting 2, and about 1/290 in setting 3. The setting is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 1/260, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. When the game state is the high-probability game state (probable change flag ON) in which the big hit probability is relatively high, the big hit probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and 3 in setting 2. The setting is about 1/28, the setting 4 is about 27/27, the setting 5 is about 1/26, and the setting 6 is about 25/25.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, since the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set to the set value. By changing the probability according to the set value, the big hit probability is changed. For example, in the low-probability gaming state of the first special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits is 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It has become.

  Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the gaming state is a low-probability game state (probability change flag OFF) in which the jackpot probability is relatively low, the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, and 280 minutes in setting 3. 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In the high-probability gaming state (probable change flag ON) in which the jackpot probability is relatively high, the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. The setting is 1/1, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

  That is, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is also changed according to the set value by changing the number of the big hit determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits is 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of the big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is also 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It is individual.

  Note that the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if the setting is 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability gaming state (1/28 in the high-probability gaming state), and the jackpot probability is the second special symbol. Is the same as the big hit probability in the big hit determination (1/280 in the low-probability game state, and 1/28 in the high-probability game state).

  In the present embodiment, the setting value is in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value is not necessarily required to be six, and can be arbitrarily determined as long as there are a plurality of steps.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the big hit probability is different when the set value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common big hit probability may be set with a plurality of set values. For example, a common jackpot probability (first probability) is set for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability) is set for setting 3 and setting 4, and a setting 5 The common jackpot probability (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set to be common to setting 6.

  In the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535. By changing the number of the jackpot determination value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is varied for each set value. However, the technique for varying the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this. By setting the number of data common to all the settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as the total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be varied according to the set value. For example, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 218 common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in the setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in the setting 2 The range of 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range of 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability of 1/280), the range of 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability of 1/270) Setting 5 is in the range of 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 is in the range of 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. In addition, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the jackpot determination random number) having more digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Compared with a method in which the range is a fixed value and the number of the big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value, the big hit probability for each set value can be set finely.

  In the above description, the number of the big hit determination value data is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value. It is not essential that they be common. For example, in setting 1, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in a range of 0 to 65535 (the big hit probability is about 1/300). 219, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of jackpot determination value data is 220 and the random number for jackpot determination is The range (width) is in the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280). In setting 4, the number (221) of the jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination are in the range of 0 to 59669. (The big hit probability is about 1/270). In the setting 5, the number of the big hit determination value data is 222 pieces, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in a range of 0 to 57719 (the big hit probability is about 1/260). And in setting 6 , The number of the jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even when both the range (width) is changed according to the set value, the set value is compared with the method in which the range of the random number for the big hit determination is fixed and the number of the big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 described later (see FIG. 42). In addition to or instead of determining whether or not the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set to the set value. It may be checked whether or not the number is within the range, and / or whether or not the number of the big hit determination value data is a number specified in the set value. If it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number and / or the number of the jackpot determination value data is out of the range corresponding to the set value) (step described later) If it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[3-2. Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the jackpot distribution when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all the settings. Note that the contents of the table shown in FIG. 22 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random numbers to a special symbol 1-1 (distribution probability 25.0%), Toku 1-2 (allocation probability 25.0%), Toku 1-3 (allocation probability 25.0%), and Toku 1-4 (allocation probability 25.0%) ). The special chart 1-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds being 4, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of time savings being 100. In FIG. 1-2, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started). It is a big hit. The special chart 1-3 is a big hit with the number of rounds being 10, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of time savings being 100. The special map 1-4 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol for a fluctuating time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probable change flag is turned ON as in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4). This is a so-called “probable loop machine” in which the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big-hit gaming state starts after the big-hit gaming state ends. In such a probability changing loop machine, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends, and then the next big hit game state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played. Then, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability gaming state is a big hit and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, as shown in the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3, the probability change flag If it is a big hit that does not turn ON), after the big hit game state ends, the game is controlled not to the high probability game state but to the low probability game state.

  When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 converts the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determining random numbers into a special symbol 2-1 (allocation probability 50.0%) or a special symbol. 2-2 (allocation probability 50.0%). The special map 2-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds 10, the probability change flag OFF, and the number of time savings of 100. The special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the second special symbol for a fluctuating time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a loss symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol at the determined loss symbol.

  The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is controlled to a high probability game state (game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the big hit game state is set. Is controlled to a low-probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the probable change flag is set to OFF). Hereinafter, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is OFF, and the big hit of 100 times (for example, the big hit in Tokuju 1-1) is called “4R normal big hit”, and the number of rounds, the certain change flag is ON, and the next big hit game is A jackpot whose time saving continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1-2) is called a “4R probability changing jackpot”, and has a number of rounds of 10, a probability changing flag OFF, and a jackpot of 100 times-saving times (eg, Toku-zu 1-). 3, the jackpot of the special map 2-1 is referred to as "10R normal big hit", and the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the jackpot whose time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed (for example, the special map 1-4, The big hit in Tokujin Figure 2-2) is referred to as "10R probability variable big hit".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is determined based on the extracted symbol determining random numbers. Whether the time reduction flag is set to ON or OFF may be determined according to the main symbol to be performed.

[3-3. Special design fluctuation time]
Next, a flow until the change time of the special symbol is determined will be described with reference to FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the sub-control circuit 200 (the host control circuit 2100). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the determined special pattern variation pattern (that is, the variation time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 23 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, there is a case where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 23, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol big hit determination and the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol big hit determination. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table includes a special symbol big hit determination result, a game state, a reach determination random number range, a main symbol when the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit, and an effect selection. It defines the relationship among the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents. However, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the probability-variable time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not distinguished. Also, different random number ranges are set for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the special symbol fluctuation time.

  The reach determination random number range is a random number that is used to determine whether or not to perform a reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from a reach determination counter when a game ball has won a first startup port 420 or a second startup port 440 (both of which are shown in FIG. 5 for example), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number when starting the special symbol change display. When the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 stores the big hit determination in the main RAM 103. Using the reach determination random number, it is determined whether or not a reach effect is to be executed. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 in the settings 1.2. The setting is set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and is set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is set to 1. 2 is defined as 0 to 10, setting 3 and 4 is defined as 0 to 11, and setting 5.6 is defined as 0 to 12.

  As described above, in the case where the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2;・ Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4 That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to perform the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 5 and the setting 5. 6, but is not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is for the case where the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. However, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 Determines that the reach effect is to be executed regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

  The effect selection random number range is a random number used for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts an effect selection random number from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (both of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example). The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines an effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 in accordance with a game state and a result of determining whether or not to execute a reach effect (only when a result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss). Is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state.

  Specifically, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed is: It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 59 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Is determined. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal fluctuation A) is set to 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal fluctuation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 59 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during the working hours) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (short variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened fluctuation B) is defined in the range of 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  In addition, since the main symbol is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, when the special symbol big hit determination result is a loss, the determination of the change time of the special symbol is not involved.

  The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag OFF and the time saving flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium normal reach) is set to 0 to 1 in settings 1.2 and 0 to 2 in settings 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normal medium super reach A) is set to 2 to 49 in setting 1.2, and to 3 to 49 in setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time saving game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a special symbol variation time, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is set to 0 to 1 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 2 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is set to 2 to 49 in settings 1.2 and 3 to 49 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during working hours) is set to 50 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination as to whether to execute the reach effect are the same, the fluctuation of the special symbol is changed. As for the time, it is easier for the setting 3 and 4 to be determined to have a shorter fluctuation time than for the setting 1.2 and the setting 5.6 is more easily determined to be the shorter fluctuation time than for the setting 3.4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the more the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (ie, the number of lotteries). Eventually, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game state when viewed in the unit time is high, and the probability that the big hit game state is executed in the unit time is also high. An advantageous game can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the effect selection random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 5 and the setting 6. Although common, it is not limited to this, and may be different for all set values.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit is determined commonly for all the main symbols, but is not limited to this, and the special symbol is changed according to the main symbol. May be configured to vary.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” indicates the normal medium super reach B having a fluctuation time of 40000 msec.

  The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, a fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Stop pattern of decorative pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined at the selection rate shown in FIG. 22 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit will be described. . The contents of the table shown in FIG. 24 are stored in the sub main ROM 2050 of the sub control circuit 200.

  Upon receiving the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) stops the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command, regardless of the set value. Determine the design. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special symbol 1-2, the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol (for example, the symbol “7”). ), The distribution probability is 0%, so that all of the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in the present embodiment) are the same even symbol (allocation probability of 30.0%), or all of them. Are determined to be the same odd symbols (allocation probability: 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is a “7” symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the player can recognize a big hit with a high degree of profit from the player, another symbol (for example, a “V” symbol) is set as the specific symbol. Is also good.

  As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 24 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, A symbol other than the symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 24 correspond to, for example, symbols in which at least one of the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

  As described above, according to FIG. 24, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is determined by either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state, and whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

  That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 22 is the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, or the special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit where the probability change flag is not set ON), Regardless of the set value, the operation always stops in a mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “first mode”) in which all decorative symbols are the same even-numbered symbols.

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-2 (4R probable big hit), regardless of the set value, the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (other than the "7" symbol which is the specific symbol). (Odd number symbol) (hereinafter referred to as “second mode”).

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-4 (10R probability variable hit), regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, or all the decorative symbols have the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as a “specific mode”).

  Furthermore, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the operation is stopped in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Toku-zu 1-4 and Toku-zu 2-2 have a 10R probability variable jackpot, but since Toku-zu 1-4 is a jackpot based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420, the jackpot in the normal gaming state It is highly likely that he was won. In addition, since the special map 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, there is a high possibility that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state.

  In this manner, when stopping in a specific mode, the 10R certain jackpot with the greatest profit for the player is determined, and when stopping in a mode in which all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, a certain jackpot (4R certain jackpot or 10R jackpot) is obtained. (Variable jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, in the case of stopping in the first mode, although it is determined that the 10R certainty-win is not the largest for the player, the possibility of the 4R certainty-win is left.

  If the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all the decorative symbols have stopped, or the jackpot game The notification may be performed during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the big hit gaming state ends. Although not employed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even though the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends is the big hit controlled to the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state May be controlled to a so-called “latent probability change state” in which the control is not explicitly indicated to the player.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]

Although the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, the present invention is not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, the following description is an example, and it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this.
[4-1. Variation of special symbol fluctuation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a variation of the special symbol fluctuation time (that is, the special symbol fluctuation pattern). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol fluctuation time determination table stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, as described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

  In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 25, the number of lotteries for counting the number of times the number of times the special symbol changes (that is, the number of special symbol lotteries). A counting means (not shown) is provided. This lottery number counting means resets, for example, at the start of the big hit game state, and starts counting the number of times the special symbol has changed starting from the end of the big hit game state.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in another example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probable change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect is made. This is performed in accordance with both the number of times the special symbol has been changed counted from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends and the set value.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol has changed from a specific point in time (for example, the point at which the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000, a reach determination random number range in which it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed is determined. Are set to 0 to 25 in the setting 1.2, set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. These are the same as FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. Are set to 0 to 5 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 1 in the settings 5.6. That is, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the setting 1.2 as compared to the setting 3.4, and compared to the setting 5.6 in the setting 3.4. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 in the setting 1.2 and the setting 5.6).

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times In comparison with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed, the special symbol change time is also changed. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach). Are set to 0 to 57 in settings 1.2 and 0 to 58 in settings 3.4 and 0 to 59 in settings 5.6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common. These are the same as FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the change time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 1 No. to 4 are not specified, and settings 5 and 6 are set to 0 to 99. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4 and is not defined in settings 5 and 6. . Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normal medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 4, and is specified in the settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called large-added situation in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends is 1001 or more, the set value is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

  If the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed, the point at which the big hit game state ends is determined as the starting point. If the number of times the special symbol changes is 1001 or more, the higher the set value is, the lower the execution probability of the reach effect is. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of execution of the reach effect that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short.

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state becomes 1001 times or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the change time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of times the special symbol changes per time (that is, the number of lotteries) is further increased. Eventually, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game as seen in the unit time increases will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed in the unit time will be higher.

  When the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the jackpot gaming state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot gaming state When the number of times of the change of the special symbol from the end of the game becomes 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect is remarkably different according to the set value. There can be room to do it. With this, when a so-called "big hit" occurs, the set value set for the player can be changed without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). Providing an opportunity that can be guessed makes it possible to give the player pleasure. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player thinks that the reach effect should normally be achieved, the present embodiment expects that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value is, the higher the set value is. Since the player can embrace, even if the execution frequency of the reach effect is low, it is possible to reduce a decrease in willingness to continue the game.

  In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of times of the change of the special symbol is counted is the time when the big hit gaming state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high probability gaming state becomes An arbitrary point can be set as the starting point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends or the time-saving gaming state ends in a pachinko machine called a so-called ST machine that ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value. It need not be more than one time. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number, as long as the player feels that the player is absorbed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time becomes equal to or more than the specified number of times, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value. Is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter, referred to as “opening time”) between the time when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot and the time when the control is actually performed to the jackpot gaming state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) between the end of the big hit game state and the start of the display of the change of the special symbol. The host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300) displays the opening effect on the display device 16 during the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production that indicates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production that congratulates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method (for example, right-handed) in the big hit game state An effect to teach is performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state, an effect indicating the number of times the jackpot game state is continued (the number of extended play), and a game state after the jackpot game state ends with a high probability game An effect that indicates that the state is controlled, an effect that teaches a game method (for example, returning to left-handed) in the game state after the big hit game state is completed, and an effect that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc. are performed.

  Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the big hit game state increases as the set value increases. Can be shorter. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times the special symbol changes per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the expected value of a ball is higher as the set value is higher (for example, the probability of a big hit is higher as the set value is higher), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the lower set value. In view of the possibility that the setting may be made, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value with a higher expected value of the ball, the longer the total time or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time, thereby ensuring the interest of the game with the high set value. In addition, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

  It should be noted that the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is won to the starting opening (the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, the ending time, and the big hitting game state are controlled. Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and a setting check process (see FIG. 42) in step S74 or step S82 described later is executed. If it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[4-2. Variation example of stop design of big hit distribution and decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 28, a first modified example and a second modified example of big hit distribution (selection rate of the main symbol) when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, The stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selectivity of the main symbol differs according to the set value. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a case where the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol of FIG. FIG. 28 is a modified example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modified example and the second modified example.

[4-2-1. First Modification]
First, the first modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 26 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 28 are stored in the sub main ROM 2050 of the sub control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the first modification, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random number in accordance with the set value. By probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-8, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5%) with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4. %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In the setting 6, the main symbols are set as the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  That is, in the special maps 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) (higher in setting 1 to 4).

  Similarly, in Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both of which are 10R probability-variable jackpots) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0% and 20.0% in setting 6) are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (For example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30.000 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 28, the host control circuit 2100 sends the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1 -7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3 (4R ordinary jackpot or 10R ordinary jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set values, decorations always displayed on the display device 16, for example. The symbols are controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when the state is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100 irrespective of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50. (0%). Also, when the main symbol is the special pattern 1-4 (4R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 irrespective of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate). Control at a rate of 75.0%). Here, at a high set value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, despite the fact that the special map 1-2 and the special map 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, in the case of Tokujin 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate) regardless of the set value. (50.0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high set value is lower than the low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

  Further, similarly, in the case of Toku-zu 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0) regardless of the set value. %). Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% at setting 5 and 10.0% at setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than that of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is smaller than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  In this way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the decoration pattern stop mode can be different depending on the set value even if the big hit type is the same. Become. In particular, when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 or 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variable big hit) is the same when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Become.

[4-2-2. Second Modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 27 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  In the first modified example, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a certainty change attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). And, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the entry of the game ball to the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the big hit game state is ended is controlled to the high probability game state, and to the probability change attacker When the big hit game state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to the low probability game state. As described above, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability game state based on the entry of a game ball into a probable variable attacker is also a so-called “probable loop machine”.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in the second modified example, the ease of entry of the game ball into the certainty-variable attacker varies depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special map 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in such a manner that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the big hit game state is formed in a mode in which the game ball easily enters the probability change attacker. Is controlled. In the present embodiment, the number of times reduced in the case of a big hit in the “mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is difficult” is 100 times, and the “mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is easy”. If it is a big hit, the time reduction continues until the next big hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the “mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker” is equivalent to almost no possibility that the game ball enters the probable attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). Is controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to. In addition, the “mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker” means that the hit ball is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probable attacker (for example, the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5 for example)). This is a mode in which a game ball almost enters a probability change attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high-probability game state with a probability close to almost 100%). Therefore, in the second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable change attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and the "mode in which the game ball easily enters the probable change attacker". The big hit is called a "probable big hit".

  However, if it is “an aspect in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker”, the game state is controlled to the high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%. Instead of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when the “mode in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is easy”, “the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker” A mode in which the game state is controlled to the high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode” may be adopted.

  As a method of creating a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the probable attacker and an easy mode, for example, apart from the special winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) having the probabilistic attacker inside, the probabilistic attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2) -4), it is controlled to the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, and it is difficult to enter the game ball into the certainty changing attacker (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 1) -5, Toku-zu 1-7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3), by controlling to the big hit game state in which the other big-winning openings are opened without opening the big winning opening 540, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as long as it is possible to create an embodiment in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable attacker and an easy embodiment.

  Further, as described above, when the special winning opening 540 provided with the probability changing attacker inside and another special winning opening (not shown) not provided with the certainty changing attacker are provided, the large winning opening opened in the big hit game state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at the low setting value such as the setting 1, the big hit game state in which the other big winning opening is opened more easily than the big winning opening 540, and at the high setting value such as the setting 6, the larger winning opening is more than the other big winning opening. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, such that the big winning game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is easily selected.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in such a second modification, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random number and sets the main symbol to the set value. With the probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, One of the special figures 1-8 is determined. However, in the second modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5%) with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4. %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In the setting 6, the main symbols are set as the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  That is, in the special maps 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) (higher in setting 1 to 4).

  Similarly, in Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both of which are 10R probability-variable jackpots) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0% and 20.0% in setting 6) are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (For example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30.000 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 28, the host control circuit 2100 sends the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1 -7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3 (4R ordinary jackpot or 10R ordinary jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set values, decorations always displayed on the display device 16, for example. The symbols are controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when the state is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100 irrespective of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50. (0%). Also, when the main symbol is the special pattern 1-4 (4R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 irrespective of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate). Control at a rate of 75.0%). Here, at a high set value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, despite the fact that the special map 1-2 and the special map 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, in the case of Tokujin 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate) regardless of the set value. (50.0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high set value is lower than the low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

  Further, similarly, in the case of Toku-zu 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0) regardless of the set value. %). Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% at setting 5 and 10.0% at setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than that of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is smaller than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  As described above, in the second modified example, similarly to the first modified example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, even if the big hit type is the same, decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make it possible to change the stop mode of the symbol. In particular, when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 or 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variable big hit) is the same when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Become.

  In each of the first and second modifications, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value by changing the selectivity of the main symbol according to the set value. are doing. That is, the host control circuit 2100 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, according to the set value. The stop symbols of the decorative symbols can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control by the host control circuit 2100 may be configured so that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value.

  According to the above-described first and second modifications, providing a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, providing a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability change entry rate, and the time reduction entry rate. It becomes possible.

[5. Outline of drawing control method]
Here, an outline of a drawing control process executed by the display control circuit 2300 when a control signal of a drawing request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) during the drawing control process.

  In the present embodiment, data (compressed data) of an image (moving image and / or still image) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 16 is stored in the CGROM 2060 in the CGROM board 2040. Then, when the control signal of the drawing request is input to the display control circuit 2300, the display control circuit 2300 first reads and decodes (decompresses) the image compression data from the CGROM 2060. At this time, when the moving image compressed data is read, the moving image decoder 2340 in the display control circuit 2300 decodes the moving image compressed data, and when the still image compressed data is read, the moving image compressed data in the display control circuit 2300 is read. The still image compressed data is decoded by the still image decoder 2350 of FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 2300 writes the decoding result (image expansion data) of the image data to a predetermined buffer specified as a texture source. In the present embodiment, a movie buffer and a texture buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) and a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370 are designated as texture sources. For example, when displaying one moving image, the expanded moving image data (decoding result) is written out to a movie buffer in the SDRAM 2500. For example, when displaying one still image, the expanded still image data is written out to a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370.

  Next, the display control circuit 2300 specifies a rendering target to which a rendering (rendering) result of the image data is written. As the rendering target, for example, a frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM), a frame buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 2370, and the like can be designated.

  Next, the display control circuit 2300 operates the rendering engine 2410 to perform a rendering process on the decoding result of the image data written to the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. In this process, the rendering process is performed in accordance with designation information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as scaling and rotation of the moving image.

  Next, the display control circuit 2300 displays the rendering result (display output data) written on the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 16.

  In the present embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets. When writing the rendering result from the rendering engine 2410 to the frame buffer, the frame buffer in which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when a rendering result is written to one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written to the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written to one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the process of writing the rendering result to one frame buffer and the process of writing the rendering result to the other frame buffer are alternately executed for each frame.

  In the above-described flow of the rendering result writing process and the display process, the rendering result written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (one side). The function of the frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function.) The rendering result written to the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in the present embodiment, the process of displaying the rendering result in one frame buffer and the process of displaying the rendering result in the other frame buffer are alternately executed for each frame.

[6. Overview of audio playback control method]
Next, an outline of a sound reproduction process executed by the sound / LED control circuit 2200 when a sound request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the sound / LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the audio data output to the speaker 24 is stored in the CGROM 2060. The audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 is compressed data of a phrase (phrase) specified by a phrase number NUM (000H to 1FFFH) having a 13-bit length. Direction sounds (notification sounds) and the like are stored in a maximum of 8192 types (= 213), each corresponding to a phrase number NUM. The phrase number NUM is specified by a set value (operation parameter) of a voice command transmitted from the host control circuit 2100 to the command register 2250 of the voice / LED control circuit 2200.

  The voice command is used for Individual Write for transmitting a set value of 1 byte length to any one of a number of voice control registers built in the voice / LED control circuit 2200, or a series of N voice commands. Is used for Block Write purpose to transmit a group of N set values to the voice control register group.

  In any case, the audio control register to be accessed is specified by a 1-byte length register address, and the storage capacity of each audio control register is 1 byte. In this embodiment, a large number of voice control registers are secured in seven register banks. That is, since the register bank is divided into seven sections, the total number of audio control registers is theoretically 7 × 256 at maximum.

  In this embodiment, a specific register address is an audio control register for register bank setting in all register banks. Therefore, in order to specify any one of the 7 × 256 voice control registers, the preceding voice command writes the register bank into the voice control register for bank setting, and then controls the voice control belonging to the register bank. The register is specified by a 1-byte register address.

  By the way, the setting operation of the set value to the voice control register does not necessarily need to directly specify the register address of the voice control register to be set, and SAC data (Simple Access Code Data) stored in the CGROM 2060, A series of setting operations for a group of audio control registers can be completed by designating a sequence code (Sequence Code). In order to realize such an operation, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 includes four simple access controllers 2260a (simple access controllers) and 16 sequencers 2260b (sequencers) shown in FIG. .

  Explaining from SAC (Simple Access Code) data for causing the simple access controller 2260a to function, the SAC data includes a register address (1 byte) of a voice control register and a set value (1 byte) in the voice control register. It is a data group of a maximum of 512 sets (= 1024 bytes) corresponding thereto, and means an aggregate terminated with a SAC end code (FFFFH) (see FIG. 12).

  In the case of the present embodiment, up to 8192 types (= 213) of such SAC data can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 stores the 13-bit long SAC number in the audio control register for SAC control (see FIG. 12). ) Allows the simple access controller 2260a to function. The simple access controller 2260a that has started the function reads the group of SAC data specified by the SAC number in order from the CGROM 2060, and sets the set value indicated by the SAC data in the voice control register indicated by the SAC data.

  Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 only needs to write (register) the SAC number in the audio control register for SAC control, and performs a series of setting operations without individually specifying register addresses of the audio control register. Can be instructed. Note that a standby time (standby information as ancillary data) that defines the start timing of a series of setting operations can be set in the audio control register for SAC control, and the SAC number to the audio control register for SAC control can be set. From the write timing, the setting start timing of the voice control register by the simple access controller 2260a can be delayed.

  Subsequently, a sequence code (Sequence Code) for causing the sequencer 2260b to function will be described. Like the SAC data, the sequence code is a plurality of sets of data in which the register address (1 byte) of the audio control register and the set value (1 byte) of the audio control register are associated (see FIG. 12). However, unlike the SAC data, the sequence code can specify a plurality of operation steps (a plurality of sequence steps) that can be executed intermittently after a predetermined standby time.

  Further, in the audio control register for controlling the sequencer (Sequencer), a standby time (standby information) for specifying the start timing of the setting operation, presence / absence of the repetition operation, and the number of repetitions (loop information) for each of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15 are stored. ) Can be included. Therefore, the sequence code specifies a series of sound effects executed in a certain time.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the plurality of operation steps are separated by a step end code (FFFEH), and the end of the plurality of operation steps is terminated by a sequence end code (FFFFH). In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 types of sequence codes (= 213) can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 stores a sequence code number of 13-bit length and ancillary data defining the operation of the sequencer in a sequencer (Sequencer). By writing to the control voice control register, a series of setting operations can be instructed to the sequencer 2260b.

  In the present embodiment, only the necessary sets of such SAC data and sequence codes are stored in the CGROM 2060 in advance, and a group of SAC data and a group of sequence codes are specified by SAC numbers and sequence code numbers. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the voice command for the write purpose specifies not only a direct setting operation to the voice control register but also an indirect setting operation via the simple access controller 2260a and the sequencer 2260b. It is also included.

  To realize the above operation, the host control circuit 2100 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200 are provided with a parallel signal line (data bus) capable of transmitting / receiving 1-byte data and a 2-bit operation management capable of transmitting operation management data. A data line (address bus), a 2-bit control signal line capable of controlling a read / write operation (read / write), and a chip select signal line for selecting the audio / LED control circuit 2200 are connected.

  The parallel signal line is realized by a data bus of the host control circuit 2100, and the operation management data line is realized by an address bus of the host control circuit 2100. The audio / LED control circuit 2200 is provided with three port numbers PORT in which the upper 6 bits are common and the lower 2 bits are 00, 01, and 10. The host control circuit 2100 uses these ports. When an I / OREAD command or an I / OWRITE command for the number PORT is executed, the circuit is configured so that the chip select signal CS becomes active level in any case.

  When the I / O READ instruction or the I / O WRITE instruction is executed, the data output to the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address bus becomes operation management data A0 to A1 for the audio / LED control circuit 2200. Based on .about.A1, it is specified whether 1-byte data on the data bus at that time is a register address or write data or read data.

  That is, if the address data is [00], the data on the data bus at that timing is evaluated as a register address, while if the address data is [01], the data on the data bus at that timing is write data or read data. Data. The execution of the I / OREAD instruction is read data, and the execution of the I / OWRITE instruction is write data.

  Therefore, the operation of transmitting a voice command for writing a predetermined setting value to a predetermined voice control register is performed by changing the lower two bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice / LED control circuit 2200 while changing the I / O WRITE instruction. It is realized by executing continuously. Specifically, the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are changed from [00] to [01], while the 1-byte data of the data bus is changed from [register address of voice control register] to [voice control register]. , The transmission operation of the predetermined voice command is realized.

  When the write data is a plurality of bytes in length, as in the case of transmitting the SAC number (13 bits), the sequence code number (13 bits), and the accompanying control data (standby information, loop information, etc.), When the register address of the register is continuous, the operation management data A0 to A1 of [01] is repeated as [00] → [01] → [01] → [01], and write data of a plurality of bytes is transmitted. .

  The voice command transmitted in this manner is thereafter effective within the voice / LED control circuit 2200 unless a communication error occurs. However, when a communication error is recognized, such as when data of a plurality of bytes do not match each other, the voice command is not activated. Then, an error flag of the voice control register is set, and this error flag (status information STS) is an I / O READ instruction that changes the operation management data A0 to A1 of the address bus from [01] to [10]. Can be received.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the last cycle in which the operation management data A0 to A1 transitions from [00] → [01] →... [01] → [10], error information (abnormal FFH) can be obtained. Then, by retransmitting the voice command that could not be properly transmitted in parallel, the voice effect can be appropriately advanced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the sound effect is suddenly interrupted.

  On the other hand, in the data reading operation by the I / OREAD operation, the I / OWRITE instruction and the I / OREAD instruction are continuously executed while shifting the lower two bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the audio / LED control circuit 2200. This is achieved by: If the read data has a length of a plurality of bytes, the I / OREAD instruction is continued for the required number of bytes.

  To be more specific, first, as an I / O WRITE operation, for the port number PORT in which the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [00], [register address of the voice control register storing the operation status and the like ( 1 byte length)]. Next, if an I / OREAD instruction is executed for the port number PORT where the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [01], necessary data such as operation status is obtained from a predetermined voice control register. Can be.

  The audio reproduced by the audio / LED control circuit 2200 having the above configuration is converted into a digital audio signal of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 in the form of a 5-bit signal (SCLK, LRO, SD0, SD1, SD2). The signal is transmitted to the power amplifier 2620, is D-class amplified by the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and is supplied to each speaker as an analog audio signal. Specifically, the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the lower speaker for low-pitched sound, and the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the player. 13, four normal speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (L0, R0, L1, R1) and two heavy bass (vibration) speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (SUB0, SUB1).

[7. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms of the power switch 35, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the performance display monitor 334, the error notification monitor 336, the external terminal board 323, and the hall computer 700 are used. But these are shown in FIG.

[7-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. For example, when the person in charge of the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 executes a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to a set value (step S20), and a game return process (step S20). S30) are sequentially executed. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. If the voltage drops to a predetermined level when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 35 is turned off, etc. The processing at the time of the occurrence of power interruption described later is performed.

[7-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to a stack pointer, as shown in the figure (step S11).

  Next, after permitting access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), the main CPU 101 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 101 activates a switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the setting value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are included. Equivalent to. After activating the switches related to the setting (step S15), the main CPU 101 performs a reading process of each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 31), a game permission flag for permitting execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . Hereinafter, the game permission process (step S17) will be described.

  The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power-off state identification flag is a flag for identifying the state at the time of the previous power-off occurrence. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later or the like, it is highly likely that the power failure has occurred before the setting change process is properly completed. Can not do it. Thus, when the power is turned on, it is possible to identify the situation at the time of the previous power failure. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power failure occurs. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF before the power failure. Also, when a power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S722 to S727, which will be described later, the power-off status identification flag is set to OFF. Note that the power-off status identification flag is OFF when the power is not turned on yet, or when data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long time. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is OFF. (same as below).

  In step S1710, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1720 if the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and the game permission flag if the power-off state identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710). Is set to OFF (step S1750), and then the process moves to step S1720.

  In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The checking of the work area includes checking whether the set value data set is within a prescribed range (in the present embodiment, within a range of “0” to “5”).

  The work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed, and a data without being cleared in principle even when a backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set value data set, and the like are stored. This is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of “0” to “5” correspond to each of the set values “1” to “6” of the six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is “4”, the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”.

  In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal. If the work area is normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740, and if not, ie, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

  In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, a power interruption occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710), and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned on. Is determined. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or during the abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process ends. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process moves to step S1770.

  In this specification, a power interruption occurring during a normal game, a power interruption occurring during a setting confirmation process, and a power interruption occurring during a setting change process are regarded as normal power interruptions, and are described later in steps S722 to S727. The power interruption occurring at is assumed to be an abnormal power interruption.

  In step S1770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power has been turned on while the setting key 328 has been turned ON (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 has been performed), that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal has been turned ON. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

  In step S1780, main CPU 101 determines whether or not backup clear switch 330 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Then, the process proceeds to step S1790. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

  In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

  As described above, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740) due to the situation at the time of the last power interruption or the abnormal working area of the main RAM 103 (NO in step S1740), the main CPU 101 sets the setting key switch signal ON ( If YES in step S1770 and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the game permission flag is turned ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

  In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and ends the game permission processing. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not a backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON, and when the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

  In step S1810, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of a game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the process in step S1810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission process. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hole confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and is not in a state in which the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF). ) Can be understood. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is set only when both the power-on operation and the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is ON. It can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is performed to temporarily stop the supply of power, and the game permission flag does not turn ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Note that, in the above description, the game permission process ends when the process of step S1810 is performed. Alternatively, the process returns to step S1740 after performing the process of step S1810, and sets a condition that the game permission flag is turned on. 32 (in FIG. 32, until YES is determined in step S1780), the processing of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[7-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 33A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 33B is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting process in step S20. The difference between FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 33 (b) is that only the processing when it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and the other processing (step Steps S22 to S28) are common to both. Hereinafter, the setting process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON in step S21. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S22. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of the steps S26).

  When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S24), and turns ON the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), a setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

  If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28), and performs a setting change process (step S28). S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) are not executed, and the setting processing ends. When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) are not executed).

  That is, if the previous power interruption is a normal power interruption occurring during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in the step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, a backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change processing (step S24), the setting confirmation processing (step S26), and the backup clear flag processing (step S28) Without executing any of the above, the process proceeds to the game return process (step S30), and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

  On the other hand, if the previous power interruption is abnormal power interruption, or if the previous power interruption is normal power interruption but power interruption occurred during the setting change process, NO is determined in step S21. . At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation state of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. The setting process ends without executing either the backup clear flag ON (step S28). Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is turned on (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is turned on (YES in step S1780). (That is, both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed in a state where the setting key 328 is turned ON and the setting is changed to a setting change state), and the set value is determined. Only when the setting change process (step S24) is executed, the process moves to the game return process of step S30, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed, and the process returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in the game return process (step S30), an abnormal time process (see step S38 in FIG. 37 described later) is executed, and the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

  As described above, in the example of the setting process illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 33A, when a power interruption occurs during the setting change process or when the last power interruption is abnormal, the power is turned on. The setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 at the time of pressing. The setting process is terminated without executing the setting process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the case of, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are changed. Regardless, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24), when the power is turned on with the operation of the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330 being forgotten, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of forcing a disconnection.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 33A, if NO is determined in the step S21, the setting process is performed without determining both the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Finished. Similarly, in the flow chart shown in FIG. 33B, if NO is determined in the step S21, the setting is performed without determining both the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. A change process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and the setting process is ended or the setting change process is performed (step S24) regardless of the result of this determination. May be executed.

[7-1-2-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 33) is a process for changing the set value that has been set. However, the setting change process may be terminated with the same set value as the set value. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power cut operation is performed to temporarily stop the supply of power and then execute the setting change process.

  First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 32). Therefore, a setting change process is executed.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes a backup clear process. This backup clear processing will be described later.

  After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and proceeds to step S2440. Note that the backup clearing process may be executed at any timing as long as the period from the start of the setting change process to the end thereof.

  In step S2440, main CPU 101 performs output setting of a setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting change security signal is output for a predetermined time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2450, main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into a set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the set value “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, it is not always necessary to display a number on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are respectively associated with “A” to “F”, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, “3”, the corresponding “D” May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the performance display monitor 334 converts the set value data stored in the register into a set value and displays the set value. The set initial value (for example, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, “1”) or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, “8”) on the performance display monitor. 334 may be displayed. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

  In step S2460, main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on error notification monitor 336. Accordingly, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2470, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2510.

  In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 has been pressed. If the setting switch 332 has been pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520, where the setting value stored in the register is set. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step S2520). (The processing from S2440 to step S2470 is repeated.)

  When the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 performs notification setting in step S2450 so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  Unless the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 changes the setting value data stored in the register from “0” to “5” every time the setting switch 332 is pressed. (Returns to “0” when the setting switch 332 is pressed while the setting value data is “5”). Thus, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be circulated and reduced from “5” to “0”, or the circulating increase and the cycling may be performed depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. You may make it possible to perform both of the reduction.

  In step S2470, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), main CPU 101 shifts to step S2480. In Step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of Step S2510, Step S2520, and Steps S2440 to S2470.

  In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is performed, the set value is determined. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is determined based on the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determination of YES in step S2470), and the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal is performed. If the setting switch 332 is only depressed without executing (the step S2510, the step S2520, and the steps S2440 to S2470 are simply looped), only the setting value data stored in the register is updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

  After the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), even if the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35) is performed. At this time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again), the main CPU 101 sets the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At this time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may set the game permission flag to OFF until the setting key switch signal is turned OFF.

  By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup status when the power is turned on thereafter (at the time of power failure recovery). A case where the setting change process (see FIG. 34) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status (the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal) of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (see FIG. 33 (b)). , The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). As described above, when the setting change process (step S24) is performed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the setting key in step S2470. Without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned on and then turned off. The process moves to S2480 (set value is determined). Note that, in this case, the main CPU 101 may determine that the setting key switch signal has been turned on, and further determine that the setting key switch signal has been turned off, thereby determining YES in step S2480. Alternatively, YES may be determined in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has been turned from ON to OFF without detecting that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON.

  In the above, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, forced Although it is described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state may be forcibly changed to the setting change state by the main CPU 101 irrespective of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power recovery. Also, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state at the time of power failure (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, At the time of power failure recovery, a process of returning to the held state may be executed irrespective of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery).

  In step S2490, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S2500, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. The process ends.

  When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed, is provided. The initialization command is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

  When the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 33) ends, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 30) ends, and the process proceeds to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 30).

  Note that if the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is executed, a certain period after the game is started, or At a predetermined timing after the is started, information indicating that the setting change process may have been performed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher set value, Information indicating that there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change processing, and the setting value has been changed in a plurality of steps by the setting change processing (for example, two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4 are changed). Information related to the setting change processing, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effects and decorative symbols performed on the display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change processing is executed and when it is not executed, or change the pattern to a higher set value by the setting change processing. Or when it is changed to a low setting value, or it can be different when the setting value is changed by more than one step and when it is not changed by more than one step by the setting change process Is also good.

  The output period of the setting change security signal and the period during which the setting change informing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

  Note that the above-described setting change process is a process that is internally executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF. Also, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in the step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in the step S2510, and when the process in the step S2480 is executed. Accordingly, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may notify that the setting is being changed, that the setting value has been changed, that the setting change has been completed, and the like.

[7-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear processing in step S2420 (see FIG. 34). This backup clearing process is a process for clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in the backup clear processing, as described above, information stored in the general work area is cleared, but information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

  First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), the process proceeds to step S2422. Move on to

  In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred, In this backup clearing process, it may be only partially cleared.

  In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set value data set is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. You. When it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared. In this case, the game permission flag is turned off, and the game is permitted unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 34) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

  In step S2423, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. Thereafter, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear processing. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed) is transmitted, for example, to the sub-control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed. The indicated image is displayed on the display device 16, for example.

  When the backup clearing process is performed along with the setting change process (see, for example, FIG. 34), in step S2450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the performance display monitor 334 to display the set value information. Make notification settings. Similarly, even when the backup clearing process is performed without the setting change process, the notification setting may be made so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[7-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is a process for confirming the set value that has been set. The set values that have been set are stored in the main RAM 103.

  First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and performs output setting of a setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting confirmation security signal is output for a fixed time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2630, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set value data set. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 as information indicating the set value.

  In step S2640, main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting confirmation processing is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2650, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the process of steps S2620 to S2650 is looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

  In step S2650, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), main CPU 101 shifts to step S2660. In step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processes in steps S2620 to S2650.

  If the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2650 (YES in step S2650), in step S37 to be described later, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a power-off reset command as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed. Will be sent.

  In step S2660, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S2670, the main CPU 101 performs non-report setting so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. To end.

  When the setting confirmation processing in step S26 (see FIG. 33) ends, the setting processing in step S20 (see FIG. 30) ends, and the routine goes to the game return processing in step S30 (see FIG. 30).

[7-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), a process of returning to a state in which a game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. Hereinafter, the game return process will be described.

  First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

  When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32, and performs a process of validating all switches.

  In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is off. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

  In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON. If the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power-off state identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

  In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state.

  Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power-off recovery (power-off recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information on the set value that has been set. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), and ends a series of power-on processes. Thereby, execution of a game is attained. The above-mentioned power interruption recovery command functions as a command indicating that power recovery is being performed or a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed.

  In step S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clearing process is the same as the backup clearing process of step S2420 shown in FIG. 34 (the backup clearing process shown in FIG. 35), and thus the description is omitted.

  When the backup clear processing in step S39 ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S40, and performs initialization of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), and ends a series of power-on processes. Thereby, execution of a game is attained. Note that the above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed (backup clear processing has also been executed) or a command indicating that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. Function.

  The output period of the setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

[7-1-3-1. Abnormal processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the abnormal time process. As described above, the abnormal process in step S38 (see FIG. 37) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S31) in the process in step S31 (see FIG. 37). Processing.

  First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub-control circuit 200 an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed. When the host control circuit 2100 receives the abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the display device 16 under the control of the host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300). Becomes

  Note that the main CPU 101 does not necessarily need to transmit the abnormal command. For example, if the host control circuit 2100 cannot receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started, the backup failure occurs. May be determined.

  In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets output of an abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

  In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Accordingly, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hall can grasp that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF).

  In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is ON. The power interruption detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. If the main CPU 101 determines that the power-off detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and a power-off occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the power interruption detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[7-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. When the voltage drops to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs a process when a power failure occurs.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S3851). Then, a checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, various game data stored in the main RAM 103 can be held even when the power supply is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power-off state identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption has occurred during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change processing, it is set to OFF.

  After finishing the processes in steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply.

  As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, as described above, the supply of power is temporarily stopped by performing a power interruption operation so that the game permission flag is not turned ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

  By the way, in this processing, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power failure or the like (hereinafter, referred to as “instantaneous power failure”) and the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is started, it is possible to return from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically during normal processing, but is not updated when power-off processing is started. As a result, the process starts when a power failure occurs due to an instantaneous power failure. Even when the process enters the infinite loop of FIG. 39, the reset is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main CPU 101 starts up in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that a regular power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is turned off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the save data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processes is reduced.

[7-1-4. Flow of power-on processing as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. The flow of the power-on process viewed from a person who performs an operation (for example, a person related to a hall) will be briefly described.

[7-1-4-1. Setting change processing flow]
First, a setting change process, that is, a flow for changing a set value that has been set will be described. In order to change the set value, it is necessary to first perform a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, while the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and the operation of turning on the power switch 35 are performed.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is disabled, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) is activated, and the setting change is performed. The process is started, and the setting can be changed.

  When the setting change process is started, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for initializing the RWM When the transmission) is executed, a sound indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. May be displayed.

  In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is circulated and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by one each time the set switch 332 is pressed when the set value is “1” to “5”, but when the set value is “6”, the set switch 332 is set. Pressing returns to "1" and is displayed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting change process, the setting change state ends, and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is validated.

  As described above, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. . When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[7-1-4-2. Setting confirmation process flow]
Next, a setting confirmation process, that is, a flow for confirming the set value that has been set will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is internally executed on condition that the game permission flag is ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

  In order to check the set value, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is internally turned on. The ON operation of the power switch 35 is performed without performing the pressing operation.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, only the operation of the setting key 328 among all switches is enabled, the setting check process is started, and the set settings can be checked. Becomes

  When the setting confirmation processing is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation processing is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  During the setting confirmation process, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change even if the setting switch 332 is pressed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Is displayed and the operation of all switches is enabled.

  As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 among all the switches is activated, and all the other switches remain inactivated. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains invalidated. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during a normal game, regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[7-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]
As described above, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. Moreover, when an operation for executing the setting confirmation processing is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35), when a backup processing without setting change processing is performed (details will be described later), or simply When only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the abnormal time process is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the abnormal-time process will be described.

  After the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, and only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled (internal). Abnormal processing is started in general). The reason why the operation related to the setting is activated is to enable the game permission flag to be turned on by executing the setting change process.

  When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

  Furthermore, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, no operation is performed even if any operation is performed, and the pachinko game is set to a state in which the game can be executed unless the above-described setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all the switches is disabled in a situation in which a game in which all devices controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 are completely stopped cannot be played, and a device controlled by some of the sub-control circuits 200 (for example, The LEDs 25) include those that can be controlled.

[7-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 41).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to a game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. You.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the saved values of the registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[7-2-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting opening winning detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning in the special winning opening 540 is set, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game (based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the ball passage detector (not shown)) Random value). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection processing.

[7-2-1-1. Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described switch input detection process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (step S71). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S52. When a game ball has not been detected by the first starting port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S81.

  In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later.

  In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained first winning opening winnings (the number of retained special first symbols) is less than four (step S74). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S75. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the processing of step S80.

  In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held first winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until a change start condition (start condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Perform (Step S76). As a result, the display of the change of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, a large hit random number determination table, a symbol determination table, and a large hit type determination for the first special symbol are determined based on the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for symbol determination extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, a symbol designating command, a hit selection symbol command, and the like for a main symbol (a first special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start-up winning detection process. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table of FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), and selects a variation pattern based on the hit determination result, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , To perform the determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 25, since the fluctuation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the above-described fluctuation pattern determination processing is stored. The pattern designation command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held first winning opening winnings (step S79). The first start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held special first symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a variation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

  In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a number-of-first-start-opening-winning-reserve-number-overflow command, and proceeds to step S81. The first start opening winning number overflow command is a command indicating that the first starting opening has been won when the number of first special symbols held is the upper limit (for example, four). Is sent.

  As is apparent from FIG. 42, the reason why the overflow command for the number of retained first opening winnings is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check processing in step S72 described later. It is assumed that

  In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S82. If a game ball has not been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection processing.

  In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later, but is the same processing as step S72.

  In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second starting opening winnings (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S85. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, and ends the starting port winning detection process.

  In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (start condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Perform (Step S86). Thereby, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). In the second special stop symbol determination process, as in the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special symbol is determined based on the extracted big hit determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol. With reference to the big hit random number judgment table, the symbol judgment table and the big hit type determination table, a symbol designating command, a big hit selecting symbol command, and the like for the main symbol (a second special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination processing is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start-up winning detection processing, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). Then, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held second winning opening winnings (step S89). The second start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held second special symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the start-up winning detection process.

  If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are simultaneously detected, either of the setting check processing in step S72 and the setting check processing in step S82 is performed. Only one of them may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of retained second starting port winnings is four (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 does not transmit the command for overflowing the number of reserves for the second start-up port to the sub-control circuit 200, but discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start-up port 440 for starting. The winning detection processing has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[7-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101. This setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (both refer to FIG. 42). The setting check process is a process for checking whether the set value set is normal. In this setting check processing, for example, the same processing as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 32) may be performed. The emphasis is on checking for normality.

  As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the set value data corresponding to the set values “1” to “6”. It is determined whether it is within the range of “0” to “5”. If the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5” (YES in step S721), the setting check processing ends. When the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

  In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

  In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed (NO in step S723), the process proceeds to step S725.

  In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 42) has elapsed with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

  For example, if a game ball wins in the starting openings 420 and 440 while the special symbol is being displayed by the main CPU 101, a step is performed during the display of the special symbol (before the display of the variable of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process, even if the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the fluctuating display is not displayed). ), The game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is once turned off and the setting change processing is executed, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the fluctuation display is cleared in the backup clear processing including the data on hold. The Rukoto.

  In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, control is performed so that power is not supplied from the payout / firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player grips the firing handle 32 and performs a turning operation in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired, and the game cannot be played.

  When prohibiting the launch of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to an abnormal time process in step S727.

  In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the change display of the special symbol, so that the next new change display is not started. For example, even if the special symbol change display is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the special symbol change display is stopped and the next variable display is waiting to be started, the special symbol change display is started. Not done. After ending the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S726.

  In the abnormal time process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 37). That is, the processing of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 38 is performed until the power-off detection signal ON is detected, and when the power-off detection signal ON is detected, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence of step S385, ie, FIG. The processing in steps S3851 to S3854 shown in FIG. 39 is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the stored set value data is not normal, execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is once turned off and turned on again to perform the setting change process, The game cannot be executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again even if the display of the change of the special symbol has not been started yet and has been suspended. Since the game cannot be executed unless the player inputs the setting and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, the random number for the jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data held is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 or based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various types of data related to the suspension from being processed based on abnormal setting values, and to enhance security.

  In addition, as described above, in the setting check processing, the same processing is performed in step S72 and step S82 (both refer to FIG. 42). Therefore, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420, the main CPU 101 determines in step S724. Prohibits stopping the second special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S82) performed when a game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S1730 of FIG. 32) and at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S24 of FIG. 33), at the time of setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 33), at the time of execution of backup clear processing (see FIG. 35), the fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When a special symbol is changed, the setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing, such as when the special symbol is stopped, when passage is detected by the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), when the normal symbol starts changing, or when the normal symbol stops changing. It may be performed. In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example listing. The setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the big hit game state. Although it is made possible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the setting value data is determined to be incorrect in the setting check processing may be shifted from the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to reduce a sense of loss of the player that can be caused by the fact that the fluctuation display is not performed even if the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various determination processes (for example, a big hit determination process or the like) in a state where the set value data is not normal, the special symbol variation display is performed for a predetermined time without performing the various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol with a loss.

  Although not shown in FIG. 43, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the stop of the ordinary symbol is also prohibited if the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. . Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[7-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S91). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S 93 and S 94. The control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 is stored in the main RAM 103. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71, and the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform a fluctuation display and a stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the generated game state command in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probable change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[7-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in FIG. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read control state flag, whether or not to execute each of steps S102 to S110 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing related to another subroutine is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended symbols in the variable display of the special symbol, and if the number of symbols is not “0”. In the case where there is a reserved ball, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the determination of the main symbol, the result of the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like obtained in the starting opening winning detection processing are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the control pattern flag to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the current process. The variable display time of the corresponding special symbol is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol variation time management process described later is set to be executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, sets the control status flag to a special symbol described later. The value ("02") indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. That is, after the elapse of the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S103, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big hit is determined. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”. If the big hit determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval as the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a special symbol game ending process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit start interval management process (“03”), and that the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating a special winning opening opening process (step S106), which will be described later, and sets the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special winning opening time timer. In other words, this process is set so that a process during opening of the special winning opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening process (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening process, the main CPU 101 sets a condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the later-described winning prize opening ball monitoring process (Step S107) in the control state flag, and sets the monitoring time of the remaining prize ball in the winning prize opening to a waiting time timer. I do. That is, by this processing, after the monitoring time of the remaining sphere in the special winning opening set in step S107 elapses, it is set so that the processing of monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening described later is executed. Immediately before the end of the special winning opening processing, a round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening (step S107). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“05”) indicating the processing for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening, and when the monitoring time for the remaining sphere in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times of opening the special winning opening counter. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval). Time) to the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (step S108). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening, and opens the special winning opening when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The value of the number-of-times counter is stored and updated so as to be increased by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the special winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer. That is, it is set such that the above-described opening processing of the special winning opening (step S106) is executed again in this processing. In addition, immediately before the end of the special winning opening waiting time management process, a special winning opening opening command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit end interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (“07”) indicating that the control state flag indicates the big hit end interval process and indicates the special symbol game end process (“07”) when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed. 08 ”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this processing, it is set so that the special symbol game ending processing described later is executed after the processing of step S109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 1-8 and Toku-zu 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. If the main symbol described above is any one of the special maps 1-1, 1-3 and 2-1, the control to set the gaming state to the low-probability gaming state (probable change flag OFF) is performed. Do.

  Next, when the big hit game state ends or when the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 updates the data (startup storage information) indicating the number of held items so as to decrease by “1”. I do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol change display. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S102) is executed after the process of step S110. When the special symbol game end processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the special symbol game end process (step S110). At a predetermined timing in this order.

  When the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the big hit determination result is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, and “03”. I do. Thereby, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). At a predetermined timing in this order, and control to shift to the big hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the special winning opening (step S108) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state is executed.

  When the big hit game state end condition is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107), the processing for ending the big hit (step S109), and the processing for ending the special symbol game (step S110). At the predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state ends.

  As described above, in the special symbol control processing, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 51 described later) in step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 44, the process flow is branched according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

  The processing program according to the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[7-3-1-1. Special design memory check process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating a special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the second number of stored start-ups) of the second start-up winning (the display of the change of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is “0” (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is not “0”. If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

  In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the retained number (first stored number of memories) of the first starting opening winning (the change display of the first special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of the first starting opening winnings is not “0” (NO in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and determines that the number of the first starting opening winnings is “0”. When it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

  In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of first start opening winnings held. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the change display (holding ball) of the first four special symbols held four times. Is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the first opening 420, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first winning opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, reference value data is acquired with reference to a big hit determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start port. Then, based on the obtained determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “loss” (big hit determination).

  Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined in the fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S78 or step S88 (both shown in FIG. 42) in the waiting time timer. . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of held second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. In the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the change display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the second opening 440, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the winning of the second starting opening (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S117, executes the processes of steps S118 and S119, and ends the special symbol storage check process.

[7-3-2. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) after the variable display is set, which is set in the waiting time timer, has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S140.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S135.

  In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the number-of-time-saving counter, the time-saving flag, and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S136.

  In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control status flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). Thereby, the big hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27), and refers to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) for the number of rounds (the maximum winning opening opening number). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. This time reduction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end process to the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[7-3-2-1. Time saving subtraction processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the number-of-time-savings subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes zero. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving counter in this embodiment is 100 or 10000.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S154. When the value of the time-saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving number subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “0” as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[7-3-3. Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end interval process by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value indicating the big hit end interval processing ("07") (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening frequency display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. If the special winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game ending process to the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a “big hit” (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability change big hit (step S168). If it is a probability change jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S169. If it is not a probability change jackpot (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the time saving flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of times saved in the number of times saved counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, referring to the big hit type determination table (FIG. 22, FIG. 26, or FIG. 27), the big hit of 100 time saving times (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 2-1) In such a case, the time-saving counter is set to 100 times, and the time-saving is continued until the next big-hit game state is executed (for example, Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-2) Is set to 10000 times in the time saving counter. However, the time saving counter set when the time saving is a big hit in which the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall, The number may be any number that cannot actually occur. In this way, by setting the number of times that can not actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the store in the time saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed Will be done. Furthermore, when the hit is a big hit with 100 times savings, a counter process is performed (the time saving counter is set to 100 times), and when the hit is a big hit where the time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed, a flag process is performed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big hit flag, that is, a process of turning off the big hit flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

[7-3-3-1. Variation pattern table setting processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). If the power is on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S182. If the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). Table pattern 1 corresponds to a table pattern in the case where both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). .

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S184. If the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

  In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

[7-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 51 indicate a normal symbol control state flag. Is stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the ordinary symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the read value of the ordinary symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes in steps S192 to S196 described below. The normal symbol control state flag indicates a game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the suspended number of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and the retained number is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the later-described ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in this process. Set the wait time timer. That is, by the processing of step S192, after the determined fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to a value (“01”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process, and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol elapses, sets the ordinary symbol control status flag to be described later. The value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer. That is, in the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after the determination has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and that if the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, the big hit It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is “big hit”. If the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets a value (step S195) indicating a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. "03") is set. That is, the processing is set so as to execute the later-described ordinary electric accessory release processing. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit” in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process (step S196) in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game end process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol game end process (“04”), the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the number of suspended symbols in the variable symbol display by “1”. Is updated. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the ordinary symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the ordinary symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, it is set so that the above-described ordinary symbol storage check process (step S192) is executed after the process of step S196. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[8. Sub-control main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 200 including the sub CPU processor (host control circuit 2100) executes the sub control main processing. The sub-control main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub control main. This process is started when the power is turned on. 61, FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74, and FIG. 98, which will be described later, are all flowcharts showing an example of a sub-control main process executed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on. However, FIG. 52 is one of typical examples.
Processing.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201). ).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (Step S202). In the watchdog timer, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set at the time of startup, and when a service pulse is not written (time-out), power interruption processing is executed.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes an operation means input process (Step S203).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command analysis process (Step S204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes an effect mode determination process (Step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining an effect mode displayed on the display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set. The setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the host control circuit 2100 counts the first start winning port overflow point, and when the main control circuit 100 transmits a first start winning port reserved number overflow command, the first start winning port overflow point is set. Add one. Then, when the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines in the above-described effect mode determination processing that a setting suggestion effect is to be executed. In a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as a normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win a game ball to the first starting port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning port overflow occurs, the player is not discouraged. . Therefore, by performing the setting suggestive effect on the condition that the first starting winning opening overflow has occurred in the non-time-saving game state, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player without giving a direct loss to the hole. It becomes possible. In addition, some of the players interrupt the emission of the game balls when the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this regard, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on condition that the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 420 exceeds the upper limit of holding.

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed based on the transmission of the pending number overflow command from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect increases, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to estimate the setting only once. For example, it is difficult to guess a setting only by information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate a setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

  Also, as described above, the reason why the overflow command for the number of retained first opening winnings is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that it is determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check processing in step S72. is there. Therefore, when it is not determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check processing, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, it is performed. , The host control circuit 2100 does not perform addition to the first starting winning port overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, the predetermined point). At 50 points, when 49 points are obtained, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit, the setting check processing of step S72 (FIG. 42). If the host CPU 2100 determines that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the host control circuit 2100, and the game cannot be advanced. Becomes

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit ( 42), on condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is made in the same manner as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. A suggestive effect may be performed.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the host control circuit 2100 sets a specific winning port out of the first starting port 420, the second starting port 440, and each of the general winning ports 53, 54, and 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). , For example, randomly determined by lottery. During the execution of the reach effect, when the main control circuit 100 transmits a winning command of the game ball to the specified winning port determined above, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, some players stop firing game balls when a reach effect with a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, during the execution of the reach effect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect . Further, in the reach production, there is a case where the expectation is low immediately when the reach production is started. In such a case, the fluctuation display is not started next for the player until the end of the reach effect, and there is a possibility that interest may be reduced. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, if the manager of the gaming machine can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine in which the player plays the game may be low. According to the example described above, such a fear can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the specific winning port is randomly determined from the first starting port 420, the second starting port 440 and each of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 5) by random selection, for example, It is preferable to keep the secret without disclosing which one is a specific winning opening. As a result, it is interesting for the player to determine which winning opening should be aimed.

  Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is defined as the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Among them, for example, a lottery is determined at random, but it is not always necessary to determine a specific winning opening at random, and a fixed winning opening may be set as a specific winning opening.

  In each of the first and second examples of the setting suggestion effect, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. However, the main CPU 101 may determine the effect. .

  If a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is a starting opening, the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 42) is performed. Will be The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display by the process of step S734. I do. Also, the host control circuit 2100 continues the variable effect of the decorative symbol even if the decorative symbol accompanying the reach effect is being changed. However, the host control circuit 2100 may stop the output of the sound effect by the audio / LED control circuit 2200 or may reduce the output sound volume.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command transmission process (Step S206). The command transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 2300 executes a drawing control process (step S207). In this processing, the display control circuit 2300 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 executes an audio control process (step S208). In this processing, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 performs audio control for causing the speaker 24 to output audio based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

  Next, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 executes a control process for the light emission mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this processing, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 performs light emission control for turning on or off the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this accessory control process, the actors and the operating members that constitute the accessory among the accessories that constitute the accessory group 1000 are activated based on the effect designation information via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. This is a process for performing drive control of the effect drive motor, and details will be described later. In such a sub-control main process, after the initialization process in step S201 ends, the processes in steps S202 to S210 are repeatedly executed.

[8-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing by the host control circuit 2100. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described sub-control main process. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in a reception buffer of the sub work RAM 2100a (step S241).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a consistency check on the received command (Step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that the data has no error or lack.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub-lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the host control circuit 2100 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this processing ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command analysis processing. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the effect type (whether there is a speech notice or whether there is an SU notice) as the effect pattern. The effect content (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately formed as a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and thereafter, the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the game, the setting check process is performed in steps S72 and S82 (see FIG. 42), and in this setting check process, the set value data is “0” to “5”. ("NO" in step S721 in FIG. 43), the processing in steps S722 to S726 is performed, and then the processing at the time of abnormality in step S727 is performed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is replaced illegally, there is a high possibility that the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is not executed. Further, in the case where the set value that is set by the input of the illegal signal is changed, there is a possibility that the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting value data is “0” when the setting check processing is not executed in step S72 or step S82 or the setting value may be incorrectly changed. Assuming a case where the value is within the range from “5” to “5” (for example, a case where “YES” is determined in step S721), the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting determination process for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. . This setting determination processing will be described below, not shown.

  First, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display when a special symbol variation display is suspended at a specific timing (for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first startup port 420 / second startup port 440). Is transmitted, a command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the host control circuit 2100 that has received this command determines the suitability of the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “current set value”) indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the previously received command matches the current set value.

  Then, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value does not match the current set value, the set value is abnormal. Is determined.

  Further, when the received setting value information is abnormal, the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting value abnormality process. The abnormal time execution process displays, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the display device 16, or, in place of or in addition to this, notifies that the set value is abnormal. This is a process of outputting a sound to be played.

  In addition, the determination of the suitability of the set value information described above is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, if all the set value information received three or more times match. May be determined, or some of the setting value information received a plurality of times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the current setting value) may match. It may be determined whether or not there is any. However, when the host control circuit 2100 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 33) has been executed, the current setting value is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. , It is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value matches the current set value.

  Further, the above-described setting determination processing (determination of suitability of the setting value information) is preferably performed not only during the execution of the game, but also when the power is turned on after a power cutoff, unless the setting change processing is performed. . The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power interruption will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting determination processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 described above may be executed in the command analysis processing (step S204) or may be executed after exiting from the command analysis processing subroutine.

[8-2. Command transmission processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the subwork RAM 2100a. Do. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a directory table registration process (Step S252). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting a corresponding direct table in a predetermined area of the subwork RAM 2100a based on the message and the effect information stored in the direct buffer. This directory table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message transmission process (Step S253). In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 reads out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the directory table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[8-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the host control circuit 2100. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 sets a device (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting the presence or absence of the system operation (Step S262).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this processing ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message setting processing.

[8-2-2. Directory table registration process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the directory table registration processing by the host control circuit 2100. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering a single table (Step S271).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (Step S273).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this processing ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the directory table registration processing.

[8-2-3. Message transmission processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the host control circuit 2100. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the host control circuit 2100 determines each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the “destination device” set in the message. The message is transmitted to the server (step S281).

  Next, after the transmission of the message is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). When this processing ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message transmission processing.

[9. Extensibility of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the big hit probability, the reach probability, the change time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probable inrush rate, Although the inrush ratio is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of them may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol display section 71 is in a predetermined mode ("normal hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is set to the predetermined mode. From the closed state to the open state only during the period of. Therefore, the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state or the timing at which the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing at which game balls are fired) may be notified to the player. In this case, the frequency of notifying the firing timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the notification frequency of the fire timing).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the backup clearing process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear processing is always performed even when the setting change processing (step S24) is executed. Therefore, if the backup clear processing is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always required. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which data is cleared is determined by the backup clear processing performed when the setting change processing is performed and the backup clear processing performed without performing the setting change processing. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, a high-probability game state is set until a predetermined number of games are executed (until a special symbol is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times), and a low level is set after the predetermined number of games are ended. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the probability gaming state (a so-called “ST machine”), when the game is controlled to the high probability gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change processing is performed. When the backup clearing process is performed without accompanying the setting change process, the probable change flag is set OFF, and when the backup clearing process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probable change flag is set ON (remaining in the high probability game state) The storage of the number of games may be held). Further, when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing, the ON setting of the probable change flag is continued when the set value is set to the same value as the previous time, and when the set value is set to a different value from the previous time. May set the probable change flag to OFF.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the jackpot gaming state, the special winning opening 540 is set when the number of gaming balls winning the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls, and when the game ball is opened. When one of the conditions is satisfied when the time has reached 30 sec, the state is closed. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit gaming state, the condition for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of gaming balls having different expected values of the number of game balls capable of causing the large winning opening 540 to win game balls in one round). A condition may be prepared), and the condition may be changed according to the set value, so that a higher set value makes it easier to select a condition having the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is conceivable that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value, so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 is likely to be longer at a higher setting value. Can be Also, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of the game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol is in the form of the ordinary hit, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. The opening time of the accessory 46 (opening time) may be made different depending on the set value, so that the higher the set value, the longer the open time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit in which the probable change flag is turned ON as shown in FIG. 1-2 or FIG. 1-4, the next big hit game is executed after the big hit gaming state ends. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440, the display of the change of the special symbol is suspended. (When the special symbol variation display is started), a shift lottery for determining whether to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). May be lowered). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting check process (steps S72 and S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the above-mentioned lottery is cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also turned off). Set).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the big hit probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability of change inrush rate, the time reduction inrush rate) are changed according to the set value. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above has been described, providing a setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a part of the configuration may be changed. Hereinafter, another extension example in which the configuration is partially changed will be described. Note that components not particularly mentioned in the description of the other extended examples below are the same as the configuration of the present embodiment, but in the following, each member such as the main CPU will be denoted by a reference numeral except for the step numbers. I haven't.

[9-1. Extension example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, after the big hit gaming state ends, the high probability game is started until the next big hit gaming state is started. A description will be given using a so-called “probable variable loop machine” in which the state continues as an example. In the first extended example, an upper limit is set on the number of times the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter, referred to as “loop count”). When the loop count reaches this upper limit, the big hit game state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to the set value (such gaming machines are referred to as “limiter”). Machine). This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a table showing, for each set value, an example of the selectivity of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example.

  The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first extended example includes a loop number checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limit number lottery when the number of loops is 0. Lottery means, loop number counting means for incrementing the number of loops when the number of loops is within a specified range (in this example, within the range of 1 to 4), and a specified number of loops (5 in this example, the upper limit of the limiter) In this case, a game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state ends to a low probability state, and a loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. Note that the limiter number lottery may be performed at any time when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the big hit gaming state, or at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once at a probability of 25%, twice at a probability of 30%, and three times at a probability of 25%. It is determined four times with a probability of 15% and five times with a probability of 5%. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once at a probability of 25%, twice at a probability of 25%, three times at a probability of 25%, and four times at a probability of 20%. And 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 25%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 20%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 20%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 25%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 25% , And 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 10%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. , And 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that the number of limiters is determined.

  In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the number of limiters in accordance with the set value so that the larger the set value, the larger the jackpot game state and the higher probability game state can be repeated, the one chance (the big hit) It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player in accordance with the set value at the opportunity of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state when winning once. Moreover, although the expected value for the limiter count is made different according to the set value, since the limiter count is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value based on the limiter count. Has become.

  In the first extended example, the limiter count is determined by lottery in accordance with the installation value. However, the lottery is not necessarily required. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as three times for 1.2, four times for setting 3.4, and five times for setting 5.6.

  The limiter count may be set separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

  For example, when the number of limiters is separately determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first limit number for the first special symbol is determined if the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a large hit. Is determined, and the loop is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, and the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, during the above loop, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol, the loop number of the first special symbol is not incremented, and the second limiter number of the second special symbol is not increased. To determine. In this case, when one of the first limiter count and the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, the loop may be ended (control to a low-probability game state), or the first limiter count and the second limiter may be set. The loop may be terminated when both the count reaches the limiter count.

  Also, for example, in the case where the above-mentioned limiter frequency is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is a big hit, the limiter count is determined, and during the loop, whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the count. When the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called stochastic loop machine, but is not necessarily a stochastic loop machine. For example, the above-described technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also. The “ST machine” means that the game state after the big hit game state is completed is controlled to the high-probability game state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability game state is controlled a predetermined number of times (hereinafter “ST times”). This is a pachinko game machine that continues until the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the predetermined number of special symbols are displayed, the high-probability gaming state is ended and the game is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an “ST machine”, the degree of expectation for the limiter count can be varied according to the set value. In other words, the higher the set value, the more the large hit game state and the high probability game state can be repeated, so that one chance (the opportunity to be controlled to the low probability game state when one big hit is won) is achieved. ), It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player according to the set value.

  In the so-called “ST machine”, the “ST times” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the number of STs can be varied according to the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 72 times in setting 6. By setting the number of times to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of ST times. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of times of ST is made different according to the set value, it is preferable that the number of times saved is common to all set values. For example, when the number of STs or the expected value of the number of STs is 60 for setting 1, 63 for setting 2, 66 for setting 3, 69 for setting 4, 72 for setting 5, and 75 for setting 6. For example, it is conceivable that the number of time savings is set to, for example, 60 times for all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect on the display device 16, for example, in which the high-probability gaming state can be grasped until the ST number reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the ST number reaches a certain number of games, Regardless of whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state, it is preferable to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp that the game is in the high-probability game state, for example, using a liquid crystal display device. This makes it possible to make the ST count and the expected value of the ST count different according to the set value while preventing the player from noticing the set value.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, the setting check process (steps S72 and S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting is not normal in the setting check process (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed), By executing the setting change process (step S24), the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) without the number of loops reaching the limiter number (the probable change flag is also set to OFF).

[9-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the second extended example has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is defined as a falling area of a game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition, as a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU makes a special symbol big hit determination with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and makes a small hit hit determination if the result of this big hit determination is a loss. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  In the second extended example, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to OFF, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a second special symbol game, Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in a time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, for example, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, the small hit hit determination need not be performed.

  When the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, the main CPU activates the predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game in which the small hitting game is set to the open mode, and a payout / firing control circuit based on the fact that the game ball has won in the specific area opened in the small hitting game by executing the small hitting game. Payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

  In the second extended example, the number of times saved is set to, for example, five, and a specific port is provided in a specific area. Then, for example, when a game ball wins as a normal hit in the five time-saving gaming states and wins at the starting port, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece is activated and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area further enters the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. If the normal hit has not been achieved in the five time-saving gaming states, the main CPU ends the time-saving gaming state and controls the non-time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing of the game ball toward the right area of the game area. In the non-time-saving game state, the game is performed by left-handed firing of the game ball toward the left area of the game area. A game is played.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the second extended example, by changing at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game according to the set value, for example, the time reduction gaming state in which the second special symbol game is mainly performed In, the opening frequency of the specific area and, consequently, the payout can be varied according to the set value.

  For example, the probability of small hit is 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, 1/7 in setting 3, 1/6 in setting 4, 1/5 in setting 5, and 6 in setting 6. To 1/4. In this case, the higher the set time, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to be awarded at the starting port as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory is higher. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the winning frequency of the game ball in the specific area, and thus, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  In the second extended example, in the time saving game state, the probable change flag may be set to ON, but it is not always necessary to set the probable change flag to ON.

  Also, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is also performed in this case. . If the main CPU determines in the setting check process that the pattern is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU sets the game permission flag to OFF even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that it is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is cleared in the backup clearing process.

[9-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 2-2 has a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a winning of the game ball to the second starting port. A big hit determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special lottery”) is performed based on the second special symbol.

  Further, the main CPU is configured to perform a first game state (for example, a probability change flag) in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. And the time saving flag are both set to OFF, and a second gaming state in which a lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “second special lottery”) is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). And an advantageous game state in which the time-saving flag is set to OFF). In this pachinko gaming machine, if a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first game state, the game is controlled to the second game state after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, a general-purpose gate is provided in the right area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. If the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Is done. Therefore, when the game is performed by firing the game ball toward the right area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left area of the game area to perform the game. The winning frequency of the game ball to is increased.

  In the first special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value. A first jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a number of times is provided.

  In the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when a result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU makes a small hit hit determination, and when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit, A small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game is also provided.

  The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The big hit probability in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. The big hit probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 26 is 1/25 and setting 6 is 1/25.

  The main CPU, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined special winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game in which a predetermined jackpot is opened for a plurality of rounds when the jackpot is won. The big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, Good or different winning prizes.

  In addition, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to setting 1 to setting 6) regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. The small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, and 1/7 in setting 3 regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. , The setting 4 is set to 1/6, and the setting 5 is set to 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value, but is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery regardless of the set value.

  Further, the main CPU has a small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the payout / firing control circuit operates the payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning port is smaller than the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is smaller in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

  Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is zero. That is, the main CPU performs the small hit determination with the small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

  The big hit is a hit with the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit with the operation of the condition device.

  The main CPU further includes a first special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the first special symbol based on a winning of the game ball to the first opening, and a game ball to the second opening. And a second special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol change display control means stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined time. In addition, the second special symbol change display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is changed and displayed for a predetermined time.

  The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable display control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and if the gaming ball is awarded for the second starting port, the first special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins in the first opening while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second opening, even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  Also, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol fluctuation display control means is almost the same when the probability change flag is ON and OFF, but the second special symbol is changed. The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different depending on whether the probable variation flag is ON or OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 second in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the second starting port in the first game state, it takes a considerable time before the result of the second special lottery is displayed, although the second special lottery has already been performed. Becomes

  In this manner, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right area of the game area and the game ball wins in the second starting port, the second special symbol is obtained. It takes time until the variable display is stopped. In addition, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (the small special may be a small hit). Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing at which the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. For this reason, it is also difficult to perform a so-called aiming, such as causing a game ball to win in a large winning opening aiming at a timing at which the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right area of the game area, a warning sound is output from a speaker under the control of the sub CPU, for example. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by firing game balls toward, for example, a left area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, the passing of the game ball through the general-purpose gate facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second starting port through the ordinary lottery, and also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. In the second special lottery, the second special lottery wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value, so that a game in which a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right side area of the game area is used. Done.

  The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. Is preferred, but is preferably at least 10 times or more.

  In addition, the sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means that controls the variable symbol display to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Is provided. However, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol in a prominent manner, even if the game ball has won the second starting port. When a game ball is awarded at one starting port, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

  The example of the above-mentioned “conspicuous mode” will be described in detail. For example, the liquid crystal display device includes a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) substantially at the center of the display area. And the result of the special lottery can be displayed. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, a circle or a circle) that can be displayed in a variable manner (eg, blinks) in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Such a shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is much larger than the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is more on the first symbol to the third symbol than on the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, in the first game state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the sub CPU performs the variable display only on the fourth symbol without performing the variable display on the first to third symbols. When a game ball wins at one starting port, the first symbol to the third symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is also performed. In this manner, in the first gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a prominent manner, and the gaming ball is inserted at the first starting port. Can be realized in such a manner that the display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins the prize is conspicuous.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 2-2, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball has won the second starting port, but the second gaming state In this case, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is not only facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. In addition, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. (From 1/30 to 1/25, depending on the setting), the big wins are opened with small hits at a high frequency, and the time reduction flag is not set (ie, normal lottery). Without increasing the frequency of execution), it is possible to increase the chances that game balls as prizes are paid out. In addition, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit depends on the set setting, and therefore even if the big hit game is not executed, the payout is made according to the set value. Can be made different.

  Also, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is also performed in this case. . Therefore, for example, in the second game state, the main CPU also performs the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 even when a game ball wins in the first starting port during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU turns off the game permission flag and executes an abnormal process. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit. Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display in the second game state is a small hit, the result including the information indicating the second game state and the information indicating the small hit is also included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clearing process, the game permission flag is not set to ON.

[9-4. Extension example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the third extended example is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined as a falling area of a game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition, as a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU makes a special symbol big hit determination with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and makes a small hit hit determination if the result of this big hit determination is a loss. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  In the third extended example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, for example, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port and a second special symbol game, Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in a time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, for example, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, the small hit hit determination need not be performed.

  The main CPU activates a predetermined movable piece when the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, and the main movable CPU operates inside the specific area. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the predetermined movable piece is actuated in this way, the game ball enters the specific area, and when the game ball that has entered the specific area is detected (accepted) to enter the specific port, the main The CPU controls the big hit game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a big hit, the main CPU performs the first big hit game in which the round game for opening the big winning port is performed over a plurality of rounds. A first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and a round game for activating the predetermined movable piece based on a game ball entering the specific port when the small hit game is executed over a plurality of rounds. And a second big hit game control means for controlling a second big hit game state to be performed.

  In such a pachinko game machine, in the extended example 3, the ease of winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) is set to the set value. It is different according to. Also in the third extended example, the result of the ordinary symbol determination performed based on detecting that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player makes a right hit is a normal hit. At times, the electric accessory is usually controlled from the closed state to the open state. Normally, when the electric accessory is in an open state, winning of the game ball to the starting port is facilitated. As a method of changing the execution frequency of the small hitting game according to the set value, for example, if the probability of a normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value, Can be realized.

  As a method of changing the ease of winning of a game ball to the starting port according to the set value, a method of changing the probability of a normal hit in the ordinary symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

  For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and 6 for setting 6. To 1/10. In this case, the higher the set time, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting of the opening of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to be awarded at the starting port as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory is higher. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of execution of the small hit game, and thus the chance of being controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  Also in the third extended example, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being displayed by the in-CPU 101, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is performed. Be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is cleared in the backup clearing process.

[9-5. Extension example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state by itself. , The condition device is operated based on the premise that the game ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the assumption that the condition device has been operated, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right-of-cassette-actuation-operated right gate, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a left-cassette-of-cassette-operated-operation left gate.

  As shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth extended example is provided with an accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and an accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 in the game area. In addition, a sorting device 1120 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area to one of a role-operation continuous operation left gate 1100 and a role-operation continuous operation right gate 1110 is provided by a role-action continuous operation gate 1100, It is arranged above 1110.

  A left gate sensor 1100 and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of a game ball are provided in the left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110, respectively. In the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor, the detection of the passage of the game ball is normally disabled, and the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball passes either one of the left-hand actor continuous operation left gate 1100 and the right-hand actor continuous operation right gate 1110. Invalidated based on detection of passage.

  When the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of eight rounds is executed. When the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the right gate 1110, the main CPU determines the 2R big hitting game state (selection rate 50%) in which the two rounds of the round game are executed, and the 16th round Of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the state is controlled to the jackpot game state determined by the lottery.

  It should be noted that a big hit occurs when the left gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the left-to-be-operated operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the right-to-use gate 1110 to continuously operate. The expected value of the prize ball amount paid out in the gaming state is the same.

  Also, the game ball that has passed through the role of continuously operating the left gate 1100 or the continuously operated right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead is discharged out of the pachinko machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

  The distribution device 1120 distributes the game balls reaching above the distribution device 1120 to one of a role-operating item continuously operated left gate 1100 and a character-object continuously operating right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game balls easily pass through the right-gate 1111 for continuous operation of the accessory (see FIG. 59). It easily passes through the left gate 1100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 60).

  In the fourth extended example, the ease of passage of a game ball is different between the left-hand-operated-portion-operating left gate 1100 and the right-hand-operated-portion-operating right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in the setting 1, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is repeated between the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds, and in the setting 2, the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3. In the setting 3, the first posture is repeated 0.9 seconds and the second posture is repeated 1.1 seconds. In the setting 4, the first posture is repeated 1.1 seconds and the second posture is repeated 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the left gate 1100, the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state is the same as when the player wins. That is, although the mode of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the game ball is detected to pass through the left gate 1100 and the right gate sensor is detected when the game ball passes through the right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of a game ball to the role of continuously operating the left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate 30%) Is determined by the lottery performed at the above-described selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously actuating the right gate 1110, the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the game and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state in which the expected value to be paid out as a prize ball is higher. It is possible to increase the possibility of the operation.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through one of the two gates (continuous operation left gate 1100 and role continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is activated, the role is continuously activated. The apparatus is configured to be operated to be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is operated based on the result of the special symbol big hit determination performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball is connected to either of the above two gates. A game ball may win at the starting port before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition device has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the two gates, the main CPU 101 sets the setting check process based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, 42 (see step S72 in FIG. 42), and it may be determined that the setting is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 43) in the setting check process. In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to advance the game.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the passage of a game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating, two gates (operator continuous operation) are activated below the distribution device 1120 when the passing of the game ball is detected. Although the left gate 1100 and the role of continuous operation of the right gate 1110) are provided, it is not necessarily limited to the gate of continuous operation of the role that is provided below the distribution device 1120. For example, a starting port and a general winning opening are provided. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 causes the game ball that has reached the upper side of the distribution device 1120 by a regular operation to have a starting port serving as a jackpot determination trigger for a special symbol, and a general winning not serving as the jackpot determination trigger. Distribute to the mouth and either. The operation of the distribution device 1120 is, for example, an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and a first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. .3 seconds, setting 3 repeats the first posture 0.9 seconds and second posture 1.1 seconds, setting 4 performs the first posture 1.1 seconds and the second posture 0.9 seconds. In the setting 5, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and in the setting 6, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it becomes possible to vary the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value, the game ball is fired by the player at any timing regardless of the set value. It is possible to have an interest that it is possible to aim for a prize at the starting opening.

[9-6. Extended example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 5 does not make the data relating to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but can change the game property of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. . In addition, in the extended example 5, the configuration is such that the setting value can be set to any one of the five stages of the setting 1 to the setting 5. However, it is not always necessary to set the setting value to the five stages. Can be arbitrarily determined.

  Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, for example, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination for a special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, five rounds Control to the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, and the amount of prize balls paid out in a single jackpot game state is relatively small. It becomes possible to execute a game with game characteristics.

  In addition, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, for example, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends to the high probability gaming state, and after a predetermined period, the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state ends. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine.

  When the set value is set to setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a special probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines, for example, whether or not to set a probability change flag to ON using a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probable variable loop machine.

  When the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of, for example, a special probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines, for example, whether or not to set a probability change flag to ON using a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set on the number of times the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop count”). When the loop count reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The second game state is controlled to the low-probability game state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. In the above-described game characteristics, if the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is continued until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability gaming state after the big-hit gaming state ends is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined period has elapsed.

  When the set value is set to setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500 pieces, and the game is called a general digi-pachi game. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU always sets the probability change flag to ON when the big hit game state ends or at a certain probability, and when the probability change flag is set to ON, the main CPU changes the game state after the big hit game state ends. , Control to a high probability gaming state. In addition, in the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU performs a gaming state transition lottery when performing a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining that the gaming state is to be transitioned in the gaming state transition lottery, sets the probability change flag to OFF. Then, control is performed to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed in the high-probability game state to shift to the low-probability game state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the pachinko gaming machine can change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine in accordance with the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, for example. The game can be executed by one unit.

  Note that, in the above, a game with a game property called a so-called sweet digital game can be executed in the setting 1, a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine can be executed in the setting 2, and a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine can be executed in the setting 3. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probable variable loop machine, a game with a game property called a limiter machine in setting 4 and a game with a low probability in a high probability game state in setting 5. Although it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed for shifting to the stochastic game state, it is not essential that all these game properties can be executed according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch between a game property called a so-called ST machine and a game property called a so-called probable loop machine in accordance with the set value. Both the game property called the so-called ST machine and the game property called the so-called probable loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game state, but the high-probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether the game continues to the next jackpot game state or ends halfway. In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine in a wider range. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the interest while having fun.

[9-7. Other extension examples]
The present invention can be applied to all the gaming machines in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs a game using a game medium and a bonus is provided based on the result of the game. That is, a game is performed by a game medium being fired or inserted by the action of a physical player, and not only in a form in which the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also in the main control circuit 100 itself, The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game balls or a game performed without medals. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

  When managed by the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device includes a ROM and a RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game device (not shown). The medium handling device is connected to the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium insertion operation). Operation) or the winning of the role related to the payout of the game medium (the win is established), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, paying out the game medium to the player, and obtaining the required game medium) Operation) or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device displays not only the actual number of game media but also the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a function of allowing a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, there is a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In such a case, it is desirable that the player has such a capability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, unless through the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for receiving electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on a game medium handling device side. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above-mentioned lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when ending the game, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange a prize, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another stand.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game media possessed by the player is transmitted. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalent may be discharged, or the storage medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game arcade can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

  Further, in a gaming machine or a game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown), a lock operation for locking game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed. Is also good. At this time, information that can only be known to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging unit provided in the game medium handling device.

  In the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine has been described. However, the same applies to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It is also possible to provide a game medium of the player.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can reduce the number of components, but also prevent the player from directly touching the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of gaming machines by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In addition, an enclosure-type gaming machine configured to be able to play without discharging the game medium to the outside, and data relating to the increase and decrease of the game medium due to the consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal through the game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

  The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and fires a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. Thereby, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of possessed balls is decremented by one. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is fired from above the game area, a so-called return ball (a foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

  In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, no upper plate or lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is provided. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game balls are not actually at hand of the player, and the game balls do not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a possessed ball by lending from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a possessed ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is fired from the launch device, the possessed ball is consumed, and the number of possessed balls is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings provided in the game area, payouts are made by the number according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of possessed balls increases. In addition, the number of possessed balls increases by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending, and paying out of game media" indicates that the consumption, lending, and paying out of the ball are performed. The “increase / decrease in game media” indicates that the number of possessed balls increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. The “data relating to the increase and decrease of game media associated with the consumption, lending, and payout of game media” is data relating to a decrease in possession balls due to the launch of game balls, and an increase in possession balls due to lending and payout.

  The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball by that is added to the number of possessed balls. When a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of possessed balls to the game medium management device by an operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and receives a request for conversion from a game value managed by the game medium management device to a possessed ball (ball lending) and counting (returning) of possessed balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data on the current number of balls held. Here, the “game value” refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into a possession ball by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like in a game hall where a gaming system is installed.

  Further, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, the detection of the opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed by the backup power supply. As a result, fraudulent acts can be prevented at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

  The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted / received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. When one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

  As described above, at the transmission source, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not falsified by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, It can be confirmed that it is being sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as falsification of a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. A demodulation unit for demodulation may be provided.

  Thereby, even if a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination receives an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

  This not only confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal, by comparing the transmitted signal with the confirmation signal. Therefore, the suppression of fraudulent activities can be further strengthened.

[10. Processing executed by host control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by various control circuits in the sub-board 2020 of the sub-control circuit 200 (all shown in, for example, FIG. 10) will be described. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (for example, see FIG. 10) and performs various processes based on the various commands.

  In the following, processing related to various devices and the like will be described first, and then processing related to the whole menu task will be described. It should be noted that the processing relating to the whole menu task and the processing relating to various devices and the like are both processings executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, a CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100), but for convenience of explanation, The description will be made using different flowcharts.

[10-1. Processing related to various devices]
With reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. 99, processing related to various devices and the like will be described. 61, 72, 73, 74, and 98, including FIG. 52 described above, are examples of the sub-control main process (overall flow) executed when the power is turned on. It is a flowchart shown. These are all processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100), but for convenience of explanation, the processes are appropriately omitted according to various situations. For example, FIG. 52 and FIG. 61 illustrate the accessory control process (steps S210 and S1213), but FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74, and FIG. 98 omit the illustration of the accessory control process. 61, FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74, and FIG. 98, the same processes are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. For example, when the initialization process is described as an example, various initialization processes in FIG. 61 (step S1201), the initialization process in FIG. 72 (step S1381), the initialization process in FIG. 73 (step S1391), and the initialization in FIG. The initialization process (step S401) is substantially the same initialization process. Taking the accessory control process as an example, the accessory control process of FIG. 52 (step S210) and the accessory control process of FIG. Step S1213) is substantially the same processing.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processes (Step S1201). In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processing such as hardware initialization processing, device initialization processing, various application initialization processing, backup data restoration initialization processing, and RTC acquisition processing. Do. When the game data has been erased by clearing the RAM, a random number initialization process is also performed. The host control circuit 2100 clears the counter of the watchdog timer each time each initialization process ends. At the time of activation, the reset time of the watchdog timer is set, and thereafter, if the writing of the service pulse is not performed (at the time of timeout), the power interruption processing is performed. The timing of clearing the watchdog timer is at the start of each process in the main loop in the sub-control main process, at the start of each initialization process, and at the time of transition to the power interruption process.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters a main loop and performs an RTC acquisition process based on the RTC time, that is, a process of acquiring the current time (step S1202).

  The host control circuit 2100 performs a random number initialization process in step S1203. This random number initialization processing will be described later.

  The host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory in step S1204, and performs a synchronization process between the accessory and the solenoid (step S1205). These processes will be described later in “Accessory solenoid control process”.

  In step S1206, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub device input process. In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 performs the information acquisition processing of the operation content based on the input state of the operation means or the like (the processing of determining whether or not the player has operated the operation means such as the button). And so on. This sub-device input processing (step S1206) includes, for example, adjusting the brightness of an LED or the like by an operation of a player or the like.

  The host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes in step S1207. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes, such as a sound request control process, an LED request control process, an accessory request control process, and an accessory control process. The sound request, the LED request, the accessory request, and the like are stored in a buffer and output to each device after a bank flip in step S1214 described later. Thereby, synchronization with drawing can be achieved. The bank flip is a process of switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function.

  Incidentally, the accessory control process is performed in various request control processes (S1207) and is also shown in FIG. 61 as being performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). It is not essential to be performed in step S1213 after step S1212). Considering that the role request stored in the buffer in the animation construction process (step S1210) and the animation update process (step S1211) one frame before is output in the role processing, the animation construction process (step S1210) is performed. Is also preferably performed before. However, when the accessory request stored in the buffer is output in the same frame as the frame stored in the buffer, the accessory control process is performed in step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212). Is also good.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters a packet reception loop within the main loop, and performs a main-sub command control process (step S1208). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of reading command data when receiving command data from the main CPU 101 (command reception process) and a process of storing command data in the subwork RAM 2100a (reception data storage process).

  In step S1209, the host control circuit 2100 performs a game data backup process. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first data (magic code, program version, and SUM value) and the second data (both are magic codes that are information set in the hall menu) are used as game data used for RAM clear determination. And a SUM value) are prepared. Then, in the game data backup processing, the first data is stored in the game data and then backed up to the SRAM 2100b (see FIG. 10). The game data is also backed up (mirrored) in another area of the SRAM 2100b. After the power is turned on, the game data is restored from the data backed up in the SRAM 2100b. At this time, using the first data, it is checked whether or not the backed up data is damaged. If the backed up data is damaged, it is checked whether the second data is damaged. At this time, data stored in all SRAMs 2100b, such as hall menu information, is also initialized.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (Step S1210). In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 performs command analysis, state setting, and lottery processing, receives them, and generates an animation request necessary for performing the effect control using the display device 16. In response to the effect control (display) in the display device 16 executed based on the above, various requests (drawing request, sound request, LED request, and accessory request) for operating various effect devices are generated.

  The host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1208 to S1210 until the number of received commands is executed. After that, the host control circuit 2100 passes through the animation update processing (step S1211), the drawing control processing (step S1212), the accessory control processing (step S1213), and the bank flip / bank flip end wait (step S1214), and in the main loop. Each process is repeated.

  The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly executes the process (main loop process) of the example of steps S1202 to S1214 described above at a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is set to, for example, about 16.7 msec (60 FPS), about 33.3 msec (30 FPS), or the like. The predetermined FPS cycle is adjusted in step S1214.

  In the following, timer interrupt processing, sub-device input processing, backlight control processing, backlight and various LED brightness adjustment, RTC acquisition processing, composition reproduction control, sound amplifier control processing, sound request control processing (for the same channel) The sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the LED brightness adjustment process, the accessory solenoid control process, the data loading process, and the sub random number process will be described in this order. Note that the order of explanation of each process is different from the order of processing for convenience of explanation.

[10-2. Timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs an interrupt process at a cycle of 1 msec. Although the interrupt process will be described in each process described later, an example of a typical interrupt process will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit). Note that, in the timer interrupt processing briefly described with reference to FIG. 62 and the timer interrupt processing described later (see FIGS. 69 and 71), different reference numerals are given to the same processing for convenience of description. For example, when the accessory motor control is described as an example, the accessory motor control of FIG. 62 (step S1251), the accessory motor control of FIG. 69 (step S1352), and the accessory motor control of FIG. 71 (step S1371) Are substantially the same processing but have different reference numerals.

  Referring to FIG. 62, in the timer interrupt processing, first, host control circuit 2100 performs accessory motor control (step S1251). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs an input state determination process based on the input information of the sub device (Step S1252). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs control processing of, for example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 based on the luminance value (step S1253). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sound amplifier check process (Step S1254).

[10-3. Sub device input processing]
In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 creates sub-device input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. The sub device is controlled based on the sub device input determination information.

  When the host control circuit 2100 detects the input state of the sub-device by a timer interrupt every 1 msec, the host control circuit 2100 uses the sub-device input information, the sub-device input Input ON edge information, sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function), and sub device input OFF edge information are created.

  The sub-device input processing shown in FIG. 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub device is controlled by the host control circuit 2100 based on input (for example, operation) information such as a push button. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example for explaining the sub-device input discrimination information to be created. Showing (c) sub-device input ON edge information created in the main processing, and (c) sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) created in the main processing. FIG. 5D is a diagram showing sub-device OFF edge information created in the main processing. FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sub device input process. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. FIG. 66 shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, and is a flowchart continued from FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 63B, the sub device input information created in the main process is created according to the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt (see FIG. 63A). That is, when the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt is ON, 1 is set. When the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt is OFF, 0 is set.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (c), when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from OFF to ON as shown in FIG. Is set.

  The sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) is information used for control, for example, at the time of debugging or when the operation button is pressed for a long time, and is detected by a timer interrupt as shown in FIG. When it is detected that the input state of the sub device changed from OFF to ON, 1 is set for one frame in the main processing. When the ON state of the input state of the sub device continues thereafter, 1 is set to one frame after a lapse of 10 frames in the main processing, for example, as a fixed time until the start of key repeat, and thereafter, in the main processing, for example. 1 is set every four frames. The reason why the length of the first frame is increased to 10 frames so that it is possible to determine whether or not the sub-device has been long-pressed is determined. Can be.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (e), when it is detected that the sub-device input state detected by the timer interrupt has changed from ON to OFF, the sub-device input OFF edge information is set to 1 for only one frame in the main processing. Is set.

  In the present embodiment, assuming that there are a plurality of sub-devices, the host control circuit 2100 manages the sub-device input determination information in bit units. For example, bit0 is a main button, bit1 is a left button, and bit2 is a right button. Subdevice input discrimination information can be managed for a maximum of 32 devices, for example.

  Next, the sub-device input processing (for example, see step S1206 in FIG. 61) will be described with reference to FIG. This sub-device input processing includes, for example, sub-device input information, sub-device input ON edge information, sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function), and sub-device input OFF edge information as sub device input determination information. This is the process of creating the type information.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 creates input information of the current sub device based on the input state of the current sub device (step S1301). Specifically, 1 is set if the sub device is in the ON state, and 0 is set if the sub device is in the OFF state.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 updates the input information of the sub device with the current sub device input information, that is, the input information of the sub device created in step S1301 (step S1302).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 1 (step S1303). If the previous sub-device input information is 0 and the current sub-device input information is 1 (YES in step S1303), the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information to 1 (step S1304). It moves to S1306. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is not 0 and the current subdevice input information is not 1 (ie, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 or / and the current subdevice input information is 0), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information to 0 (step S1305), and proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the previous sub-device input information is 1 and the current sub-device input information is 0. If the previous sub-device input information is 1 and the current sub-device input information is 0 (YES in step S1306), the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input OFF edge information to 1 (step S1307). It moves to S1309. On the other hand, if the previous sub-device input information is 1 and the current sub-device input information is not 0 (that is, if the previous sub-device input information is 0 or / and the current sub-device input information is 1), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input OFF edge information to 0 (step S1308), and proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1309, the host control circuit 2100 performs sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing. Details of this sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described later.

  When the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S1309 ends, the host control circuit 2100 sets the current sub-device input information to the previous sub-device input information (step S1310), and The process ends.

  Next, the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the sub-device input ON edge information (with the repeat function) processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the previous sub-device input information is 0 (step S1321). . If the previous subdevice input information is 0 (YES in step S1321), the process moves to step S1322.

  In step S1322, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the current sub device input information is “1”. If the current subdevice input information is 1 (YES in step S1322), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is 1, the flow proceeds to step S1323. On the other hand, if the current sub device input information is not 1 (NO in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 0, the sub device input is turned on. The edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) to 1 (step S1323), sets 10 frames as elapsed frames (step S1324), and sets the sub-device input ON edge information. The process (with the repeat function) ends.

  If the previous sub device input information is 1 in step S1321 (NO in step S1321), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1325 in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 66, in step S1325, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current subdevice input information is “1”. If the current subdevice input information is 1 (YES in step S1325), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 1, 1 is subtracted from the elapsed frame. (Step S1326), and it proceeds to step S1327.

  In step S1327, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the elapsed frame is 0. If the elapsed frame is 0 (YES in step S1327), the sub device input ON edge information (with the repeat function) is set to 1 (step S1328), and the elapsed frame is set to 4 (step S1329). The input ON edge information (with a repeat function) process ends.

  In step S1325, if the current subdevice input information is not 1 (NO in step S1325), that is, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0, the host control The circuit 2100 sets the elapsed frame to 0 (Step S1330), and proceeds to Step S1331.

  When the sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) is set to 0 in step S1331, the host control circuit 2100 ends the sub-device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) process.

  As described above, the host control circuit 2100 creates the above-described four types of sub-device input discrimination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. By controlling the sub-devices based on these four types of sub-device input discrimination information, it is possible to easily control the continuous hitting effect of the sub-devices, control the long-pressing effect, control the time setting, and control other operations. It becomes possible.

[10-4. Backlight control processing]
Next, a backlight control process (for example, a backlight control process for controlling a backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example for conceptually explaining the backlight control processing. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the backlight control process.

  The backlight control processing of the present embodiment is performed continuously and continuously from a serial output terminal of a serial peripheral interface (Serial Peripheral Interface, hereinafter referred to as “SPI”) by using the function of SPI asynchronous data write (SPI + DMA). A signal corresponding to pulse width modulation (hereinafter, referred to as “PWM”) is output so that the duty (luminance) can be changed. This makes it possible to perform backlight control without using a backlight control driver.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the SPI clock frequency is 100 kHz, the SPI1 clock is 0.01 msec, the time required for transmitting 16 bits of SPI data (one piece of luminance data is 16 bits) is 0.16 msec, and the host control circuit 2100 The interruption is 1 msec, and the number of pieces of luminance data transmitted from the SPI during the regular interruption of the host control circuit 2100 is 100 bits. Therefore, the number of luminance data transmitted between the periodic interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 6.25 (100/16) (see FIG. 67). Therefore, for example, the number of periodic interrupts executed until 32 luminance data are replenished in a FIFO (First In First Out) data area in which 64 16-bit luminance data can be set (stored) is 5 to 6 times. it is conceivable that. Note that the number of times differs depending on the time of the periodic interrupt of the host control circuit 2100.

  For example, when the luminance data set (stored) in a FIFO (First In First Out) data area in which 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set (stored) is less than 32, a callback function is called. The area is not always filled. Therefore, if the processing for setting (storing) the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO does not take a long time in another processing in the main processing executed at a period of 33.3 msec, the data area of the FIFO becomes empty. (The backlight may go black).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, after power-on, first, 64 pieces of 1-bit 16-bit luminance data are set to fill the FIFO data area, and then 32 pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area are set. When the value is less than, the callback function is called, and 32 data are set in the callback function so that the data area of the FIFO is not emptied.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is a process at the time of initial setting (step S1341). If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of the initial setting (that is, one of the processes in step 201 in FIG. 61) (YES in step S1341), 64 pieces of the brightness data of the brightness 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It is set (Step S1342), and the routine goes to Step S1343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of the initial setting (that is, the process of step S1253 in FIG. 62) (NO in step S1341), the process of step S1342 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1343.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the luminance value has been changed in step S1343. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the luminance value has been changed (YES in step S 1343), the host control circuit 2100 changes the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO (step S 1344), and proceeds to step S 1345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the luminance value has not been changed (NO in step S 1343), the process of step S 1344 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S 1345.

  In step S1345, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32, and determines whether the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is 32. If not (YES in step S1345), 32 pieces of luminance data are set in the data area of the FIFO, that is, supplemented (step S1346), and the backlight control processing ends. On the other hand, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is larger than 32 (NO in step S1345), the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight processing.

  In this way, by processing the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO so as not to be empty, a signal equivalent to PWM can be output continuously and continuously from the serial data output terminal of the SPI. The backlight control can be performed without the intervention of the write control driver.

  It should be noted that the processing of steps S1343 to S1346 of the backlight control processing of the present embodiment can be replaced as follows. That is, after setting 64 data of luminance 0 (see step S1342), a process of determining whether or not the number of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32 is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the brightness value has been changed. If it is determined that the brightness value has been changed, 32 pieces of brightness data corresponding to the setting are set in the data area of the FIFO. 32 are set in the data area of the FIFO. In this way, the luminance data may be set in the data area of the FIFO, and the backlight control processing may be ended.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below 32 (half of the number of data that can be set in the FIFO), 32 luminance data are supplemented. The timing and the number of pieces of luminance data to be supplemented are not limited to this, and the prescribed number of pieces of luminance data may be supplemented when the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below a prescribed number. The luminance data supplemented to the FIFO data area does not need to be the above-mentioned predetermined number. For example, if the luminance data set in the FIFO data area falls below the first number, the second number The luminance data may be supplemented. However, from the viewpoint that the frequency of setting the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO does not become too high and the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO does not become empty, the predetermined number or the first The number is preferably about half the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO, but is not limited to this as described above. Note that the above “about half” means a range in which the frequency of setting the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO does not become too high and the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO does not become empty. There are various determination methods, such as less than half or less than half, depending on the speed of consumption of the luminance data set in the data area. For example, in the FIFO data area in the present embodiment, up to 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is 1 to 64, one or more new pieces of luminance data are set. The luminance data may be set. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from being darkened (the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO becomes 0), the data of the FIFO may be set. When two or more pieces of luminance data are set in the region, it is preferable to newly set one or more pieces of luminance data. The number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more pieces of luminance data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is, for example, two or more, and the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below the first number (eg, two), the second number is set. (For example, one) of luminance data may be supplemented.

[10-4-1. Modified example of backlight control processing]
Next, a modified example of the backlight control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process according to a modified example of the backlight control process. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating a modified example of the backlight control process.

  In a modified example of the backlight control processing, when there is a possibility that the processing may take time in the 1 msec timer interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time or more has elapsed since the data was set in the data area of the FIFO in the backlight control processing. Is determined, and when a predetermined time or more has elapsed, data is set in the data area of the FIFO.

  In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 first performs a backlight control process (step S1351). Hereinafter, for convenience of description, before describing the processing after step S1352, the backlight control processing of step S1351 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is a process at the time of initial setting (step S1361). If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of the initial setting (that is, one of the processes in step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1361), 64 pieces of the brightness data of brightness 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It is set (step S1362), and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1366. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the process at the time of the initial setting (that is, the process of step S1351) (NO in step S1361), the process proceeds to step S1363.

  In step S1363, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32, and determines whether the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is 32. If not (YES in step S1363), 32 pieces of luminance data are set or supplemented in the data area of the FIFO (step S1364), and the process proceeds to step S1365. On the other hand, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is larger than 32 (NO in step S1363), the process moves to step S1366. As described above, the above-mentioned 32 pieces are half the number of data that can be set in the FIFO.

  In step S1365, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1365) and starts measuring the elapsed time (step S1366). When the measurement of the elapsed time starts in step S1366, the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight control processing.

  Returning to FIG. 69, after ending the backlight control processing in step S1351, the host control circuit 2100 performs accessory motor control (step S1352).

  In this modification, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process that may take a long time, such as the accessory motor control, and then determines whether or not the elapsed time at which time measurement was started in step S1366 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. Is determined (step S1353). If the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S1353), 32 pieces of luminance data are set in the data area of the FIFO (step S1354). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S1353), it is not necessary to replenish the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO, so the flow shifts to step S1357.

  As described above, since the time required to transmit 16 bits of data (1 data of luminance data is 16 bits) in SPI is 0.16 msec, it is considered that 5.12 msec is required to transmit 32 pieces of luminance data. Can be Therefore, in this modified example, in step S1353, it is determined whether or not 5.12 msec or more has elapsed as the predetermined time.

  After performing the processing of step S1354, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1355), and starts measuring the elapsed time again (step S1356). Then, when the measurement of the elapsed time is started in step S1356, the host control circuit 2100 performs an input state determination process (step S1357) and ends the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, the time measurement is started when the luminance data is set in the data area of the FIFO, and after the processing that may require time, the luminance data is supplemented if the time measurement time exceeds a predetermined time. By doing so, it becomes possible to prevent the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO from becoming empty.

  In this modification, an example has been described in which the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the accessory motor control (step S1352), but this is merely an example. That is, from the viewpoint of preventing the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO from becoming empty, if the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the processing that may take time for the processing, Often, such processing is not limited to a particular processing.

[10-5. Brightness adjustment of backlight and various LEDs]
Next, variations of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and the various LEDs will be described. The various LEDs correspond to a board-side LED (for example, an LED arranged on the game board unit 17), a frame-side LED, and the like, and in this specification, a lamp group 25 including LEDs (for example, see FIG. 9). Hit. Furthermore, in this specification, three variations of the first to third embodiments will be described as variations of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and the various LEDs with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74, respectively. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process indicating the backlight control process. FIG. 72 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for describing the first embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 73 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for describing the second embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 74 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for describing the third embodiment of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. However, FIG. 72 to FIG. 74 show only the processing necessary for the description, and the other processing is omitted. In the first to third embodiments described below, as described above, when the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is reduced to about half, the host control circuit 2100 stores the data in the data area of the FIFO. Supplement brightness data.

  The timing at which the luminance data is supplemented to the FIFO data area is not limited to when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is reduced to about half. In the FIFO data area in the present embodiment, for example, up to 64 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 1 to 64, one or more new luminance data are set. What is necessary is just to set luminance data. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO becomes 0), the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is 2 bits. It is preferable to newly set one or more pieces of luminance data when the number is equal to or more than the number. The number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more pieces of luminance data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is, for example, two or more, and the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below the first number (eg, two), the second number is set. (For example, one) of luminance data may be supplemented.

(First embodiment)
For example, when the brightness of a backlight (for example, a backlight such as a liquid crystal display) is adjusted by an operation of a player or the like, the brightness of the backlight is changed. May be affected. In such a case, the present embodiment sets the luminance setting of the backlight and the luminance setting of the panel side LED and the frame side LED to a common setting, and sets the backlight, the panel side LED and the frame side LED according to the setting. The control is performed. Thus, even if the update timing of the backlight control is different from the update timing of the control of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED, the processing can be facilitated.

  In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order.

  As shown in FIG. 72, after performing the initialization processing (step S1381), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to the main loop and performs the LED request control processing (step S1382). The LED request made in step S1382 was created in the animation construction process of the previous frame (step S1386 described later).

  After performing the processing in step S1382, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-described subdevice (button) input determination information generation processing (step S1383) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1384.

  In step S1384, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, a player or the like operating a brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16). Set. The brightness of the backlight is set in three levels, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

  After performing the processing in step S1384, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to a packet reception loop, and first sets the luminance values of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the effect mode to be executed and the setting of the luminance value. (Step S1385). Similarly to the backlight, the luminance of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is set at, for example, three levels of strong, medium, and weak.

  Here, by setting the setting of the luminance of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED and the setting of the luminance of the backlight as a common setting, it is possible to suppress the increase in the control load and to reduce the luminance of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED. Both the setting and the setting of the brightness of the backlight can be changed by the operation of the player or the like. For example, based on a player or the like operating a luminance setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 changes the luminance value of the backlight (step S1384), The luminance values of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are also changed (step S1385). At this time, the stage of the luminance value of the backlight and the stage of the luminance value of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED are also common. For example, if the stage of the luminance value of the backlight is medium, the stage of the luminance value of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is also medium. As shown in FIG. 72, since the luminance update timing of the backlight is different from the luminance update timing of the panel side LED and the frame side LED, after the luminance of the backlight is updated, the panel side LED and the frame side LED are updated. Is updated. However, the control may be performed such that the luminance update timing of the backlight is the same as the luminance update timing of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED.

  Note that the luminance of the backlight, the luminance of the board-side LED, and the luminance of the frame-side LED are changed based on a player or the like operating a luminance setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the luminance of the backlight, the luminance of the board-side LED, and the luminance of the frame-side LED may be changed based on the operation of an effect push button. In this case, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a period in which the button functions as a production push button (effective period of the push button), it is necessary to adjust the luminance of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED in the main flow. It is necessary to control the backlight according to the luminance of the LED.

  The host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process in step S1386. In the animation construction processing in step S1386, an LED request is created. The created LED request is output in the LED request control process of the next frame (see step S1382) after being waited in the buffer.

  The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly performs the processing of steps S1385 and S1386 according to the received packet.

  Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation update process (step S1377), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip completion (step S1388).

  The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly performs each processing of steps S1382 to S1388 in the main loop at a period of 33.3 msec.

(Second embodiment)
For example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED may be affected as described above. In this case, in this case, when a luminance adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, for example, the luminance value of the backlight is immediately changed, but the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is performed in a special pattern. This is executed after the end of the fluctuation or between bank flips.

  As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 73, after performing the initialization processing (Step S1391), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to the main loop and performs the LED request control processing (Step S1392). The LED request made in step S1392 was created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1395 described later).

  After performing the processing of step S1392, the host control circuit 2100 generates the above-described subdevice (button) input determination information based on the input state of the subdevice (for example, a luminance adjustment operation by a player or the like) (step S1393). Is performed, and the routine goes to Step S1394.

  In step S1394, the host control circuit 2100 sets the luminance of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, a luminance adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three levels, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

  After performing the processing in step S1394, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to a packet reception loop and performs animation construction processing (step S1395). In the animation construction processing in step S1395, an LED request is created. The created LED request is output in the LED request control process of the next frame (see step S1392) after being waited in the buffer.

  The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly performs the process of step S1395 according to the received packet.

  Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation update process (step S1396), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip end (step S1397), and proceeds to step S1398.

  In step S1398, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the variation of the effect identification displayed on the liquid crystal display device as the display device 16 has ended, that is, whether or not the variation time of the effect identification symbol has elapsed. (Step S1398). If the change of the effect identification symbol has been completed (YES in step S1398), the host control circuit 2100 changes the luminance of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the set value at that time (step S1399). On the other hand, if the change of the special symbol has not been completed (NO in step S1398), the processing of steps S1392 to S1399 in the main loop with a period of 33.3 msec is repeated. Note that the processing in step S1399 may be performed during or after the bank flip in step S1397 instead of or in addition to when the change of the special symbol ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight that directly affects the eyes of the player based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). Is controlled to be changed immediately, but the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is changed after the brightness of the backlight is changed and after the change of the effect identification symbol is completed. Control. In addition, when the brightness adjustment operation is performed by the player or the like during the change of the identification symbol for effect, the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED needs to be changed by the LED request control process. Can be changed immediately. Therefore, based on the input state of the sub device, the backlight brightness is controlled so as to be changed immediately, but the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED is changed by the LED request control process, thereby controlling the control load. Can be minimized. That is, the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED can be changed while the control load is minimized, for example, by performing only one brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like.

  When the brightness of the backlight is changed based on the input state of the sub device (for example, a brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like), the host control circuit 2100 converts the brightness data relating to the changed brightness into a value stored in the FIFO. Set in the data area.

(Third embodiment)
For example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED may be affected as described above. In this case, in this case, when a luminance adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like in this case, the luminance value of the backlight is changed, and the effect of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is limited. It is like that. Performing in a limited manner corresponds to, for example, limiting the number of LEDs that emit light in the performance of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, and limiting the number of performances performed by the board-side LED and the frame-side LED. . Limiting the number of effects corresponds to, for example, performing effects 1 to 5 originally, performing only effects 1 to 3, and omitting effects 4 and 5 so as not to perform them. As a result, the effect of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is limited without directly changing the luminance value, so that the intensity of light received by the player from the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is suppressed. Become. Further, even if the update timing of the backlight control is different from the update timing of the control of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED, the processing can be facilitated.

  As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 74, after performing the initialization processing (step S1401), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to the main loop and performs the LED request control processing (step S1402). The LED request performed in step S1402 has been created in the animation construction process one frame before (step S1407 described later).

  After performing the processing of step S1402, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-described subdevice (button) input determination information generation processing (step S1403) based on the input state of the subdevice, and proceeds to step S1404.

  In step S1404, the host control circuit 2100 sets the backlight brightness based on the input state of the sub device (for example, a brightness adjustment operation by a player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set in three levels, for example, strong, medium, and weak.

  After performing the processing in step S1404, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the setting of the luminance has been changed (step S1405). If there is a change in the luminance setting (YES in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 limits the luminance of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED at that time according to the setting (step S1406), and proceeds to a packet reception loop. On the other hand, if there is no change in the setting of the luminance value (NO in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to the packet reception loop without performing the processing in step S1406.

  Upon shifting to the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1407). In the animation construction processing in step S1407, an LED request is created. The created LED request is output in the LED request control processing of the next frame (see step S1402) after being waited in the buffer.

  The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly performs the process of step S1407 according to the received packet.

  Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation update process (step S1408), and then waits for bank flip / bank flip completion (step S1409).

  The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1402 to S1409 in the main loop with a period of 33.3 msec.

  As for the backlight and the brightness adjustment of the various LEDs described above (first to third examples), the backlight control processing of this embodiment uses the function of the SPI asynchronous data write (SPI + DMA) as described above. For example, a signal equivalent to PWM is continuously output from the serial output terminal of the SPI, for example. On the other hand, as for the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, for example, as shown in step S1382 in FIG. 72, the LEDs are controlled based on the LED request created one frame before the main loop. Therefore, even when the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs is adjusted, the timing at which the brightness of the backlight is changed is different from the timing at which the brightness of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED is changed.

[10-6. RTC acquisition processing]
Next, the RTC acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the RTC acquisition process is performed both in the various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) and in the main loop (see step S1201 in FIG. 61). FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the RTC acquisition process.

  For example, when it is not possible to perform communication with the RTC, or when an error has occurred in the RTC itself, or when accurate time cannot be obtained due to an RTC abnormality, the time is not updated and the previous time is maintained. Therefore, when performing an RTC effect (for example, an effect related to Christmas at Christmas time) based on the RTC time, if an RTC abnormality occurs, the RTC effect may not be able to be executed. Furthermore, since the RTC time is not updated when the RTC or more occurs, there is a possibility that the RTC effect is still executed or the RTC effect is executed at an unexpected time.

  Therefore, in the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, when the RTC is abnormal, that is, when the previous RTC time is different from the current RTC time, the RTC effect is executed based on the current time. Note that a secondary battery is provided in the RTC, and time can be managed even when the power of the host control circuit 2100 is turned off. The host control circuit 2100 acquires the time from the RTC and manages the time at which an error occurred.

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the RTC acquisition processing, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (step S1412), and then proceeds to step S1413.

  In step S1413, the host control circuit 2100 updates the previous time. In the update of the previous time, the current time updated in step S1416 described later is updated as the previous time. Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the RTC is abnormal (Step S1414). If the RTC is abnormal (YES in step S1414), the current time is maintained (step S1415), and the process proceeds to step S1417. On the other hand, if the RTC is not abnormal (NO in step S1414), the current time is updated (step S1416), and the process proceeds to step S1417.

  In the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the RTC is abnormal after updating the previous time (step S1413) (step S1414). However, the previous time is updated instead. It may be determined whether the RTC is abnormal or not, and if the RTC is not abnormal, control may be performed so that the previous time is updated and the current time is not maintained.

  In step S1417, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current time is a specified time (for example, a time for executing an RTC effect). If the current time is the designated time (YES in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1418. If the current time is not the designated time (NO in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1420.

  In step S1418, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the previous time and the current time do not match. If the RTC is abnormal, the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418). If the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418), the RTC effect execution flag is set to 1 (step S1419). That is, when the RTC is abnormal, the RTC effect is executed when the current time reaches the designated time. After performing the process in step S1419, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process. If the previous time and the current time do not match (NO in step S1418), the process moves to step S1420.

  In step S1420, the host control circuit 2100 sets the RTC effect execution flag to 0. After performing the process in step S1420, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the RTC is abnormal, by executing the RTC effect when the current time reaches the designated time, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the RTC effect is not executed. .

[10-7. Composition playback control]
Next, composition reproduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG.

  The composition is, for example, scene data in which material data for composing an image (movie) displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 is combined, and generally includes a plurality of layers. The layers include animation, vector graphics, still images, lights, and the like.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the animation control main process executed by the display control circuit 2300. This animation control main processing is executed based on the input of the control signal of the drawing request output in the animation construction processing (see step S1211 in FIG. 61) executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 76, first, the display control circuit 2300 clears the composition reproduction information (step S1431). Then, the display control circuit 2300 executes a composition reproduction control process (step S1432). This composition reproduction control processing will be described later. Thereafter, the display control circuit 2300 executes the top-level direct drawing function (step S1433), and ends the animation control main process.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the composition reproduction control process executed by the display control circuit 2300. As shown in FIG. 77, first, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than) the upper limit of the number of priorities (step S1441). If the determined number of priorities is less than (or equal to or less than) the upper limit of the number of priorities (YES in step S1441), the process moves to step S1442. The number of priorities is the number of layers of the composition to be reproduced simultaneously, and the upper limit of the number of priorities is predetermined based on the composition to be reproduced. Therefore, as long as the processing by the host control circuit 2100 is normal, the determined priority number does not exceed the upper limit of the priority number. Therefore, when the determined number of priorities exceeds the upper limit of the number of priorities (NO in step S1441), display control circuit 2300 ends the composition reproduction control process.

  In step S1442, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of available displays, that is, the determined number of displays is available (for example, mounted) on the system. It is determined whether it is less than (or less than) the number (step S1442). If the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of available displays (YES in step S1442), the process moves to step S1443.

  In step S1443, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether the used display number is not 0, that is, determines whether there is a usable display number. If the used display number is not 0 (YES in step S1443), that is, if there is a usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1444. On the other hand, if the used display number is 0 (NO in step S1443), that is, if there is no usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1449.

  By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes two frame buffers as frame buffers in which a composition is registered. These two frame buffers are used by switching the function of one frame buffer from a drawing function to a display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from a display function to a drawing function by bank flip. Hereinafter, in this specification, a frame buffer having a display function is simply referred to as a “frame buffer”, and a frame buffer having a drawing function is referred to as a “drawing result output destination buffer”.

  In step S1444, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether the composition is registered in the drawing result output destination buffer. In the determination process of step S1444, it is determined whether or not the composition has been completely registered (that is, whether there is any unregistered composition). If all the compositions have been registered in the drawing result output buffer (YES in step S1444), display control circuit 2300 sets a drawing target (step S1445). Setting a drawing target is processing for setting a display on which drawing is performed. If the composition is not registered in the drawing result output buffer (NO in step S1444), that is, if there is an unregistered composition, the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1450.

  In step S1446, the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer. That is, the process of step S1446 is a process in which the drawing result output buffer is switched to the frame buffer by bank flip. At this time, the composition registered in the drawing result output buffer switched from the frame buffer is cleared. Thereafter, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not there is a pause flag in the composition registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 (step S147). The pause flag is a flag of a debugging function for temporarily stopping the image. When the pause flag is present (YES in step S1449), the display control circuit 2300 switches the drawing output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer by the bank flip in step S1446. Then, composition reproduction information is registered (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). On the other hand, if there is no pause flag (NO in step S147), the process moves to step S1449. The composition reproduction information includes, for example, the size of a frame buffer, the size of a composition, the coordinates of four vertices of an image to be reproduced, composition registration information, a loop composition to be reproduced, a composition length, and a start frame setting. , A loop reproduction flag, and the like. The registration of the composition reproduction information is to collect the composition reproduction information, and the composition reproduction is to register the collected composition reproduction information. When the composition playback information is registered, the previous playback information is cleared.

  In step S1450, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or more than the upper limit (that is, whether the number of reproduced frames exceeds the number of frames of the composition). Determine. If the number of frames reproduced in the rendering result output buffer is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (NO in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1457, and registers the composition reproduction information in the rendering result output buffer (step S1450). At S1457, the composition is reproduced (Step S1458).

  If the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1450 that the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or larger than the upper limit (YES in step S1450), the process proceeds to step S1451.

  The display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1451 whether or not the composition playback mode registered in the frame buffer is loop playback. If the composition playback mode registered in the frame buffer is loop playback (YES in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 performs playback from the beginning during loop playback (step S1452), and then proceeds to step S1457. . If the playback mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not loop playback (NO in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1453.

  In step S1453, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition playback mode registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display. If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display (YES in step S1453), display control circuit 2300 reproduces the last frame during frame continuous display (step S1454), and thereafter, step S1457. Move on to If the reproduction mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not the frame continuous display (NO in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1455.

  In step S1455, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition playback mode registered in the frame buffer is shot playback. If the playback mode is shot playback (YES in step S1455), display control circuit 2300 clears the composition during shot playback (step S1456), and then proceeds to step S1449. If the playback mode of the composition registered in the frame buffer is not shot playback (NO in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1457.

  Note that the composition reproduction information registration in step S1457 is, in principle, a process performed when a composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (when NO is determined in step S1444). However, as described above, even when there is a pause flag in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip of step S1446, as described above (YES in step S147), the display control circuit 2300 performs the frame flip by the bank flip of step S1446. The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the buffer (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). As described above, when there is a pause flag in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 (YES in step S147), the composition reproduction information is immediately registered in the drawing output destination buffer ( Since the composition is reproduced together with the step S1448) (step S1449), it is possible to perform quick processing.

  The display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined number of displays in step S1449, and returns to step S1442.

  If it is determined in step S1442 that the determined number of displays exceeds the upper limit of the number of usable displays (NO in step S1442), display control circuit 2300 executes a direct rendering function if there is data to be directly rendered. (Step S1460). Thereafter, the display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined priority number (step S1461), and returns to step S1441.

  As described above, in the composition reproduction control according to the present embodiment, in a state where the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, reproduction information of a new composition is not registered in principle. However, the composition is not registered only when the specific condition is satisfied (when YES is determined in step S1449, that is, when the composition registered in the drawing output destination buffer has a pause flag). It is possible to perform the processing (composition reproduction information registration). That is, in the state where the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, it is possible to register the composition again at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, it depends on the content of the newly (newly) registered composition. It is possible to overwrite the effect, skip the effect, and stop the effect.

  Also, the process of step S1441 (the process of determining whether or not the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than) the upper limit of the number of priorities (whether the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of available displays) The process of determining whether or not the priority is higher than the process of step S1442. Therefore, by returning from the process of step S1449 to step S1442 and performing the process, the number of priorities determined in step S1441 is displayed on a plurality of displays. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

[10-8. Sound amplifier check processing]
Next, the sound amplifier check processing shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this sound amplifier check processing, it is determined whether or not the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (hereinafter, referred to as “sound amplifier”) is in an abnormal state (for example, an overcurrent abnormality, a high temperature abnormality, a DC detection abnormality in which the audio signal does not change, and the like). Also, the setting information of the sound amplifier is confirmed. FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal amplifier check process. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the bass check process.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes, as sound amplifiers, a normal amplifier for amplifying normal audio data and a heavy bass amplifier for amplifying heavy bass audio data.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier check process (step S1471) and a heavy bass amplifier check process (step S1472).

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal amplifier check processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting has been performed from the binary file (step S1481). If there is a binary file at the time of initialization, the setting is performed from the binary file. The initialization process is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a problem is found in the amplifier check and resetting is performed. In the present embodiment, the setting is performed from the binary file. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage area different from the read setting such as a binary file may be used.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been performed from the binary file (YES in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of determining whether a register serving as a reference of a register value to be checked is normal (step S1482), and thereafter It moves to step S1483. In the determination processing of step S1482, the values of the registers are checked in the order of the addresses, and therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the register to start checking exists and whether or not the value is normal.

  In step S1483, the host control circuit 2100 rearranges the received data from the binary file. Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register with the received data (step S1484), and performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1485). After performing the determination processing in step S1485, the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier check processing.

  On the other hand, if the setting has not been performed from the binary file in step S1481 (NO in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value and the set value (step S1486), and performs the normal amplifier check process. To end. When the normal amplifier check processing is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs heavy bass amplifier check processing.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the bass bass amplifier check processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not settings have been made from a binary file (step S1491).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been performed from the binary file (YES in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of determining whether the register to be checked is normal (step S1492), and then proceeds to step S1493. .

  In step S1493, the host control circuit 2100 clears the registers 0x17-0x25 with an appropriate value (binary file information) in consideration of a case where the value cannot be read due to a hardware failure.

  In step S1494, the host control circuit 2100 rearranges the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register with the received data (step S1495), and updates the RAM address (step S1496). After performing the update processing in step S1496, the host control circuit 2100 ends the heavy bass amplifier check processing.

  On the other hand, if the setting has not been performed from the binary file in step S1491 (NO in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value and the setting value (step S1497), and checks the amplifier for heavy bass. The process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs the sound amplifier check processing in the 1 msec interrupt processing. By the way, such a sound amplifier check process can also be performed in the main loop. However, when the sound amplifier check processing is performed in the main loop, if the sound amplifier check processing requires time, other processing may be squeezed. Therefore, by performing the sound amplifier check processing in the interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the sound amplifier check processing without squeezing other processing in the main loop.

  In the sound amplifier check processing shown in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 62), for example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the 1 msec interrupt processing, the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (collective) check processing (step S1497) ) May be performed. The normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (collective) check process (step S1497) is a process of performing the normal amp check process (see FIG. 79) and the heavy bass amplifier check process (see FIG. 80) collectively.

  However, if the sound amplifier check processing is performed in the interrupt processing of 1 msec, there may be a case where the entire sound amplifier check processing cannot be executed. Therefore, a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable embodiment of the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier check processing. FIG. 84 shows an example of a more preferable embodiment of the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier check processing, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 83.

  In a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check process, as shown in FIG. 82, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check process (step S1498). Although the details of the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (split) check process will be described later, each check process of the normal amp and each bass bass amplifier is divided, and a range that can be achieved within an interrupt process of 1 msec. The check processing is performed within the frame, and the subsequent processing is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In other words, of the normal amplifier and the bass amplifier, only one check is performed in the interrupt process, but all checks are performed over multiple interrupt processes. It was made. By doing so, in the interrupt processing, it is possible to execute all of the normal amplifier check processing and the heavy bass amplifier check processing without ending in the middle.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not settings have been made from a binary file (step S1501).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been performed from the binary file (YES in step S1501), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the check status is 0 (step S1502). If the check status is 0 (YES in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the register value checked by the normal amplifier is normal (step S1503). After performing the processing in step S1503, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 1 (step S1504), and ends the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check processing. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1502 that the check status is not 0 (NO in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1505. In the process of step S1503, the determination as to whether or not each register value of the plurality of registers is normal may be further divided for each register.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether the check status is 1 in step S1505. If the check status is 1 (YES in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of rearranging the received data from the binary file (step S1506). Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the normal amplifier with the received data (step S1507), and determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1508). ). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (YES in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 2 (step S1509), and the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) ) End the check processing. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has not been executed (NO in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check processing without updating the check status. To end. That is, since the check status is maintained at 1 without being updated, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processing when the check status is 1 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the check status is not 1 in step S1505 (NO in step S1505), the process proceeds to step S1510. Note that the processing of step S1508 may be such that the processing of comparing the value of the RAM of each of the plurality of registers with the received data is further divided for each register.

  In step S1510, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the check status is “2”. If the check status is 2 (YES in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1511). Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been performed (step S1512). If the processes for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier have been executed (YES in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 3 (step S1513), and the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) ) End the check processing. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has not been executed (NO in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check processing without updating the check status. To end. That is, since the check status is maintained at 2 without being updated, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processing when the check status is 2 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the check status is not 2 in step S1510 (NO in step S1510), the process proceeds to step S1514 (see FIG. 84).

  Referring to FIG. 84, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the check status is 3 in a step S1514. If the check status is 3 (YES in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the register value to be checked by the heavy bass amplifier is normal (step S1515). Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the heavy bass amplifier has been performed (step S1516). If the processing for the number of divisions of the bass amplifier has been executed (YES in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 4 (step S1517), and the normal amplifier / bass amplifier ( The (split) check process ends. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the bass amplifier has not been executed (NO in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier and the bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. The process ends. That is, since the check status is maintained at 3 without being updated, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 3 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the check status is not 3 in step S1514 (NO in step S1514), the process proceeds to step S1518.

  In step S1518, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the check status is “4”. If the check status is 4 (YES in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 clears the register value of the heavy bass amplifier with an appropriate value (step S1519). Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 5 (step S1520), and ends the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check processing. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the check status is not 4 in step S1518 (NO in step S1518), the process proceeds to step S1521.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the check status is 5 in Step S1521. If the check status is 5 (YES in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of rearranging the received data from the binary file (step S1522). Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM in the register of the bass amplifier with the received data (step S1523), and updates the RAM address (step S1524). Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the heavy bass amplifier has been performed (step S1525). If the processing for the number of divisions of the bass amplifier has been performed (YES in step S1525), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the update of the RAM address has been completed (step S1526), and changes the check status. It is set to 0 (step S1527), and the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check processing is terminated. In step S1525, when the processing for the number of divisions of the bass amplifier has not been performed (NO in step S1525), and when it is determined in step S1526 that the update of the RAM address has not been completed (NO in step S1526). The host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check processing without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is maintained at 5 without being updated, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processing when the check status is 5 again in the next and subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the check status is not 5 in step S1521 (NO in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier / heavy bass amplifier (division) check process.

  As described above, in a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check processing, each check processing of the normal amplifier and each check processing of the heavy bass amplifier are divided, and can be performed within 1 msec interrupt processing (that is, within one frame). Check processing is performed within the range, and subsequent processing is performed in the next and subsequent frames. As described above, since a part of the check processing of the normal amplifier and a part of the check processing of the heavy bass amplifier are performed over a plurality of frames within one frame, it is possible to execute the entire check processing of each amplifier over a plurality of frames. It becomes possible.

  When the check status is 4, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processes for the number of divisions have been executed (for example, if the check status is 3, the process in step S1516 is equivalent). Absent. This is because the processing in step S1519 performed when the check status is 4 can be performed in a short time so as not to affect the interruption processing of 1 msec. In other words, the processing performed when the check status is 4 (step S1519) is performed when the check status is 0 (step S1503), and the processing performed when the check status is 1 (step S1506). And step S1507), processing performed when the check status is 2 (step S1511), processing performed when the check status is 3 (step S1515), and processing performed when the check status is 5 (step S1515) This is because the time required for the processing is shorter than that in steps S1522 to S1524) and does not affect the 1 msec interrupt processing. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in consideration of the time required for the processing (whether or not to affect the interruption processing of 1 msec), it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been performed. Or not. However, even if the processing does not affect the 1 msec interrupt processing (for example, processing such as step S1519 performed when the check status is 4), it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been performed. The determination may be made.

  In addition, in each process of step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515, the determination as to whether or not each register value of the plurality of registers is normal may be further divided for each register. In this case, the progress of the further divided determination may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the large classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the small classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the large classification. Thus, the progress of the processing can be managed. Similarly, in each of the processes of steps S1506 to S507 and steps S1522 to S523, the process of comparing the value of the RAM of each of the plurality of registers with the received data is further divided for each register. May be. In this case, the progress of the further divided processing may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the processing of the large classification shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, and the check status (second check status) related to the processing of the small classification obtained by further dividing the processing of the large classification. Thus, the progress of the processing can be managed. For example, even when a power failure occurs during the processing or determination of the sub-classification, the progress of the processing or determination of the sub-classification is checked by the first check status and the second check status after the power is restored, Control may be performed to restart each process and each determination.

  Various settings can be made, such as setting the check status to 0 when the power is turned on, and starting from the check status at the time of the previous power failure after power recovery when the power is interrupted during processing. Of course, when a power failure occurs, when the power is turned on, or when the backup clear (ram clear) process is performed, the check status is set to 0 after the power is restored, and all processes and determinations are performed again ( Alternatively, control may be performed such that all processing or determination or part of processing or determination is performed again as one processing of the initialization processing.

[10-9. Sound request control processing (when there are multiple sound requests for the same channel)]
Next, regarding the sound request control processing shown in FIG. 61, the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests (also referred to as SAC requests) for the same channel will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same reproduction channel in the same frame of the main loop performed at a period of 33.3 msec, for example, a mute command of 2 msec is provided between the SAC requests. Registration is done with As a result, it is possible to prevent the game sound output based on the SAC request from being covered by another game sound, and to output the game sound with high accuracy. However, in this case, although there is a merit that the game sound is not overwritten, there is a possibility that the processing may take time. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC numbers are designated (registered) to the same virtual track in the same frame of the main loop, a later-arrived SAC request is provided with an interval between the SAC request and the first SAC request. A request is made and a later-arrival SAC request is made without leaving an interval between the first-arrival SAC number and the first-arrival SAC number. This will be specifically described below.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the sound request control process (when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel), the host control circuit 2100 first checks the SAC number and the reproduction channel (step S1541), After that, it moves to step S1542.

  In step S1542, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel. For example, since the SAC numbers are different between the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction, a plurality of SAC numbers may be specified for the same reproduction channel without an interval. When there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel (YES in step S1542), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1543. On the other hand, if there are no multiple SAC requests for the same reproduction channel (NO in step S1542), the sound request control process ends. In this embodiment, since one virtual track corresponds to one playback channel, the determination processing in step S1542 is synonymous with determining whether or not there is a SAC request for the same virtual track. It is. That is, the “track” is an interface for decoding and reproducing the “phrase”, and the “reproduction channel” is a concept of reproducing the “phrase”. That is, when a "phrase" is requested to be reproduced by designating a "reproduction channel", the phrase is reproduced by being assigned to the corresponding "track". The “virtual track” refers to an “interface for phrase playback control”. Note that there are 128 virtual tracks, which can be automatically assigned to 32 phrase playback channels. However, in this embodiment, since this function is not used, “virtual track” = “reproduction channel”.

  In step S1543, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback is performed. If the playback is the chain playback of the SHOT playback and the LOOP playback (YES in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 executes the SAC request for the LOOP playback one frame later (after 33.3 msec) (step S1544), and controls the sound request. The process ends. In the case of the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction, the SOT request for the LOOP reproduction is executed with a delay of one frame, so that the sound of the SHOT reproduction is not overwritten, thereby preventing the sound of the SHOT reproduction from being difficult to hear. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if it is not the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction (NO in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1545.

  In step S1545, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the mute command between SACs is mute setting for all reproduction channels. For example, when the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol ends, a mute command is set uniformly between SACs for all reproduction channels. If the mute command between SACs is mute setting for all playback channels (YES in step S1545), host control circuit 2100 causes SAC data corresponding to the first-arrived SAC request to execute mute. Without overwriting the mute command, the SAC data corresponding to the later-arrived SAC request is set (step S1546), and the sound request control process ends. On the other hand, if the mute command between SACs is not the mute setting for all the playback channels (NO in step S1545), the mute command for each playback channel corresponds to the later-arrived SAC request so that quick processing is performed. The SAC data is overwritten and set (step S1547), and the sound request control process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop, when the plurality of SAC requests are chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback, , The LOOP reproduction SAC number is delayed by one frame (for example, 33.3 msec) so that the LOOP reproduction sound is not affected by the SHOT reproduction. The SHOT playback is, for example, one-time playback of a phrase, and the LOOP playback is, for example, LOOP playback (a plurality of playbacks) of a phrase.

  If the mute command between the SACs is mute setting for all the playback channels, the mute command is written to the SAC data corresponding to the SAC number without overwriting the subsequent SAC data so that mute is executed. register. Thus, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, it is possible to secure a period until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the mute command between SACs is not the mute setting of all the reproduction channels, the mute command of each reproduction channel is overwritten with the SAC data corresponding to the later-arrived SAC request so that mute is not executed. In this way, by performing or not performing the mute according to the situation, it is possible to ensure the promptness of the processing (the quickness due to the mute being overwritten) while utilizing the gaming sound effect by the mute. ing.

[10-10. Sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed)
Next, regarding the sound request control processing shown in FIG. 61, a variation of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed will be described. In this specification, five variations of the first to fifth embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90 as variations of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a first example of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a third embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a fourth embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume is adjusted. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a fifth example of the sound request control processing when the volume is adjusted.

(First embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 86, in the first embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data specified by the SAC number ( Step S1551). After that, it moves to step S1552. The SAC number is registered for each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

  In step S1552, the host control circuit 2100 specifies an output destination speaker based on the audio data specified by the SAC number, and proceeds to step S1553. In the first embodiment, information as to which speaker is to be output is incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number. The loudspeaker is, for example, a common loudspeaker used for general use (used for outputting a normal sound other than a specific sound) and a dedicated loudspeaker used for outputting a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.). Speaker (for example, a speaker for heavy bass). Note that the host control circuit 2100 sets which of the plurality of speakers is a dedicated speaker in various initialization processes (for example, various initialization processes (see step S1201) in FIG. 61).

  In step S1553, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S1553), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1554), and the process proceeds to step S1556. On the other hand, if the volume control is not performed by a hardware switch (NO in step S1553), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1555), and the process proceeds to step S1556.

  In step S1556, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1557.

  In step S1557, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. The specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound. In addition, information indicating that the output destination of the normal sound is the shared speaker and information indicating that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated speaker are included in the audio data instructed by the SAC number. I have.

  If it is determined in step S1558 that the volume control is not the specific sound volume control (NO in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1558). ), And proceed to step S1560. In the volume control in step S1558, control for changing the volume to a volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1557 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set for the channel (FIG. 13). (Step S1559), and it proceeds to step S1560. In the volume control in step S1559, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (ie, even if the volume change operation is performed, Is performed before and after the control is performed.

  In step S1560, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control has been performed for the number of channels (32 channels from 1CH to 32CH in the present embodiment).

  If the volume setting has been performed for the number of channels in step S1560 (YES in step S1560), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1561), and the sound request control process ends. I do.

  If the volume control for the number of channels has not been performed in step S1560 (NO in step S1560), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1557 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined YES in step S1560). Until this is done), the processing of steps S1557 to S1560 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 86, considering that the SAC number is specified for each channel, the volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S1561. good.

(Second embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 87, in the second embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S1571). After that, it moves to step S1572. The SAC number is registered for each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

  In the second embodiment, for example, a common channel used for general use (used for outputting a normal sound other than a specific sound) and a specific channel (error sound, warning sound, etc.) A dedicated channel used for output is provided. The host control circuit 2100 includes a dedicated channel (CH31, CH32) used for outputting a specific sound among a plurality of channels (1 to 32CH) and a shared channel (CH1) used for sounds other than the specific sound. To CH30) are set in various initialization processes (for example, various initialization processes (see step S1201) in FIG. 61).

  In step S1572, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by a hardware switch (YES in step S1572), the volume control is performed by a hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1573), and the process proceeds to step S1575. On the other hand, if the volume control is not performed by a hardware switch (NO in step S1572), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1574), and the process proceeds to step S1575.

  In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1576.

  In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the second embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

  If it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control is not the specific sound volume control (NO in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1577). ), And proceed to step S1578. In the volume control of step S1577, control for changing the volume to a volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (FIG. 13). Step S1579) and the routine goes to Step S1582. In the volume control of step S1579, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (ie, even if the volume change operation is performed, Is performed before and after the control is performed.

  In step S1578, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is on a reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the playback is on a playback channel (eg, CH31, CH32) that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1578), a fixed volume is designated (step S1580). If the playback is on a playback channel that receives volume adjustment (for example, CH1 to CH30) (NO in step S1578), a volume corresponding to the user volume is set (step S1581). When the processing in step S1580 ends or the processing in step S1581 ends, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1582.

  In step S1582, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control has been performed for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in the present embodiment).

  If the volume has been set for the number of channels in step S1632 (YES in step S1582), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1583), and the sound request control process ends. I do.

  If the volume control for the number of channels has not been performed in step S1582 (NO in step S1582), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1576, and performs the volume control for the number of channels (determined YES in step S1582). Until this is done), the processing of steps S1576 to S1582 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 87, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1583.

(Third embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data specified by the SAC number ( Step S1591). After that, it moves to step S1592.

  In step S1592, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S1592), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1593), and the process proceeds to step S1595. On the other hand, if the volume control is not performed by a hardware switch (NO in step S1592), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1594), and the process proceeds to step S1595.

  In step S1595, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1596.

  In step S1596, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the third embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

  If it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control is not the specific sound volume control (NO in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1597). ), And proceed to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1597, control is performed to change the volume to a volume according to the volume adjustment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control is for a specific sound (YES in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (FIG. 13). Step S1598) and the procedure moves to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1598, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, Is performed before and after the control is performed.

  In step S1599, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data (data being reproduced) currently on the reproduction channel is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data on the reproduction channel is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1599), a fixed volume is designated next time for the reproduction channel (step S1600). If the data in the reproduction channel is data to be subjected to volume adjustment (NO in step S1599), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set to the reproduction channel next time (step S1601). When the processing in step S1600 ends or the processing in step S1601 ends, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1602.

  In step S1602, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control has been performed for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in the present embodiment).

  If the volume setting for the number of channels has been performed in step S1602 (YES in step S1602), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1603), and the sound request control process ends. I do.

  If the volume control for the number of channels has not been performed in step S1602 (NO in step S1602), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1599, and performs the volume control for the number of channels (determined YES in step S1602). Until this is done), the processing of steps S1599 to S1602 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 88, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1603.

  In the third embodiment, in step S1599, it is determined whether or not the data currently being reproduced (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If YES, a constant volume is set for the next reproduction channel (step S1600), and if the decision result in step S1599 is NO, a volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set for the next reproduction channel. Instead, a modified example described below may be used. That is, in this modified example, as the process of the step following step S1597 and step S1598, the audio data set this time and the audio data already reproduced on the reproduction channel in which the audio data is set are used for volume adjustment. After performing the process of checking whether or not the data is not affected, the process of determining whether or not the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data is the same as the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data I do. When the setting of the volume adjustment of the current audio data is the same as the setting of the volume adjustment of the previous audio data, a process of determining whether or not the data is not affected by the volume adjustment is performed. If the volume adjustment setting of the current audio data is not the same as the volume adjustment setting of the previous audio data, the volume adjustment setting of the audio data set this time will not be affected by the volume adjustment The process proceeds to a process of determining whether the data is data. The process proceeds to a process of determining whether the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data is not affected by the volume adjustment, a process of setting a fixed volume to the reproduction channel is performed. If the data is affected by the volume adjustment, the reproduction channel is adjusted to the volume according to the volume adjustment. Perform processing to set the volume. Thereafter, it is preferable to proceed to a process of determining whether or not the number of channels has been set, as in step S1602. Note that, in this modification, the only processing different from the third embodiment is the above-described processing, and the other processing is the processing of the third embodiment (the processing of steps S1592 to S1598, the processing of step S1602, and the processing of step S1602 shown in FIG. 88). And the processing in step S1603).

(Fourth embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 89, in the fourth embodiment of the sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the SAC number is an SAC number affected by the volume adjustment. It is checked whether it is (step S1611). After that, it moves to step S1612.

  In step S1612, the host control circuit 2100 updates a flag indicating whether or not the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, and inputs audio data specified by the SAC number (step S1613). Specifically, if the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (if the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is OFF).

  In step S1614, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S1614), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1617. On the other hand, if the volume control is not performed by a hardware switch (NO in step S1614), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1616), and the process proceeds to step S1617.

  In step S1617, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1618.

  In step S1618, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the fourth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

  If it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control is not the specific sound volume control (NO in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1619). ), And proceed to step S1620. In the volume control of step S1619, control for changing the volume to a volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel (FIG. 13). Step S1622) and the process moves to step S1624. In the volume control in step S1622, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume change operation is performed, Is performed before and after the control is performed.

  In step S1620, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not playback is to be performed on a playback channel that is not affected by volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1612 whether the flag is set to ON. If the playback is on a playback channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1620), a fixed volume is designated for the playback channel (step S1621), and the flow advances to step S1624. If the reproduction is not performed on a reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1620), a volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set for the reproduction channel (step S1623), and the process proceeds to step S1624.

  In step S1624, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control has been performed for the number of channels (32 channels from 1CH to 32CH in the present embodiment).

  If the volume setting for the number of channels has been performed in step S1624 (YES in step S1624), the volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1625), and the sound request control process ends. I do.

  If the volume control for the number of channels has not been performed in step S1624 (NO in step S1624), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1618, and performs the volume control for the number of channels (determined YES in step S1624). Until this is done), the processing of steps S1618 to S1624 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 89, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1625.

(Fifth embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 90, in the fifth embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data specified by the SAC number ( Step S1631). After that, it moves to step S1632.

  The host control circuit 2100 checks whether or not the audio data is audio data for which each channel undergoes volume adjustment (step S1633). Specifically, if the audio data specified by the SAC number is the audio data affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (the audio data specified by the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment) If it is audio data, the flag is OFF).

  In step S1633, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S1633), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1634), and the process proceeds to step S1636. On the other hand, if the volume control is not performed by a hardware switch (NO in step S1633), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1636.

  In step S1636, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control during debugging (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13), and then proceeds to step S1637.

  In step S1637, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the fifth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

  If it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control is not the specific sound volume control (NO in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1638). ), And it moves to step S1639. In the volume control in step S1638, control for changing the volume to a volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set to the channel (FIG. 13). Step S1640) and the procedure moves to step S1643. In the volume control of step S1640, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (ie, even if the volume change operation is performed, Is performed before and after the operation is performed).

  In step S1639, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined whether or not the flag is set to ON in step S1632. If the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1639), a constant volume is set for the reproduction channel (step S1641). If the channel is affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1639), a volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set to the reproduction channel (step S1642). When the processing in step S1641 ends or the processing in step S1642 ends, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1643.

  In step S1643, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control has been performed for the number of channels (in this embodiment, 32 channels of 1CH to 32CH).

  If the volume has been set for the number of channels in step S1643 (YES in step S1643), volume control incorporated in the audio data specified by the SAC number is performed (step S1644), and the sound request control process ends. I do.

  If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1643 (NO in step S1643), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1637 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determines YES in step S1643). Until this is done), the processing of steps S1637 to S1643 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 90, it is preferable that the volume control for the number of channels is performed also in the process of step S1644.

  According to the sound request control processing in the case where the above-described volume adjustment is performed (the first to fifth embodiments), when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is output for the normal sound. In addition, it is possible to easily perform voice control such that a constant sound volume is output from a speaker even if volume adjustment is performed for a serious specific sound such as an error sound.

[10-11. LED brightness adjustment processing]
Next, the brightness adjustment of the LED will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is an attenuation table showing an example of the luminance attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to the light emission intensity of the strong / medium / weak LEDs. This attenuation table is stored in the sub main ROM 2050 (for example, see FIG. 10).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in three stages by, for example, an operation of a player or the like. Specifically, when a luminance adjustment operation is performed on a luminance setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs a switching process of the attenuation table shown in FIG. For example, when an operation of changing the brightness of the three levels from high to medium is performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of switching the reference table from high to medium in the attenuation table of FIG.

  The LED whose brightness can be adjusted by an operation of a player or the like may be, for example, an LED provided on the glass door 13 (see, for example, FIG. 2), or may be, for example, a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16. It may be. Note that the brightness adjustment of the LED is not limited to three stages, and may be configured to be adjusted in more stages, for example.

The output value of the LED is represented by the following equation (1).
LED output value = brightness value based on LED data × (100−brightness decay value) / 100 Equation (1)
The output value of the LED of the above formula (1) can be set for each LED reproduction channel. The parameter changed by the operation of the player is a luminance attenuation value. For example, if the luminance attenuation value is 0, the luminance is the strongest, and if the luminance attenuation value is 100, the luminance is the weakest and the light is turned off. The calculation of the output value of the LED is performed inside the sequencer 2260b (see FIG. 11).

  The LED data table defining the LED data and the reproduction pattern is created by creating a BLD file (LED animation) using tools such as ActiveLED (UE) and LEDMaker (UE), and adding information to the created BLD file. While converting with an LED list (Excel macro) (UE).

  By the way, in the case of the three primary color full-color LEDs, if the luminance attenuation values of red, green, and blue are uniformly set to the same value, the white balance may be lost, and for example, white light may become yellow. For example, when the brightness of the LED is reduced, the luminance attenuation value of blue needs to be maximized among red, green, and blue, and the luminance attenuation value of red is preferably minimized.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even when the brightness of the LED is changed by an operation of a player or the like, for example, the brightness attenuation value is set for each of the 1024 ports, so that the whiteness is reduced. The balance is maintained as much as possible.

  Specifically, when the brightness of the LED is adjusted to one of strong, medium, and weak by an operation of the player or the like, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 refers to the attenuation table of FIG. The luminance of the LED is controlled based on the luminance attenuation value set for each of green and blue. Since the attenuation table is prepared for, for example, 1024 ports (for each LED), an attenuation value can be set for each port.

  For example, when the brightness of the LED is set to be high by the operation of the player or the like, the sequencer 2260b of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 outputs the red brightness attenuation value 0, the green brightness attenuation value 5, and the blue brightness attenuation value 25. Is substituted into the above equation (1) to calculate the output value of the LED. Similarly, the sequencer 2260b of the audio / LED control circuit 2200 provides a red luminance attenuation value 50, a green luminance attenuation value 53, and a blue luminance attenuation value when the luminance of the LED is set to medium by a player or the like. When the luminance of the LED is set to a low value by an operation of a player or the like, the luminance attenuation values of the red luminance attenuation value 80, the green luminance attenuation value 81, and the blue luminance 85 are changed. The output value of the LED is calculated by substituting into the above equation (1). Then, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 controls the light emission of the LED based on the output value of the LED calculated as described above.

  As described above, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 calculates the output value of the LED based on the luminance attenuation value set corresponding to each of red, green, and blue, and based on the calculated output value of the LED. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to maintain the white balance as much as possible even if the brightness of the LED is changed by an operation of a player or the like.

[10-12. Accessory solenoid control processing]
Next, the accessory solenoid control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 61, 62, and 92. FIG. FIG. 92 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a connection state between an LED port, an LED, and a solenoid.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the movement of a movable body (gear) provided in a game area is diversified, and accordingly, the control of the movable body is complicated. Therefore, for simple movements among the various types of movement of the movable body, the members that make up the accessory in the solenoid are operated, and a mechanism that locks the accessory is provided to reduce the control load on the movable body. Is being planned. Upon receiving a motor operation request (accessory request), the motor driver that activates the accessory outputs the contents of the motor operation data in order. The output of the motor driver and the determination of the end of the motor operation are performed by a 1 msec timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. In the timer interruption process, the output determination and the termination determination (that is, the determination of the start and the termination) of the accessory motor are performed, and the synchronous control of the plurality of motors is also performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92, the voice / LED control circuit 2200 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a command from the host control circuit 2100, controls the LED on the frame side connected to each LED port. The LEDs on the board side (for example, the LEDs arranged on the game board unit 17 and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) are controlled to emit light via an LED driver. Of the LED ports (Port0 to Port23) controlled by the LED driver, the above-mentioned solenoid is connected to Port6, and the LEDs are connected to the other ports.

  The audio / LED control circuit 2200 receives an instruction from the host control circuit 2100 and executes light emission of the LED connected to each port of the frame-side LED and the board-side LED via the LED driver. By connecting a solenoid to the port 6, the operation of the solenoid can also be executed via the LED driver. Thus, even if the number of solenoids increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, it is possible to suppress the control load for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory. .

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 92, when the operation of the solenoid is performed via an LED driver, it is necessary to synchronously control the motor for operating the accessory and the operation of the solenoid. The operation of the accessory is performed by a 1 msec interrupt process including the synchronous control of a plurality of motors.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a control code is added to the accessory sequence table, and if it is desired to perform synchronous control of the solenoid and a plurality of motors for operating the accessory, a value greater than 0 is set to the control code. I try to set it. Then, in the processing of the main loop, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory being reproduced by the accessory device (see step S1204 in FIG. 61), and the acquired control code has a value greater than 0. In this case, control of the LED port (for example, Port 6 to which the above-described solenoid is connected) corresponding to the control code is executed (see step S1205 in FIG. 61). This makes it possible to execute synchronous control of the solenoid and a plurality of motors for operating the accessory.

  Note that the control of the LED port corresponding to the control code is performed in the main loop so as not to affect the normal LED control executed in the 1 msec interrupt process.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the solenoid is connected to some of the LED ports (Port0 to Port23), the above-described LED brightness adjustment is performed by, for example, an operation of a player or the like. Then, the voltage to the solenoid is also reset, but since the operation of the solenoid is only ON / OFF, it is considered that the effect on the solenoid is small. Further, when a synchronous effect for synchronizing the light emission of the LED and the operation of the solenoid is executed, it is possible to easily execute the synchronous effect.

[10-13. Data load processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a data load process is performed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) executed when the power is turned on. Further, data loading processing may be performed during a game. These data loading processes include data transfer from the ROM to the RAM and the buffer (for example, data transfer from the sub-main ROM 2050 to the SRAM 2100b, data transfer from the CGROM 2060 to the built-in VRAM 2370, etc. (for example, all refer to FIG. 10)). And a process of loading data stored in the ROM into the RAM and the buffer (data loading process).

  In the above data loading process, if the amount of data to be transferred is large, it takes time to load, and the watchdog may be reset and the data loading process may end. When a reset is applied to the watchdog, it is difficult to determine whether the cause of the reset is simply due to the large amount of data and time required, or the occurrence of an error during data loading. Further, when the data loading process has been completed, the host control circuit 2100 continues to wait for the loading completion without being able to determine whether the loading has been completed or has failed. Could be.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the time required for the data load processing exceeds a predetermined upper limit, the data load processing is terminated as an error and reloaded. Hereinafter, the data load processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a data load process executed by the host control circuit 2100 as one of various initialization processes.

As shown in FIG. 93, the host control circuit 2100 first sets the upper limit of the transfer time (step S1651). The transfer time is a time required for loading data from the ROM to the RAM. The upper limit of the transfer time varies depending on the amount of data to be transferred. In the present embodiment, the upper limit is determined by the following equation (2).
Upper limit of transfer time = (Transfer data amount per unit time) × (Estimated transfer time + α) Expression (2)
The transfer data amount per unit time and the estimated transfer time in the above equation (2) may be set in advance based on the transferred data amount, or may be set based on the transferred data amount, for example, the host control circuit 2100. May be calculated by Here, α is a time for providing a margin for data loading.

  Upon the processing in step S1651 ending, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1652 and starts loading data from ROM to RAM.

  After starting the data loading (step S1652), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the data loading has been completed (step S1653). If data loading has not been completed (NO in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1654. On the other hand, if data loading has been completed (YES in step S1653), host control circuit 2100 ends the data loading process.

  In step S1654, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the data transfer time has not exceeded the upper limit. If the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit (YES in step S1654), the watchdog timer is cleared at regular intervals (step S1655). On the other hand, if the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit (NO in step S1654), the host control circuit 2100 determines that an error has occurred, and executes error processing. The error process executed here is a process of resetting the load data by a watchdog reset without performing the watchdog timer clearing process (step S1656) and reloading. Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 returns to Step S1654. That is, when the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit (NO in step S1654), the data is reloaded as an error process.

  As described above, when performing the data loading process, the host control circuit 2100 keeps performing the clearing process of the watchdog timer at regular intervals during the waiting time for the loading completion so that the watchdog reset is not performed during the normal loading. I have to. However, when the data load processing exceeds a predetermined upper limit, the host control circuit 2100 resets and reloads the load data. As a result, even if a long time is required for the data load processing, the data is automatically restored by reloading.

[10-14. Sub random number processing]
Next, a sub random number process executed in the main loop by the host control circuit 2100 will be described.

  The sub random number process includes a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) when the power is turned on, a random number periodic update process executed periodically, and And a random number acquisition process executed when the random number is used. The sub-random number process is a process for random numbers used for determining, for example, an effect mode that does not affect the payout unlike the special symbol lottery by the main CPU 101 (for example, see FIG. 9) related to the payout. However, the sub random number processing described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. The above-described sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number initialization process executed by the host control circuit 2100 as one of various initialization processes. FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the random number periodic update process. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating an example of (a) a random number 1 acquisition process, (b) a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number 2 acquisition process, (c) a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number 3 acquisition process, and (d) a random number 4 acquisition process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the above. FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, four random numbers are used (random number 1 to random number 4), and the initialization processing for these four random numbers is performed as shown in FIG. Executed at the same timing.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the random number initialization processing, the host control circuit 2100 first obtains the RTC time (minute / second) (step S1671), and then enters a loop for the number of random numbers.

In the loop for the number of random numbers, the host control circuit 2100 first creates a random number SEED (step S1672). The generation of the random number SEED in the random number initialization processing is executed based on the following equation (3).
SEED (random numbers 1 to 4) = (RTC time (seconds) + (RTC time (minutes) × 60) + random number (random numbers 1 to 4)) × primary number at initial time Equation (3)

  After creating the random number SEED in step S1672, the host control circuit 2100 saves the random number SEED created in step S1672 in a random number backup, that is, in the SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1673). The random number SEED to be backed up here is the random number SEED created this time, but the information backed up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored.

  When the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of step S1672 and step S1673 for the number of random numbers (four random numbers 1 to 4 in the present embodiment), the host control circuit 2100 exits the loop for the number of random numbers and ends the random number initialization process.

  Thus, in the random number initialization processing, the minutes and seconds of the RTC time are used. Therefore, the random number SEED at the time of initialization involves the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds.

  Next, the random number regular update process will be described with reference to FIG. The random number periodic update process is a process of periodically updating the random numbers 1 to 4 even if none of the random numbers 1 to 4 is used in the bank flip end wait shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the random number regular update process, the host control circuit 2100 obtains the random number 1 (Step S1681), the random number 2 (Step S1682), the random number 3 (Step S1683), and the random number 4 The processing (step S1684) is performed in this order. Note that the random number regular update process is always executed while waiting for the end of the bank flip. Further, even when the bank flip end wait does not occur due to any processing failure in the main loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs the random number periodic update process once in one frame.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the random number 1 obtaining process, the random number 1 is updated (step S1885), that is, the random number 1 is updated after the random number 1 is obtained. Thereafter, the obtained random number 1 is stored in the random number 1 backup, that is, in the SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1686). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), in the random number 2 acquiring process, the random number 2 is updated (step S1687) and the random number 2 is backed up (step S1688). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), in the random number 3 acquiring process, the random number 3 is updated (step S1689) and the random number 3 is backed up (step S1690). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96 (d), the random number 4 acquiring process updates the random number 4 (step S1691) and backs up the random number 4 (step S1692). The random numbers backed up in step S1686, step S1688, step S1690, and step S1692 are the random numbers obtained this time, but the information backed up to the previous time may be deleted or may be continuously stored. .

  In addition, any of the random numbers 1 to 4 is obtained from random numbers generated within a range of 0 to 32767, but the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to this.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693). The random number 3 obtaining process is a process of obtaining a random number for use in determining a random number to be used among the random numbers 1, 2, and 4. After executing the random number 3 acquiring process in step S1693, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1694.

  In step S1694, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the remainder (hereinafter, simply referred to as “remainder”) obtained by dividing the random number obtained in the random number 3 obtaining process in step S1693 by 4 is 0 or 1. Is determined. If the remainder is 0 or 1 (YES in step S1694), random number 1 acquisition processing is performed (step S1695). On the other hand, if the remainder is neither 0 nor 1 (NO in step S1694), the process moves to step S1696.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of remainders is 2 in step S1696. If the remainder is two (YES in step S1696), random number 2 acquisition processing is performed (step S1697). On the other hand, if the remainder is not 2 (NO in step S1696), the process moves to step S1698.

  In step S1698, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the remainder is three. If the remainder is three (YES in step S1698), random number 4 acquisition processing is performed (step S1699). On the other hand, if the remainder number is not 3 (NO in step S1698), which means that the remainder number does not have any of 0 to 3, the process is repeated from step S1693.

  The random number 1 acquisition process (step S1695), random number 2 acquisition process (step S1697), random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693), and random number 4 acquisition process (step S1699) are all as shown in FIG. .

  As described above, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the selected random number among the random number 1, the random number 2, and the random number 4 is updated, but the update is not performed for the random number that is not selected. Not done.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, a random number initialization process is performed, and when a random number is used, a random number acquisition process is performed on the selected random number. Even when no wait occurs, the random number periodic update process is performed.

The calculation formula at the time of updating the random number is as shown in the following formula (4).
Current update value = (previous update value × prime number of each random number) +1 ... Equation (4)
Here, the return value of the random number acquisition process is a value of 0 to 32767 that is right-shifted back from 32 bits to 16 bits. That is, the current update value calculated based on the above equation (4) is represented by 32 bits, and the 32-bit current update value is shifted rightward from 32 bits to 16 bits. The 16th bit is masked, and the value indicated by 1 to 15 bits (any one of 0 to 32767) is determined as the current update value.

  By performing the above-described sub-random number process, the obtained random numbers can be made random, and the occurrence of bias in the obtained random numbers can be suppressed. In particular, since the time when the power is turned on is related to the unit of minutes and seconds for the random number SEED at the time of initialization, the initial value can be made different every time.

[10-14-1. Modified example of sub random number processing]
Although the sub-random number processing in the present embodiment has been described above, the sub-random number processing (modification) described below may be performed instead of or in combination with the above-described sub-random number processing. Further, the sub-random number processing (modification) described below may be applied to the random number processing executed by the main CPU 101. A modification of the sub-random number process will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for describing a modification of the sub-random number process. However, FIG. 98 shows only the processing necessary for the description, and omits other processing. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interruption process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 performs a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) (step S1701). In this random number initialization process, for example, a random number seed of a power of 2 (power number) and a current random number seed number are prepared, and a predetermined initial value is set in a stack pointer.

  After performing the random number initialization processing in step S1701, the host control circuit 2100 enters a main loop, performs input processing of a sub device (step S1702), and thereafter performs various request control processing (step S1703). In the various request control processing (step S1703), the request is output to various devices based on the request created in step S1705, which will be described later one frame before.

After performing the input processing of the sub device (step S1702) and the various request control processing (step S1703), the host control circuit 2100 performs a random number table creation processing (step S1704). In the random number table creation processing in step S1704, a new random number table is created by updating the random numbers registered in the random number table having a power-of-two size at the drawing timing. For obtaining the random numbers registered in the random number table, for example, a random number seed determined based on the current random number seed number among random number seeds of a power of 2 is used. For example, when 2 ³ (8) random number seeds a to h are prepared and the current random number seed number is 4, the random number seed d is used.

In step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 can create a random number table having a size of, for example, 2 ⁵ (32), and 32 random numbers are registered in the random number table. When the random number is registered in the random number table, the host control circuit 2100 updates the value of the random number seed. Updating of the random number seed is performed by multiplying the previously updated value × prime number and then adding 1 as in the above-described equation (4). In this modification, the size of the random number table may be a power of 2 (pieces), and 2 ⁵ (32) is used. However, any size may be used as long as it is a power of 2 (pieces). good.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the random number seed used for creating the random number table in step S1704 is, for example, the value of the CPU counter by the CPU processor of the host control circuit 2100 when a serial command is received (step S1801). It is updated using the information (step S1802). In the random number seed update processing in step S1802, the random number seed number is incremented, and the incremented random number seed number is used as the current random number seed number, thereby updating the random number seed used for creating the random number table.

  Returning to FIG. 98, when the random number table creation processing in step S1704 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 enters a packet reception loop.

  In the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process (step S1705) for creating a request for animation for producing a moving image, and performs a random number acquisition process when a random number is used (step S1706). Note that the request created in step S1705 is output in the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

  The host control circuit 2100 acquires a random number from the random number table created in step S1704 in the random number acquisition process in step S1706. The random number acquired here is used for a lottery related to the effect performed by the host control circuit 2100 (for example, a lottery for determining an animation for a moving image effect). When acquiring the random number from the random number table in step S1706, the host control circuit 2100 updates (increments) the reference position of the random number table. Note that the reference position of the random number table is only performed when a random number is obtained from the random number table, and is not performed in the random number table creation processing in step S1704.

  The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1705 and S1706 for the number of received packets. The host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop after performing the processing of steps S1705 and S1706 for the received packets.

  After exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs an animation update process (step S1707), and then waits for a bank flip / bank flip end (step S1708).

  The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly performs the processing of steps S1702 to S1708 in the main loop having a period of 33.3 msec.

  According to the above-described modification of the sub-random number process, even if there are a plurality of random number acquisition opportunities in the packet receiving loop, it is only necessary to change the reference position using the same created random number table and acquire a random number. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the control load of the host control circuit 2100 while giving the obtained random numbers irregularities.

[10-15. Other extension examples]
The present invention can be applied to all the gaming machines in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment performs a game using a game medium and a bonus is provided based on the result of the game. That is, a game is performed by a game medium being fired or inserted by the action of a physical player, and not only in a form in which the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also in the main control circuit 100 itself, The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game balls or a game performed without medals. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

  When managed by the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device includes a ROM and a RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game device (not shown). The medium handling device is connected to the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium insertion operation). Operation) or the winning of the role related to the payout of the game medium (the win is established), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, paying out the game medium to the player, and obtaining the required game medium) Operation) or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device displays not only the actual number of game media but also the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a function of allowing a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, there is a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In such a case, it is desirable that the player has such a capability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, unless through the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for receiving electronic money or the like from a portable terminal, other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on a game medium handling device side. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above-mentioned lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when ending the game, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange a prize, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another stand.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game media possessed by the player is transmitted. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalent may be discharged, or the storage medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game arcade can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

  Further, in a gaming machine or a game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown), a lock operation for locking game medium or valuable data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device can be executed. Is also good. At this time, information that can only be known to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging unit provided in the game medium handling device.

  In the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine has been described. However, the same applies to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, and an enclosed game machine. It is also possible to provide a game medium of the player.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can reduce the number of components, but also prevent the player from directly touching the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of gaming machines by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In addition, an enclosure-type gaming machine configured to be able to play without discharging the game medium to the outside, and data relating to the increase and decrease of the game medium due to the consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal through the game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

  The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and fires a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. Thereby, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of possessed balls is decremented by one. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is fired from above the game area, a so-called return ball (a foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

  In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, no upper plate or lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is provided. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game balls are not actually at hand of the player, and the game balls do not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a possessed ball by lending from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a possessed ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is fired from the launch device, the possessed ball is consumed, and the number of possessed balls is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings provided in the game area, payouts are made by the number according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of possessed balls increases. In addition, the number of possessed balls increases by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending, and paying out of game media" indicates that the consumption, lending, and paying out of the ball are performed. The “increase / decrease in game media” indicates that the number of possessed balls increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. The “data relating to the increase and decrease of game media associated with the consumption, lending, and payout of game media” is data relating to a decrease in possession balls due to the launch of game balls, and an increase in possession balls due to lending and payout.

  The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball by that is added to the number of possessed balls. When a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of possessed balls to the game medium management device by an operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and receives a request for conversion from a game value managed by the game medium management device to a possessed ball (ball lending) and counting (returning) of possessed balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data on the current number of balls held. Here, the “game value” refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into a possession ball by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like in a game hall where a gaming system is installed.

  Further, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, the detection of the opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed by the backup power supply. As a result, fraudulent acts can be prevented at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

  The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted / received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. When one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination receiving the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

  As described above, at the transmission source, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not falsified by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, It can be confirmed that it is being sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as falsification of a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. A demodulation unit for demodulation may be provided.

  Thereby, even if a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination receives an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

  This not only confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal, by comparing the transmitted signal with the confirmation signal. Therefore, the suppression of fraudulent activities can be further strengthened.

[10-16. Processing related to the operation of the character in the character group]
The processing related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group 1000 (an accessory constituting the accessory group 1000 (including an operating member constituting the accessory)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 107. Here, the accessory is a movable accessory that can be operated by driving various power sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and does not include a non-movable decorative accessory. The accessory is driven based on a control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100. The excitation data includes a step number (for example, when the power source is a stepping motor). The data is not limited to specific data as long as the data has a unit indicating the magnitude of the power such as the power and the excitation time.

  The processing related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group 1000 is roughly divided into an accessory initial operation process performed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on, and a sub-control main process performed by the host control circuit 2100 (or a sub-control main process). There is an accessory control process performed in various request control processes in the process). Hereinafter, the accessory initial operation process and the accessory control process will be sequentially described.

[10-16-1. Character Initial Operation Process]
First, with reference to FIG. 100, the accessory initial operation process performed by the host control circuit 2100 as one of various initialization processes (for example, see step S1201 in FIG. 61) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the accessory initial operation process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the number of operations of the motor used to operate the accessory, that is, the initial position restoration counter to “0” (step S1901).

  After the processing of step S1901, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory of the accessory group 1000 is at the initial position (step S1902). In the process of step S1902, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the accessory is in the initial position by detecting the presence of the accessory in the initial position. The determination is made based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not at the initial position (NO in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the number of operations is equal to or greater than a specified number (for example, 10), that is, the value of the initial position restoration counter is “10”. Is determined (step S1904).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the number of operations is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 performs an initial position moving operation (step S1906). This initial position moving operation is an operation of driving the motor to move the accessory to the initial position.

  After the process of step S1906, the host control circuit 2100 adds “1” to the number of motor operations, that is, the value of the initial position restoration counter (step S1907), and proceeds to step S1902. Therefore, as long as it is determined that the accessory is not at the initial position (NO in step S1902) until the number of times of operation of the motor reaches the specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to steps S1902, S1904, The initial position moving process of S1906 and step S1907 is repeatedly performed.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1904 that the number of operations is equal to or greater than the specified number (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position movement processing, and sets a transition to an error motor operation stop state. The processing is performed (step S1905). When the operation is shifted to the error motor operation stop state, the operation of all the accessories is stopped, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory initial operation process, and returns the process to the sub-control main process (for example, see FIG. 61).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the accessory is at the initial position (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1901, and determines whether the accessory is at the initial position for the next accessory. It is determined (step S1902). If the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the motors for operating the used accessory are at the initial position (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 performs a power-on process (step S1903), and performs the accessory initial operation process Is completed, and the process returns to the sub-control main process (for example, see FIG. 61).

  The power-on process in step S1903 is a process of performing an operation of moving the accessory to the maximum movable range and then moving the accessory to the initial position in order to check the operation of the accessory. In the power-on process in step S1903, the operation of moving the accessory to the maximum movable range and then moving the accessory to the initial position may be performed for all the accessories at the same time, or one or more accessories may be performed in order. It may be.

  In the power-on process in step S1903, that is, the process of moving the accessory to the maximum movable range and then performing the operation of moving the accessory to the initial position, it is sufficient that the operation of the accessory can be confirmed. When there is a driven accessory (for example, an accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage), the operation of the accessory is checked from the initial position to the first stage. Control may be performed so as to execute a first operation check for moving to the first stage and a second operation check for moving from the initial position to the first stage and then to the second stage.

  Also, for example, a first accessory that is driven stepwise (for example, a first accessory that moves from an initial position to a first stage, and then moves from a first stage to a second stage), and When there is a second accessory to be driven to a predetermined position, a first operation check in which the first accessory moves from the initial position to the first stage is performed as an operation check of the accessory, and then, A third operation confirmation that the second character moves from the initial position to the predetermined position is performed, and then a second operation confirmation that the first character moves from the first stage to the second stage is performed. May be. In this case, by performing the third operation check between the first operation check and the second operation check, it is possible to efficiently check the operation of a plurality of characters.

  As described above, in the accessory initial operation process, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory is at the initial position when the power is turned on. Is detected by an accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is to be determined whether or not it is at the initial position (step S1902). The processing (step S1903) is performed. Then, when there is an accessory that is not at the initial position (NO in step S1902), the initial position moving process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is repeated a specified number of times (for example, 10 times). Even if the initial position movement processing (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), if there is no accessory at the initial position (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 generates an error A transition setting process to the motor operation stop state is performed (step S1905). Thereby, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the motor for operating the accessory operates normally, and when the accessory is not at the initial position, the process of moving the accessory to the initial position is performed. Can be. In addition, if the accessory does not come to the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the state where the accessory cannot return to the initial position while avoiding shifting to the motor error operation stop state continues. By shifting to the motor error operation stop state, the occurrence of serious errors can be suppressed.

[10-16-2. Character control processing]
Next, the accessory control processing performed in step S210 in the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the accessory control process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current operation status is a command reception standby operation capable of receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, whether or not the command reception standby flag is ON). (Step S1911).

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is not in the standby operation for receiving the command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, the command reception standby flag is OFF) (NO in step S1911), the accessory control The processing is terminated and the processing shifts to the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation state is the standby operation for receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1911), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a command related to an effect has been received from the main control circuit 100. Is determined (step S1912). The commands related to the effect to be determined in this process are, for example, a special symbol change start command, a special symbol change stop command, a demo command, a change confirmation command, and a hit command related to a big hit. When received by the control circuit 2100, each accessory in the accessory group 1000 is driven.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command relating to the effect has not been received from the main control circuit 100 (NO in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process, and proceeds to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that a command related to an effect has been received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 performs an effect command reception process (step S1913). In this effect command receiving process, as shown in FIG. 102 described later, in response to a command relating to the effect received from the main control circuit 100, the change start command receiving accessory process (step S19133), the initial position restoring agent Each processing of the operation processing (step S19134), the processing of the accessory at the time of receiving the demo command (step S19136), the processing of the accessory at the time of receiving the change confirmation command (step S19138), and the processing of the accessory at the time of receiving the hit command (step S19139) are executed. Will be Details of each of these processes will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which each of the processes of step S19133, step S19136, step S19138, and step S19139 is performed in the accessory control process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be performed as an interrupt process upon receipt of the command, or may be performed immediately after the above-described command analysis process (see step S204 in FIG. 52).

  After executing the effect command receiving process (step S1913), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the reception permission for the accessory request has been set (step S1914).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the reception of the accessory request has not been set (NO in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process, and shifts the process to the sub-control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). .

  On the other hand, if the host control circuit 2100 determines that the reception permission of the accessory request has been set (YES in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 acquires the accessory request stored in the accessory request buffer in the animation construction processing of FIG. The processing is performed (step S1915).

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S1915, the host control circuit 2100 generates a request for effect control from the generation of the effect control request in order to synchronize the effect operation by each of the characters in the character group 1000 with the effect operation by the display device 16. After the lapse of two frames, the above-described accessory request acquisition process is executed.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 transmits the excitation data to the motor driver via the I2C controller 2610 based on the acquired accessory request (step S1916), and then sets the command reception standby flag to ON (step S1917). ). Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (Step S1918). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 may determine whether a communication error between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 or an error of the I2C controller 2610 has been detected (acquired or input).

  When determining that a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (YES in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 sets a communication controller error (step S1921). Then, after the processing in step S1921, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing, and shifts the processing to the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

  On the other hand, when determining that the communication error signal has not been received from the I2C controller 261 (NO in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the address of each motor driver can be accessed (step S1919).

  When determining that the address of each motor driver cannot be accessed (NO in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 sets a connection error (step S1922). Then, after the processing in step S1922, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing, and shifts the processing to the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

  When determining that the address of each motor driver can be accessed (YES in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the operation of each accessory (each motor) has been completed normally (step S1920).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the operation of each accessory (each motor) has been completed normally (YES in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control process, and proceeds to the sub-control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of each accessory (each motor) has not been completed normally (NO in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 sets a data error (step S1923). Then, after the processing of step S1923, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing, and shifts the processing to the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

[10-16-3. Processing at the time of production command reception]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a description will be given of the processing at the time of receiving the effect-related command performed in step S1913 in the accessory control processing (see FIG. 101). FIG. 102 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing at the time of receiving an effect command. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the effect-related command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  First, in step S 19131, the host control circuit 2100 sets the command reception standby flag to OFF. Then, the host control circuit 2100 executes each process according to the effect-related command received in step S1912. Specifically, if the command received in step S1912 is a change start command (YES in step S1932), the change start command reception accessory processing (step S19133) is executed. After that, the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position restoring accessory operation process (step S19134), and ends the process at the time of receiving the effect command.

  If the command received in step S1912 is a demo command (NO in step S1932 and YES in step S19135), a demo command reception accessory process (step S19136) is executed, and when an effect-related command is received. The process ends.

  If the command received in step S1912 is a change determination command (NO in both step S19132 and step S19135 and YES in step S19137), the change start command reception character processing (step S19138) is executed. Then, the processing at the time of receiving the production command is ended.

  Furthermore, if the command received in step S1912 is not any of the change confirmation command, the demonstration command, and the change confirmation command (NO in any of step S1932, step S19135, and step S19137), it is determined that a hit-related command has been received. Then, the hit-related command reception character processing (step S19139) is executed, and the effect-related command reception processing is ended. If the command received in step S1912 is not any of the change confirmation command, the demonstration command, and the change confirmation command, the command received in step S1912 is replaced with the hit command It may be configured to execute the hit command receiving accessory processing (step S19139) based on the determination that is.

  The above-mentioned change processing command reception accessory processing (step S19133), initial position restoration character operation processing (step S19134), demonstration command reception character processing (step S19136), and change start command reception character processing (step S19138). ) And the winning command processing at the time of receiving the hit command (step S19139) will be described below.

[10-16-4. Character processing when receiving a fluctuation start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the special symbol variation start command reception accessory processing performed in step S19133 in the effect command reception processing (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special character processing when a special symbol change start command is received. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the special symbol change start command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all of the bonuses (including the operating members constituting the bonus) in the bonus group 1000 are at the initial position (step S19141). In the process of step S19141, the host control circuit 2100 makes a determination based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects that each accessory is present at the initial position.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that all of the bonuses are at the initial position (YES in step S19141), the host control circuit 2100 sets permission to accept the bonus request (step S19142). When the acceptance of the accessory request is set, the control state of each accessory in the accessory group 1000 shifts from the command reception standby state to the accessory request acceptance permission state.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position restoration counter to “0” (Step S19143). Then, after the processing of step S19143, the host control circuit 2100 ends the change processing command reception accessory processing.

  On the other hand, in step S19141, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an accessory that is not at the initial position, that is, when one or more accessories are not at the initial position (NO in step S19141), the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position restoration counter to “ The processing of adding "1" is executed (step S19144).

  After executing the processing of step S19144, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the initial position restoration counter is equal to or more than a specified number (for example, 10 times) (step S19145).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position restoration counter is equal to or more than the specified number (YES in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to an error motor operation stop state (step S19146). When the operation is shifted to the error motor operation stop state, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing of step S19146, the host control circuit 2100 ends the change processing command reception accessory processing.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position restoration counter is not equal to or more than the specified number (NO in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 performs transition setting to the initial position restoration operation state (step S19147). In the initial position restoring operation state, an initial position restoring operation process described later is executed.

  As described above, in the variation processing at the time of receiving the change start command, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the bonuses are at the initial position at the time of receiving the change start command of the special symbol by the role detection sensor group 1002. (Step S19141) In the case where there is an accessory that is not at the initial position, the setting is made such that the reception of the accessory request is not permitted (prohibited) and the state is shifted to the initial position restoring operation state (step S19147). Then, when the number of processing of the variation starting command received at which the one or more bonuses are determined not to be at the initial position in step S19141 reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 returns to A transition has been made to the motor error operation stop state. That is, even if there is an accessory that is not at the initial position when the special symbol starts to change, the special symbol starts to change continuously for a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) under the situation that there is an accessory that is not at the initial position. Until the start, the setting for shifting to the initial position restoring operation state is performed, and after reaching the specified number of times, the setting for shifting to the error motor operation stop state is performed. For this reason, if there is an accessory that does not return to the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory that cannot return to the initial position while avoiding shifting to the motor error operation stop state is avoided. If it has continued, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-5. Initial position restoration accessory operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the initial position restoration accessory operation processing performed in step S19134 during the processing of the effect command reception (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initial position restoration accessory operation process. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the fact that the transition to the initial position restoring operation state has been set in step S19147 of the character processing at the time of receiving the change start command (see FIG. 103).

  First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether it is in the initial position restoring operation state, that is, whether the transition setting to the initial position restoring operation state is performed in step S19147 of the change start command reception accessory processing (see FIG. 103). It is determined whether or not it is (step S19151).

  If it is not in the initial position restoring operation state (NO in step S19151), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position restoring accessory operation process.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is in the initial position restoring operation state (YES in step S19151), the host object detection sensor group 1002 (more specifically, the accessory object detection sensor group 1002) determines whether or not the accessory is at the initial position. Among them, the accessory is detected by the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is to be determined whether or not it is at the initial position, and it is determined whether or not the accessory is at the initial position (step S19152).

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not at the initial position (YES in step S19152), the host control circuit 2100 executes an initial position moving operation process (step S19153). The initial position moving operation process is a process of driving the motor to return the accessory to the initial position.

  The processes in steps S19152 and S19153 are performed for the number of motors that drive the accessory.

  On the other hand, if the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is at the initial position (NO in step S19152), the host control circuit 2100 does not perform the processing of step S19153 and determines whether the next accessory is at the initial position. It moves to (step S19152).

  When the host control circuit 2100 performs the processing of step S19152 and / or step S19153 for the number of motors for driving the accessory, the initial position restoration accessory operation processing ends.

[10-16-6. Character processing when receiving demo command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a description will be given of the demo command receiving character processing performed in step S19136 in the rendering command receiving processing (see FIG. 102). FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing of the accessory when receiving a demo command. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the demo command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a failure of the motor for driving the accessory has been detected (step S19161). In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 generates various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processing after step S1918 in the accessory control processing (see FIG. 101). Is determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, that no error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory has been detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19161), the accessory excitation is performed. Release processing is performed (step S19162). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 stops outputting excitation data to all motor drivers.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the bonuses are at the initial position (step S19163).

  When it is determined that all of the bonuses are at the initial position (YES in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 sets acceptance of a bonus request (step S19164). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more characters are not at the initial position (NO in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 ends the demonstration command reception-purpose character processing.

  On the other hand, if the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S19161 that there is a motor error, that is, that an error due to a failure of the motor for driving the accessory has been detected (NO in step S19161), the host control circuit 2100 does not accept the accessory request. The permission is set (step S19165).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 stops all the motors (step S19166), performs the motor driver reset process (step S19167) after the process of step S19166, and ends the demo command reception accessory processing.

  As described above, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the demo command, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check of the motor driver for driving the accessory (step S19161). Is prohibited (step S19165), and the motor driver is reset (step S19167). If no error is detected, after performing a release process (step S19162) for releasing all excitation of the accessory, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 determines whether or not all the accessories are at the initial position. When the detection is made (step S19163), and all the bonuses are at the initial position, the reception of the bonus request is permitted.

[10-16-7. Character processing when receiving the fluctuation confirmation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a description will be given of the special symbol change confirmation command reception accessory processing performed in step S19138 in the effect system command reception processing (see FIG. 102). FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the special character processing when a special symbol change confirmation command is received. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the special symbol change confirmation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a failure of a motor for driving the accessory has been detected (step S19171). In this process, similarly to step S19161 (see FIG. 105), the host control circuit 2100, for example, performs various types of errors (communication controller errors, communication controller errors, etc.) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101). It is determined whether a connection error or a data error) has occurred.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, no error due to a failure of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19171), the host control circuit 2100 determines the number of continuous errors. The indicated continuous error counter is set to "0" (step S19172).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the bonuses are at the initial position (Step S19173).

  When it is determined that all of the bonuses are at the initial position (YES in step S19173), host control circuit 2100 sets acceptance of a bonus request (step S19174). On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one accessory is not at the initial position (NO in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory processing at the time of receiving the change confirmation command.

  On the other hand, in step S19171, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, that an error due to a failure of the motor for driving the accessory has been detected (NO in step S19171), control to stop all motors is performed. Is executed (step S19175).

  After the processing of step S19175, the host control circuit 2100 performs a motor driver reset processing (step S19176), and adds 1 to the number of continuous errors, that is, adds “1” to the value of the continuous error counter (step S19177).

  After the processing in step S19177, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or more than a specified number (for example, 10 times) (step S19178).

  If the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or more than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19179). When the operation is shifted to the error motor operation stop state, the operation of all the accessories is stopped. After the processing in step S19179, the host control circuit 2100 ends the change processing command reception accessory processing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous error counter is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs a transition setting process to the accessory request acceptance non-permission state (step S19180). .

  Note that the number of continuous errors, that is, the value of the continuous error counter indicates the number of times that the character processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19171).

  As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the error check of the motor driver for driving the accessory in the variation processing command reception processing when receiving the variation determination command (step S19171). Is performed (step S19176), and the reception of the accessory request is prohibited (step S19180). Then, when the number of times of the change-of-variable-command receiving character processing determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19161) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10), the host control circuit 2100 turns off the error motor operation. Is performed (step S19179), and the operation of all the specialty items is stopped. Also, when it is determined that there is no motor error (YES in step S19171), the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the bonuses are at the initial position by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19173). When the accessory is at the initial position, the reception of the accessory request is permitted (step S19174). Therefore, when it is determined that a motor error has occurred due to a minor trouble (error), the motor error continues while the request for the accessory request is not permitted and the shift to the motor error operation stop state is avoided. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

  Note that the above-described initial position restoring operation transition setting in step S19147 (see FIG. 103) corresponds to the first restoring process of the present invention, and the motor driver reset process in step S19176 (see FIG. 106) corresponds to the second restoring process of the present invention. This corresponds to the recovery processing. However, the first restoration process may be various operations other than the initial position restoration operation transition setting, such as a motor error cancellation, a restoration operation of moving the accessory from the standby position to the driving position, and the like. Similarly, in the second recovery processing, in addition to the motor driver reset processing, the processing in the sub-control circuit 200 is executed again, parameters are set again for the operation of the motor, and the same as in the first recovery processing. Various processes such as controlling may be performed.

  Further, the processing of step S19144 described above corresponds to the first counting means of the present invention, and the processing of step S19177 corresponds to the second counting means of the present invention. Strictly speaking, neither the first counting means nor the second counting means counts the number of games. However, the first restoration process can be performed each time a change start command is received, and the second restoration process can be performed each time a change confirmation command is received. Therefore, although the first counting means and the second counting means do not strictly count the number of games as described above, they may actually count the number of games (the number of fluctuations). it can.

  In addition, the first counting means need not be a continuous number of games (the number of fluctuations) as long as the initial position restoration counter is reset only when the power is turned off. It can be expressed as "the number of games played in which there was no accessory at the initial position until the game was cut off." Further, if the initial position restoration counter is reset by, for example, the presence of the accessory in the initial position, the number of times that the variation in which the accessory does not exist in the initial position continuously occurs is determined by the first counting means. In some cases, the counted number becomes the same value. Further, since the above-mentioned second counting means is the number of times a motor error has occurred continuously, the value may be substantially the same as the number of games (the number of fluctuations) in which a motor error has occurred continuously. If the power is turned off between the start of the change of the special symbol and the end of the change, and then the power is restored, the count value of the first counting means and the count value of the second counting means are reset during the change of the special symbol. Is done. Therefore, in such a case, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives the change confirmation command indicating the end of the change of the special symbol, the count value of the first counting means is changed to 0, and the count value of the second counting means is changed to 1. Therefore, there is a possibility that a difference occurs between the count value of the first counting unit and the count value of the second counting unit. Considering this way, the count value counted by the first counting means and the second counting means can be expressed as the number of games, and the first counting means is simply the number of games in which the special symbol is changed. The same is true, and the second counting means can be expressed as being the same as the number of changes in the special symbol. However, the count value of the first counting means and the count value of the second counting means are not reset merely by turning on / off the power. For example, a reset button (not shown) provided on the main control board 30 ) And power operation (power-on operation or power-off operation) while operating other operation means such as operation means (setting key 328 and setting switch 332) related to setting, setting confirmation processing and / or setting The reset may be performed only when the change processing is performed.

  It should be noted that the number of games (the number of changes) may be defined as one game (one symbol change) being performed at the start of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) variable display. It may be defined that one game is performed at the end of the special symbol change display (when the result of the special lottery is derived), or after the special symbol change display is started, All until the end of the fluctuation display may be defined as one game.

[10-16-8. Character processing when receiving a hit command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the hit command-receiving character processing performed in step S19139 during the processing of the effect command reception (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning accessory processing at the time of receiving a hit command. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the hit command transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The hit-related commands correspond to, for example, a shift command to a big hit game state (a big hit game start command), a round game start command, a round game command (for example, an interval time), a big hit game state end command, and the like.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the bonuses are at the initial position (step S19181).

  When it is determined that all of the bonuses are at the initial position (YES in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 sets permission for accepting the bonus request (step S19182). On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one accessory is not at the initial position (NO in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 terminates the accessory processing at the time of receiving the hit command.

  As described above, in the hit command processing at the time of receiving the hit command, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the hits are at the initial position by the hit detection sensor group 1002 (step S19181). If it is at the initial position, the reception of the accessory request is permitted (step S19182), and if it is determined that one or more of the accessories is not at the initial position, the hit request is not received without permitting the reception of the request. At the time of command reception, the character processing is terminated.

  Note that throughout the processing related to the movement of the character in the character group, it is determined whether or not the number of operations in step S1904 (see FIG. 100) is equal to or greater than a specified number (for example, 10), and step S19145 (see FIG. 103) is determined to be greater than or equal to a prescribed number (for example, 10), and whether the value of the continuous error counter in step S1968 (see FIG. 105) is greater than or equal to a prescribed number (for example, 10). In each of the determinations, the specified number of times is set to the same number of times (10 times). However, it is needless to say that the specified number of times may be different in each process.

  If the error continues in the accessory initial operation process (see FIG. 101), the variation process command when receiving the variation process command (see FIG. 103), and the variation determination command when the role process process (see FIG. 106), if the error continues, the motor Although it has been described that the occurrence of the serious error can be suppressed by shifting to the error operation stop state, the following errors can be exemplified as the occurrence of the serious error.

  For example, a predetermined accessory (including an operating member constituting an accessory) is provided so as to be able to operate from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum movable range). The predetermined accessory is operated by, for example, a motor. When the predetermined accessory is present at a specific position, the predetermined accessory is locked by a lock member (for example, a solenoid). The lock member is located at a lock position for locking a predetermined accessory in a normal state (for example, when power is not supplied), and normally operates to the unlock position to unlock the predetermined accessory. Energization of the lock member is performed by, for example, the host control circuit 2100 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 (both refer to FIG. 10). Then, the host control circuit 2100 energizes the lock member when the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position to the specified position, and operates the predetermined accessory from the specific position toward the specified position. The power supply to the lock member is terminated after the start. That is, after the predetermined accessory moves toward the prescribed position, the lock member is in the lock position when returning to the specific position, and is locked when the predetermined accessory is pushed into the specific position. . In such a configuration, when a motor error occurs (for example, an error in which a motor drive command to the motor driver cannot be transmitted due to a communication error), the motor cannot be driven. On the other hand, although the lock member is energized, the predetermined accessory does not start operating toward the specified position. Therefore, the energization state of the lock member continues (the lock member continues to stay at the unlocked position), and the lock member may be disconnected due to an overcurrent. Therefore, when such an error occurs, it is not set to stop the error motor operation until the error reaches the specified number of times, but if such an error continues to occur the specified number of times, the error motor operation is stopped. By setting the transition to, the motor error operation stop state will not be transferred if only a minor error has occurred, but if the error has occurred continuously for the specified number of times, the motor error operation stop state will be set. Serious errors such as disconnection of the lock member due to overcurrent can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the effect command reception processing (step S1913) is executed in accordance with the received effect command, and thereafter, The processing (step S1914) for determining whether the transfer permission of the accessory request is set is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the command reception standby operation is being performed between step S1913 and step S1914. A process of determining whether or not the process is performed (hereinafter, this process is referred to as “command reception standby operation determination process”) may be performed. The processing method in this case may be any of the following first to third processing methods.

The first processing method is control for shifting from the status during the command reception waiting operation to any one of the status of permission of reception of a request for an accessory, stop of operation of an error motor, operation of restoring an initial position, and rejection of reception of an accessory request. This is a processing method by the host control circuit 2100 in the case, and the processing is executed in the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not a command reception standby operation is being performed (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) If a command reception standby operation is being performed (equivalent to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the change start command, the demo command, the change determination command, and the hit command has been received. I do.
(C) When an effect-related command is received from the main control circuit 100 (equivalent to YES in step S1912), a change start command reception character processing, a demo command reception time character processing, and a change determination are set according to the received command. Executes the character processing at the time of command reception or the character processing at the time of hitting command reception. After shifting to one of the statuses, a command reception standby operation determination process (not shown) is executed. In addition, as a result of performing the initial position restoring action operation process, when all the occasions have been restored to the initial position, the control is performed during the command reception waiting operation.
(D) If it is determined in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown) that the command reception standby operation is being performed, the process of step S1912 is performed in a state where all the characters are at the initial position, so that another command is executed. It may be determined whether or not a change start command has been received, or whether a next change start command has been received, or, for example, during one change (with one change start command) based on the currently received change start command. The process of step S1912 may be executed ten times.
(E) If NO is determined in the process of step S1914 (the process of determining whether or not the passing of the accessory request is set) executed after the command reception standby operation determining process (not shown), the error motor If the operation is stopped, the motor is stopped until the power is turned off. In addition, if the reception of the accessory is not permitted, the accessory is not activated, but when a change start command or the like is received, it is determined whether or not all the accessories are at the initial position, and the request for the accessory is received. The state may be controlled to the permission state.

In the second processing method, as a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, a state in which an effect-related command (a fluctuation start command, a demo command, a fluctuation determination command, a hit command) is not received is set to a command reception standby operation. The processing method is performed in the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not a command reception standby operation is being performed (corresponding to the process of step S1911).
(B) If a command reception standby operation is being performed (equivalent to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any of the change start command, the demo command, the change determination command, and the hit command has been received. I do.
(C) When an effect-related command is received from the main control circuit 100 (equivalent to YES in step S1912), the status shifts from the status of waiting for command reception to the status of non-waiting operation for command reception.
(D) In response to the received effect-related command, the change processing command reception character processing, the demonstration command reception character processing, the fluctuation confirmation command reception character processing, or the hit command reception reception character processing are executed.
(E) If none of the character processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command, the character processing at the time of receiving the demo command, the character processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, and the character processing at the time of receiving the hit command, the command is received. Return to waiting status. If at least one of the following processing is performed when the variation start command is received, the demo command is received, the fluctuation confirmation command is received, and the hit command is received, the command is executed. Since the status is shifted to a status other than waiting for reception, NO is determined in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown).

  The third processing method is based on the premise that a plurality of types of commands are received as effect-related commands. For example, depending on the type of the received command, a variation start command reception character processing, a demonstration command reception character processing, This is a processing method for looping the variation processing when the command is received and when the winning command is received. The command reception standby operation is canceled when the processing of the role of the character at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command, the processing of the character at the time of receiving the demo command, the processing of the character at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, and the processing of the character at the time of receiving the hit command are eliminated. If so, the above-described looping process may be performed when YES is determined in the command reception standby operation determining process (not shown).

[10-17. Hole menu task processing]
Next, processing related to the hole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. The whole menu task is a task for controlling the whole menu. The hole menu task is performed by the host control circuit 2100 at a predetermined period, in this embodiment, every 33 msec.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the hole menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (step S301). Specifically, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a setting operation command (a setting change start command, a setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change processing is being performed or the setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, that the host control circuit 2100 has received the setting operation command (YES in step S301), it executes the hole menu display processing in step S302. The hole menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying a later-described hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300. The hole menu screen is also displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the processing in step S312 described below is executed. The hole menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hole menu screen displayed in step S312 are displayed. There is a difference from the screen, which will be described later.

  An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hall menu display processing of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu display processing in step S302 is performed. FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 are diagrams illustrating an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu display processing of step S302 is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, when the hole menu display processing (step S302) is performed, a hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. As shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the hole menu screen includes a hole menu item display area 1610 on the left side of the screen, an operation description area 1620 substantially at the center in the horizontal direction below the screen, and a preview arranged substantially at the center of the screen. And a display area 1630.

  Each item of the hole menu is displayed in the hole menu item display area 1610. In FIG. 109 to FIG. 111, for convenience, only the time setting, the prize ball information, the setting history / setting confirmation history, the error information history, the monitoring history, and the warning display setting are shown as the hole menu items. In addition to the above, items such as a notification setting, a power saving setting (power saving mode), a maintenance, an accessory operation check, a liquid crystal brightness setting, a liquid crystal check, and a volume adjustment setting may be displayed. However, since the step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, the display of the hole menu screen is terminated and it is not possible to return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item of the end of the hall menu among the items of the hall menu.

  In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hole menu screen, the enabled operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguished from each other. For example, in FIGS. 109 to 111, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664 a and 664 b are activated), and the invalidated operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

  By operating the activated select button (up / down select button 664a, 664b) by the operator, any one of a plurality of hole menu items can be selected. In FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, the hole menu item surrounded by a solid line is the selected hole menu item. For example, FIG. 109 shows that “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. FIG. 111 shows that “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by a solid line is selected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item. However, it is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the operator can easily grasp the selected item. The screen on which the item of the time setting is selected (see FIGS. 109 and 110) is the initial screen of the hole menu screen.

  In preview display area 1630, a preview screen for an item selected from a plurality of hole menu items is displayed. For example, when the item “time setting” is selected, a time setting screen is preview-displayed (see FIGS. 109 and 110), and when the item “setting change / confirmation history” is selected, the setting The change / confirmation history screen is preview-displayed (see FIG. 111). However, it is preferable that the setting values are not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Note that no operation can be performed within the preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is displayed as a preview, the operation for setting the time cannot be performed on the time setting screen displayed as the preview, and the time setting displayed as the hole menu item is selected and determined. An operation for setting the time can be performed on the time setting screen displayed by.

  In addition, the host control circuit 2100 displays, in the display area of the display device 16, a “setting is being changed” or “setting changed” in a minimal area at the lower right, for example, so as not to disturb the operation on the hall menu screen. Confirming. " At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the speaker 24 to output a sound such as “setting is being changed” or “setting is being checked” via the sound / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes a control for fully turning on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the audio / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). In this way, the operator is made aware of whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without obstructing the operation on the hall menu screen.

  Next, returning to FIG. 108, in step S303, the host control circuit 2100 executes a whole menu process. Details of the hall menu processing (step S303) will be described later.

  After executing the hole menu processing (step S303), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing has been completed, that is, a command (initialization command) indicating that the setting change processing has been completed or It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed (power interruption recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power interruption recovery command has been received (NO in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 continues to execute the hole menu processing in step S303.

  When transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the host control circuit 2100 at the same timing as the command.

  The changed setting value information need not always be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at a different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

  When transmitting the power interruption recovery command, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the set value information to the host control circuit 2100 because the set value has not been changed, but the main CPU 101 also transmits the set value information to the host control circuit 2100. May be transmitted.

  When the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing ends in step S304, that is, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the initialization command or the power-off recovery command from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 stores the setting command or the power-off recovery command in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is determined whether or not the number of histories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number N (step S305). This is because the history is recorded while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately determining whether to overwrite data or write data to a free area according to the number of histories stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. This prevents a situation in which recording cannot be performed when desired. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, but is set to, for example, 500 in the present embodiment.

  If the number of histories of the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, where the history information is overwritten (step S306). In the history information overwriting process in step S306, the history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is overwritten in order from the history stored first (the oldest history information). Note that the above-mentioned history information also includes history information of the error motor operation stop state, history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting, and history information of rejection of the reception of the accessory request. The history information of the error motor operation stop state is the date and time information and the error motor operation stop state set to shift to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146 in FIG. 103 and step S19179 in FIG. 106) (FIGS. 108 and 114). And the date and time information of step S311). The history information of the initial position restoring operation shift setting is date and time information on the initial position moving operation (step S1906 in FIG. 100) and the initial position restoring operation shift setting (step S19147 in FIG. 103). The history information of the non-permission of the accessory request is, for example, information on the date and time when the accessory request was rejected (step S19165 in FIG. 105 and step S19180 in FIG. 106). However, the release of the error motor operation stop state is strictly performed in step S311 described later. However, since the process in step S311 is always performed when the state is changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the date and time information when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled is regarded as the date and time when the error motor operation stop state is released. Should be overwritten.

  In the above description, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting, and the history information of the refusal of accepting the accessory request are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in step S306 or step S307. However, when “error information history” is selected in the hole menu processing of step S302 (YES in step S3008 of FIG. 115), the error information history screen is displayed on the display device 16 (see FIG. 116). From a viewpoint, between step S301 and step S302, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position restoring operation transition setting, and the history information of the refusal of accepting the request for the accessory are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. It is preferable to carry out a process for causing the above.

  In addition, as described above, by allowing the user to view the history information of the initial position restoration operation transition setting and the history information of refusal of accepting the request for the accessory, although the serious error such as the error motor operation stop has not been reached, The gaming machine manager can grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as the stoppage of the error motor operation, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be appropriately managed.

  In the history information overwriting process in step S306, the history information already stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is overwritten with new history information, so that the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is consequently changed. Although it is made to be erased, it is not limited to this. For example, when the initialization command or the power-off recovery command is received, if new history information is likely to exceed a predetermined upper limit when stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, at least the history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be used. The history information may be stored after a part of the history information is deleted. Even if an initialization command or a power-off recovery command has not been received, when there is a possibility that exceeding the upper limit when storing more history information in the sub-work RAM 2100a, the setting history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a may be deleted. At least a part may be deleted.

  If the number of histories stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S307, and records the history information in an empty area of the sub-work RAM 2100a. The recording process (step S307) is executed. Note that the history information recorded in step S307 also includes history information on the error motor operation stop state.

  In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and the history information recording process in step S307 may be collectively referred to as a history recording process.

  Note that the history information is the time information measured by the RTC 209 when receiving the initialization command or the power-off recovery command from the main CPU 101, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed, or the setting confirmation information). (Information indicating that the processing has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, information on the time when the initialization command is received, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101 Is the history information. When the power interruption recovery command is received, the time information when the power interruption recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are associated with each other. The attached information is history information. When the power-off recovery command is received, it is not essential that the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 is included in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 to execute the above-described setting determination processing. It is preferable to include the current setting value information in the history information. The browsing history is also included in the history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history has been browsed in the hole menu processing (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in a free area of the sub work RAM 2100a.

  In a normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, a power-off reset command, a setting operation command, or the like) is transmitted from the main CPU 101 immediately after the host control circuit 2100 is activated. However, when a command from the main CPU 101 is not received within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after activation, the host control circuit 2100 determines that an abnormality has occurred, and sets the sub control circuit 200 to a game stop state. The display output, audio output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 will be described later.

  It is preferable that the time information, which is one of the pieces of history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, store not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour and minute and second.

  After executing the processing in step S306 or S307, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S308.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting has been changed in step S308, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is a setting change start command, no power interruption recovery command is received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is a setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. In the process of step S308, the host control circuit 2100 only needs to be able to determine that the setting has been changed. Therefore, instead of determining whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the set value information.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 performs a setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the error motor operation is stopped (step S310). That is, if the processing of step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179 (see FIG. 106) has been performed, it is determined that the error motor operation is stopped.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the error motor operation is stopped (YES in step S310), the host control circuit 2100 releases the error motor operation stop state (step S311). When the error motor operation stop state is released, the operation for all the specialty objects becomes possible.

  On the other hand, if the error motor operation is not stopped (NO in step S310), it is determined whether or not the accessory request is not permitted (step S322), and if the accessory request is not permitted (YES in step S322). ), Release of non-permission of the accessory request, reset of the initial position restoration counter, and reset of the number of continuous errors (step S323), and proceed to step S312. If the accessory request is not permitted (NO in step S322), the process proceeds to step S312 without performing the process in step S322.

  The release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is performed regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting may be canceled when the change processing is performed, and may not be canceled when the setting confirmation processing is performed.

  As described above, when the setting change processing is performed, the backup clear processing is also performed. However, the release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is performed when the setting change processing is performed, while the setting is canceled. It is preferable that the backup clearing process that is not accompanied by the change process (for example, the backup clearing process performed when the determination is NO in step S22 in FIG. 33) is performed. The effect using the role group is an important element for enhancing the game entertainment, so if the game is played on a gaming machine in which the role cannot normally operate, the decrease in the entertainment is inevitable. For this reason, important decisions such as whether or not to operate a gaming machine in which the accessory cannot operate can be made by an authorized hall-related person, so that an unauthorized person cannot cancel the error motor operation stop state. I have to. However, when a serious error such as an error motor operation stop state has not been reached, as in the case of releasing the non-permission of a request for an accessory, resetting the initial position restoration counter, and resetting the number of continuous errors (step S323), convenience is obtained. In view of the above, it is preferable that the processing is executed not only when the setting change processing is performed but also when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is performed.

  In step S312, the host control circuit 2100 executes a whole menu redisplay process. At this time, the redisplayed hole menu screen is different from the hole menu screen displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302), and the setting change process ends and the game This is a screen displayed in an executable state (or during the game return processing in step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 112, one of the items of the hole menu displays an item of the end of the hole menu. Is done. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay processing in step S312 is performed.

  That is, in the hole menu screen displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302), the display of the hole menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's intention, but the setting change processing is performed. The hole menu screen re-displayed after the completion of the processing (the hole menu screen displayed in step S312) is configured so that the display of the hole menu screen can be ended by the operator's intention. The hole menu screen displayed in step S302 (for example, see FIG. 110) and the hole menu screen displayed in step S312 (see FIG. 112) can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, a function for browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S308 that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S312. For example, a character such as “Setting has been changed” is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to disturb the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when a screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, similarly, the "change of setting" Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the audio / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) to output a sound such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized” from the speaker 24. I do. This allows the operator to know that the setting has been changed (and that the backup clear processing has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. Becomes Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the audio / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is a power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the host control circuit 2100 The game screen return processing of step S317 is executed without executing the processing of steps S309 to S316. Therefore, when the setting confirmation processing ends, the hall menu redisplay processing (step S312) is not executed. Further, no character indicating that the setting check has been completed is not displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Further, no sound indicating that the setting check has been completed is not output. However, the host control circuit 2100 controls the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) to be fully lit in red via the audio / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

  By the way, when the process of step S302 is performed and the process of step S312 is performed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, but the process of step S302 is performed. At this time, the game cannot be executed because the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. On the other hand, when the process of step S312 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters in the display area of the display device 16 (not displayed when the setting check is completed) is performed when the processing in step S302 is performed and when the processing in step S312 is performed. The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are greatly different. Therefore, even if the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the operation on the screen of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, The pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily recognize from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state in which it is possible to execute a game or in a state in which it is not possible, without obstructing a selection operation, an operation for updating a page, and the like. It has become possible.

  After executing the processing in step S312, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S313 and executes the whole menu processing. The hole menu processing in step S313 is basically the same as the processing in step S303, except that the processing in the case of YES in step S3072 in FIG. 118 described later is different, and this will be described later.

  In step S314, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “end of the hole menu” is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. If it is determined that “end the hall menu” is selected (YES in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 performs a game screen return display process (step S317). In this game screen return display processing, the host control circuit 2100 operates the display image of the staging display and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the launch handle 32) in the display area of the display device 16 for a predetermined period of time. Displays the initial video that is displayed when there is no video. Then, after executing the game screen return processing of step S317, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S314 that “Hole menu end” has not been selected (NO in step S314), host control circuit 2100 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed (step S314). Step S315). Although not shown in FIG. 108, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304), the hole menu redisplay processing (step S312) is performed, and the hole menu processing (step S313) is performed. In step S315, when any one of the hole menu items is selected, for example, when the operator has performed some operation, the timer has started counting, and the process in step S315 determines whether the predetermined time has elapsed. This is a process of determining whether or not the host control circuit 2100 determines YES if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or more.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S315), the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen is terminated, and the game screen return display in step S317 is performed. Execute the process.

  If the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S315), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S315). S316). The command for generating the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed, such as a symbol change start command, a symbol change confirmation (change stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game. , A round interval command in the big hit game, a big hit game end command, an initialization command, a power interruption return command, and the like. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S316 that any of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen ends, and the game screen in step S317 Execute the return display process. As a result, a game screen in accordance with the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed on the display area of the display device 16, and for example, an image irrelevant to the game is displayed despite the progress of the game by the main CPU 101. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the process returns to step S313.

  After executing the game screen return display processing (step S317), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S318, and executes the hall menu display prohibition processing. The hole menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hole menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the display device 16. That is, when the hole menu display prohibition process (step S318) is executed, even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, the hole menu screen is not displayed, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless it is performed, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

  As described above, the hole menu screen is a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 while the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed in principle. However, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing ends, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the item of “hole menu end” on the hall menu screen (NO in step S314), Under certain conditions, such as that the operation time does not elapse a predetermined time (NO in step S315) and that a command for generating an effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the processing of steps S313 to S316 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the hole menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is performed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. Thus, even when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. In addition, even if the operator forgets to select "end the hole menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item ends and the game is terminated. Since the screen return process (step S317) is executed, a person without authority (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) easily browses confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history. And security can be ensured.

  In the present embodiment, the game screen return process (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are performed when it is determined in step S316 that the command for generating the effect control object has been received. The game screen is not limited to this. For example, based on the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as the reception of a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated, the game screen The return processing (step S317) and the hall menu display prohibition processing (step S318) may be performed.

  Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process without a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is an example of a screen in which the details of the error are displayed in the display area of the display device 16, (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed, and (b) a start-up port error A screen showing that a winning error has occurred and that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed. (C) Both the fact that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed and the abnormal start winning error FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a screen after a notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in a state where the error has occurred.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when a plurality of errors occur, the host control circuit 2100 displays all the details of the errors that have occurred in the display area of the display device 16 and performs audio / LED control in the order of higher priority. The audio is output from the speaker 24 via the circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10), and the light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the audio / LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

  When the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed and no other error has occurred, the host control circuit 2100 returns to the display area of the display device 16 as shown in FIG. In addition to controlling the display of characters such as "RAM cleared", the control unit outputs a sound such as "RAM cleared" to be output from the speaker 24, and furthermore, a voice / LED control circuit 2200. A control is performed to fully light the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via (see FIG. 10). Characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 112) on which characters such as "Setting has been changed" are displayed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when performing the setting change processing, the backup clear processing is also always performed (see FIG. 34), and in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S312 executed after the end of the setting change processing, as described above, Although the text "Setting changed" is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, and "Setting changed. RAM is initialized." Is output only from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing is executed without the setting change processing, the host control circuit 2100 uses an area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 112) in the display area of the display device 16. In addition to controlling to display a character such as "RAM cleared" and controlling to output a sound such as "RAM cleared" from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 113 (a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is to change the setting value (not the backup clear processing), whereas in the backup clear processing without the setting change processing, the main purpose is the backup clear processing. It is considered to be. For this reason, when the backup clear processing accompanied with the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is conservatively notified so as not to hinder the operation of the redisplayed hole menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing is executed is notified in a more prominent manner than when the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the backup clear process from being executed illegally.

  After the backup clear processing is executed, if another error such as a start-up opening prize error has also occurred as another error, it is determined that the start-up error prize-winning error has occurred as shown in FIG. 113B, for example. The fact that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed as characters in the display area of the display device 16. At this time, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed has a higher priority than the start opening abnormal winning error, so that a character indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed at a higher rank regardless of the order of occurrence. . In addition, a sound notifying that the backup clear processing with a higher priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 emits light in a manner indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed.

  Further, if the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) of the execution of the backup clear process has elapsed in a state where both the backup clear process has been executed and the start-up opening abnormal winning error, the backup clear process has been performed. Is deleted from the display area of the display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the abnormal start-up opening prize error is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Further, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from a sound notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to a sound notifying that the abnormal start-up opening prize error has occurred. The mode changes from a mode indicating that the process has been executed to a mode indicating that an abnormal start-up opening winning error has occurred. In this way, the content of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

  In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change processing is being performed or the setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, when it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hole menu display processing (step S302) is executed. However, it is preferable to execute the backup clearing process when the setting clearing process is not performed. The backup clear processing without the setting change processing is performed when both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning on the setting key 328 in a state where the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 33). When the backup clear processing is executed, the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command to the host control circuit 2100. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 that has received the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command involves a setting change processing. It can be determined that no backup clear processing has been performed, and the whole menu display processing (step S302) and the whole menu processing (step S303) can be performed.

[10-17-1. Other examples of hole menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission processing (step S17) of the power-on processing (see FIG. 31). (See step S1730 in FIG. 32) For example, when the set value data is not within the prescribed range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal ( (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is replaced illegally, there is a high possibility that the work area check processing of the RAM 103 (step S1720) is not executed. Further, in the case where the set value that is set by the input of the invalid signal is changed, there is a possibility that the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, similarly to the above-described setting determination processing executed during the execution of the game, when the work area check processing is not executed in step S1720, or when the setting value is incorrectly changed, the setting value may not be changed. Assuming that the data is in the range of “0” to “5” (for example, a case where YES is determined in step S1730), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the set value information is appropriate (step S1730). The processing of S319 and step S320) may be executed. FIG. 114 shows the whole menu task in this case. FIG. 114 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart in the case where the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting determination process for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. Hereinafter, another example of the hole menu task will be described. However, description of the processing common to FIG. 108 will be omitted, and only the setting determination processing will be described.

  First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power interruption return command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. This is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

  On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 that has received the power interruption recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S319. In this step S319, the host control circuit 2100 executes a set value check process. This set value check processing (step S319) includes the current set value information (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power interruption and stored in the subwork RAM 2100a) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101. This is processing for confirming (setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after a power failure). If it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processing in steps S309 to S316 is not performed.

  After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S319), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the set value is appropriate, that is, whether the set value is appropriate. Is determined (step S320). At this time, if the current setting value information matches the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined that the current setting value information is appropriate (YES in step S320), and the process proceeds to step S317. The processing after step S317 is as described above.

  On the other hand, if the current setting value information does not match the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined that the setting value information is inappropriate (NO in step S320), and the process proceeds to step S321. Execute the processing when an error occurs.

  The above-described setting value abnormality process is a process of displaying, in the display area of the display device 16, an image for notifying that the setting value is abnormal. In the setting value abnormality process (step S321), a sound for notifying that the set value is abnormal is output instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal. The processing may be executed.

  As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination processing (the processing of steps S319 and S320), When it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S320), by executing the set value abnormality process (step S321), it is possible to notify the gaming machine manager that the set value is not appropriate.

  Note that the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of step S319 and step S320) is executed when the setting confirmation processing ends, but without performing either the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the setting change processing is performed. (For example, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 in a state where the power is not turned on) or the power supply is simply turned off. It is also preferable to execute the process even when only is input. Unless the setting change process is performed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure, and the host control circuit 2100 performs the determination. This is because it is possible to determine the suitability.

[10-18. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hole menu processing (step S303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 108 and 114) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hole menu process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

  First, the host control circuit 2100 selects a hole menu item for which various information / settings are confirmed or various settings are changed based on the operation of the select button 664 and / or the main button 662 by the operator. A hole menu selection process is performed (step S3001). In the hole menu selection processing in FIG. 115, the hole menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, A description will be given of the case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume adjustment setting, but the hole menu items are not limited to these as described above.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “time setting” (step S3002). If it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hole menu is “time setting” (YES in step S3002), host control circuit 2100 performs time setting processing (step S3003). In this time setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time. .

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “time setting” (NO in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “prize ball information”. It is determined (step S3004). When determining that the selected hole menu is “prize ball information” (YES in step S3004), the host control circuit 2100 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize ball information processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, the number of prize balls per day paid out in the past several days The information includes difference information (every day) between the number of awarded balls paid out in the past several days and the number of awarded balls fired.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “prize ball information” (NO in step S3004), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “setting change / confirmation history”. Is determined (step S3006). If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hole menu is “setting change / confirmation history” (YES in step S3006), it performs a setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007). In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (to be described later, for example, see FIG. 119) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can change the setting. Confirmation history, change history and browsing history can be confirmed.

  When the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been operated in a state where the select button 664 has been operated and the “setting change / confirmation history” has been selected, the host control circuit 2100 displays the display area of the display device 16. A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) is displayed, and the operator can change the setting (set value), check the setting (set value), check the browsing history, and check the setting (set value). ) And the changed settings (set values) can be confirmed. The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “setting change / confirmation history” (NO in step S3006), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “error information history”. Is determined (step S3008). When determining that the selected hole menu is “error information history” (YES in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays an error information history screen (for example, see FIG. 116) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history. And

  The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the error history when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the host control circuit 2100 may determine that a backup failure has occurred when an abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or without transmitting an abnormal command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200 (FIG. 9) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the start of power supply to the main CPU 101.

  As shown in FIG. 116, an error information history table is arranged at substantially the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a release date and time column in which the date and time at which the error was released is displayed. For example, “MOTOR ERR” is indicated in the error content of No. 2 on the error information history screen in FIG. 116, which is, for example, step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179. (See FIG. 106). Although not shown in FIG. 116, the date and time information (strictly speaking, the date and time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state) at which the error motor operation stop state release processing (step S311) is performed is displayed. Column. Further, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “error information history” (NO in step S3008), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “monitoring history”. (Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “monitoring history” (YES in step S3010), host control circuit 2100 performs a monitoring history process (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “monitoring history” (NO in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “warning display setting”. (Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “warning display setting” (YES in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 performs a warning display setting process (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “warning display setting” (NO in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “notification setting”. (Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “notification setting” (YES in step S3014), host control circuit 2100 performs a notification setting process (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification settings.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “notification setting” (NO in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is in “power saving mode”. (Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is the “power saving mode” (YES in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 performs a power saving mode process (step S3017). In the power saving mode processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. I do.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not the “power saving mode” (NO in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “maintenance”. (Step S3018). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “maintenance” (YES in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 performs a maintenance process (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “maintenance” (NO in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “main item operation check”. (Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “check of the operation of the accessory” (YES in step S3020), the host control circuit 2100 performs an operation of checking the accessory (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 to enable the operator to confirm the operation of the accessory. .

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “main item operation check” (NO in step S3020), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “liquid crystal brightness setting”. Is determined (step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “liquid crystal luminance setting” (YES in step S3022), host control circuit 2100 performs liquid crystal luminance setting processing (step S3023). In this liquid crystal luminance setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a liquid crystal luminance setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 and allows the operator to confirm and change the luminance setting of the display device 16. And

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “liquid crystal brightness setting” (NO in step S3022), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “volume adjustment setting”. It is determined (step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “volume adjustment setting” (YES in step S3024), host control circuit 2100 performs a volume adjustment setting process (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the display device 16 and allows the operator to confirm and change the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 24. Make it possible.

  The hall menu selected in step S3001 after step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and step S3001 is "volume control". If it is determined that the setting is not “NO” (NO in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 ends the whole menu process, and returns the process to step S304 of the whole menu task (see FIG. 108).

[10-19. Various device aspects when changing settings and confirming settings]
The aspects of various devices (display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change and setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. I do.

  First, the setting change will be described in the order in which various operations are performed. In a power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are off. To start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, unless the power is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are turned on. , LED 25 and performance display monitor 334 remain off.

  Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls to the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). . The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 causes the display control circuit 2300 to display the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 and to indicate that the setting is being changed. Display characters. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a sound such as “Setting is being changed” from the speaker 24 by the sound / LED control circuit 2200, and turns on all the LEDs 25 in white by the sound / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process for clearing the work area of the main RAM 103. The set values that are set are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, at this stage, the set values have not been determined yet. The performance display monitor 334 displays the updated set value. In the display area of the display device 16, a hole menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "Setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a sound such as "Setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously illuminated in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is stored only in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is determined. The information may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating another operation unit (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do so.

  Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has ended based on receiving the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless the execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received), the host control circuit 2100 displays at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). The control circuit 2300 displays a hole menu screen or a screen of a selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in a display area of the display device 16 and displays a character such as “Setting has been changed”. It is displayed on the display area of the display device 16. However, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a sound such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized” from the speaker 24 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). At the same time, the audio / LED control circuit 2200 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. The process ends when the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above description, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed. However, the host control circuit 2100 displays not only "the setting has been changed" but also "the RAM has been cleared". May be written together.

  As described above, even if the setting change state is completed, a character display such as "Setting changed", a sound output such as "Setting changed. RAM is initialized." By performing the lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to suppress unauthorized actions such as browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen or the like by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the time when the setting change state ends, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

  The above is the mode of the various devices (the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change.

  Next, the setting confirmation will be described in the order in which various operations are performed. In a power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are off. To start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 , LED 25 and performance display monitor 334 remain off.

  Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting to the setting check state, and sets the setting operation command (setting check start command). Send Based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the state has been controlled to the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation state has been started). When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 causes the display control circuit 2300 to display the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 and “setting is being confirmed”. Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a sound such as “Setting is being confirmed” from the speaker 24 by the sound / LED control circuit 2200, and turns on all the LEDs 25 in white by the sound / LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set values that are set are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power-off recovery command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has been completed based on the reception of the power interruption recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game can be executed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes a game screen return display process (step S318) based on receiving the power interruption return command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 does not display a character indicating that the setting check has been completed, and does not output a sound indicating that the setting check has been completed. However, the host control circuit 2100 fully turns on the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends the red lighting of the LED 25 when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  In this way, even if the setting confirmation state has been completed, by turning on the LED 25 in red all the way for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), an unauthorized operation such as browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen or the like can be performed by the authority. Can be suppressed by a third party who does not have the above. Further, at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the time when the setting change state ends, so that it can be easily grasped from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

  As described above, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped when no command is received from the main CPU 101 and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the startup and the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command is abnormal. I do. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 2300 and the audio / LED control circuit 2200 output a display and an audio output of “Please determine the set value”, and the audio / LED control circuit 2200 LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) is turned on and off by white. This state is controlled again by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the host control circuit 2100 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

  The above is the aspect of the various devices (the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[10-20. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 108) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 with the setting change history of the setting value, the confirmation history of the setting value, and the browsing history of the setting change and confirmation. (Setting change history information) and (setting confirmation history information). Before describing the setting change / confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation, and browsing will be described first.

  In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change processing as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 and turning on the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting change processing is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of “1” to “6”. When operated to be OFF, one of the plurality of set values used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

  As described above, after executing the setting change process, the main CPU 101 sets an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has ended, and the set value information after the change, so that the setting change history can be displayed. This is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed) and the set value indicating the set value after the setting change The information and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received, are stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in columns “No. 3” and “No. 4” in a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. I do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the setting value, the setting confirmation process needs to be executed by the main CPU 101 as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off, the setting confirmation processing ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated again to be turned on. As you did.

  Further, in order to display the setting confirmation history, as described above, after executing the setting confirmation processing, the main CPU 101 issues a power-off reset command as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed, and sends the command to the host control circuit 2100. Send to At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the host control circuit 2100 in order to execute the above-described setting determination process (the processes of steps S319 and S320; see FIG. 114). Preferably transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the power-off recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed, the host control circuit 2100 is currently clocking the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed) and the RTC 209. The date and time data, that is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. In addition, as shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. May also be displayed together.

  The sub work RAM 2100a according to the present embodiment forms a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is retained. .

  In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed in a state in which “setting change / confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111), and the sub-work RAM 2100 a Means that a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) in which the setting change / confirmation history information stored in is displayed.

  The host control circuit 2100 executes the following processing so that the browsing history (browsing history) can be displayed. That is, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 displays a hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 (step S301). Then, when “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), host control circuit 2100 highlights “setting change / confirmation history” (FIG. 111). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the host control circuit 2100 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, and reads the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later). ) Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the operation type information indicating that the browsing has been performed (information indicating that the browsing has been performed), and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, The time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a in association with the date and time data. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-described history recording process (steps S306 and S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the subwork RAM 2100a when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 during either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When storing the browsing history in the subwork RAM 2100a, the host control circuit 2100 integrates the browsing history with the setting change / confirmation history information already stored, for example, and stores it in the subwork RAM 2100a. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in the columns of “No. 2” and “No. 5” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG.

  Here, the history recording processing in step S306 and step S307 is summarized as follows. First, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The host control circuit 2100 performs both a setting change history and a browsing history. In the hall menu process (step S303), “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power-off reset command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 performs both a setting confirmation history and a browsing history. If the “setting change / confirmation history” is not selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the host control circuit 2100 Performs only the setting change history without performing the browsing history among the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, if "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S303) (NO in step S3006), and if the command received in step S304 is a power interruption recovery command, the host control circuit 2100 performs only the setting confirmation history without performing the browsing history among the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. Therefore, in the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, the “setting change / confirmation” is performed in the hole menu processing (step S303). If "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

  In addition, other than during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, the hole menu display processing (step S302) and the hole menu processing (step S302) are performed. In the case where step S303) is performed, by making the above-mentioned browsing record be performed, it is also possible to monitor fraud of a game store clerk. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key is cut out only at a position corresponding to the setting key 328 and a key managed by a gaming machine manager) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have access can not browse, but for backup clear processing without setting change processing, general store clerks or unauthorized players who do not have a dedicated key perform browsing by performing backup processing It is possible to do. Therefore, by making the browsing record by the host control circuit 2100 even when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the security camera corresponding to the time (the security camera normally installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with a video such as a camera).

  In the history record processing of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change processing or a power interruption reset command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing. If "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the browsing record is performed as described above, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power-off reset command, Performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, but the “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is When the command is an initialization command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be minimized, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud. To explain this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud with a setting change history that is not stored in the gaming machine manager's memory. As for the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the setting. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether or not the browsing is performed. When the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is displayed if the browsing is performed (at least the setting value information is browsed). It is intended to be recorded. This is because it is considered that the person who performs the injustice is more likely to browse after confirming the setting than to browse after changing the setting. That is, in the same time period, if there is no browsing history and there is only a setting check history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if both the setting check history and the browsing history have a large number of histories, there is a possibility of fraud. . Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, if “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S303) (step S303). YES in step S3006), the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are both recorded, and the setting confirmation process is executed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been performed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been performed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

  In the history record processing of steps S306 and S307, browsing was performed a plurality of times from the start of the hole menu display processing of step S302 to the execution of the game screen return display processing of step S317. However, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing ends. For example, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 111) (YES in step S3046), a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) is displayed. However, if "return" is selected and set on this setting change / confirmation history screen, the screen returns to the hole menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hole menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. As described above, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times during steps S302 to S317, the browsing record is made once.

  The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of browsing records performed between step S302 and step S317 to one is as follows. That is, for example, a person who has performed setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of browsing records, increase the number of histories, and perform an action that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during steps S301 to S314, the history is recorded only once, Is turned off once so that the history is not recorded unless it is turned on again, it is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the setting change processing is completed, the hole menu redisplay processing (step S312) is executed, and after the setting confirmation processing is completed, the game is performed without executing the hole menu redisplay processing. The screen return process (step S317) is executed. For example, even after the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed by turning off the setting key 328, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hole menu is displayed. In the case where the screen is displayed in such a manner that the screen is displayed, after returning to the game screen, the hole menu screen can be displayed again. In this case, each time the user selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” on the redisplayed hole menu screen or repeatedly performs the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328, the user browses the page. Even if there is, it is preferable to make the browsing record only once.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330, in addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664. ing. Among them, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. The power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330 Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by a player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a gaming machine manager.

  In the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting change in which the setting value is not displayed is stored. A configuration in which the confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 124 described later) is displayed may be stored as the browsing history.

  Next, referring to FIG. 117, FIG. 118 and FIGS. 119 to 123, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 and the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. This will be described in comparison with a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of FIG.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 118 is an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (the screen when the screen is shifted to the setting change / confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  When “setting change / confirmation history” is selected in the hole menu process (see FIG. 115) (YES in step S3006 in FIG. 115), the host control circuit 2100 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). ). At this time, an initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted.

  The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, a first selection area 1660a, and a And two selection areas 1660b. FIG. 119 shows an example in which “Page” is displayed in the first selection area 1660a, and “Clear” and “Return” are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information in association with each other. The date and time column displays the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, the setting value after the change is displayed when the setting is changed, and the setting value at that time is displayed when the setting is confirmed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed in the case of setting change, and "confirmation" is simply displayed in the case of setting confirmation.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting check, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / check history screen. . Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after setting is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively, when the setting is confirmed, and the setting value at that time is displayed.

  After executing the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing (step S3051), the host control circuit 2100 executes a clocking process (step S3052). This time measurement process is a process of starting time measurement of a timer built in the host control circuit 2100. Here, the counting of the timer is started after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 119). This is for the purpose of displaying the whole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after () is displayed).

  In step S3053, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3053), the process moves to step S3071 to be described later, and it is determined whether or not “return” is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, "Return" is determined. Is done.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which “return” is highlighted, the highlight display moves from “return” to “Page” ( See FIG. 120).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S3054), the host control circuit 2100 executes a timing process (step S3055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is because a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when not performed.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “Page” has been determined in step S3056. When the operator presses the main button 662 while “Page” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 It is determined that “Page” has been determined.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that “Page” has been determined (YES in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 executes a page update screen display process (step S3057). When the page update screen display processing is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the page update screen in the setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and “next page” and “previous page” are displayed on the left and right of the notation “Page”. Accordingly, the operator understands that the operation of the left select button 664c updates the setting change / confirmation history screen to the previous page, and the operation of the right select button 664d updates the setting change / confirmation history screen to the next page. can do. When the left select button 664c is operated when the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed. When the right select button 664d is operated when the last page is displayed, one page is displayed. If the eyes are displayed in a circular manner, the convenience can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “Page” (NO in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S3065 to be described later, and determines whether or not “clear” is determined in the setting change / confirmation history screen. .

  When executing the page update screen display process (step S3057), the host control circuit 2100 executes a time counting process (step S3058). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3055 and restarting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The timing of the timer is cleared and the timing is restarted after the page update screen display processing (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  In step S3059, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether a page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process moves to step S3062 described later.

  When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the host control circuit 2100 executes a page update process (step S3060). When the left / right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs a page update process. Then, the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16 is updated and displayed on the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when updated to the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 operates. Although the page updating process is performed, the operation for performing the page updating process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b, any one of “No. 1” to “No. 5” on the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. In addition, the page updating process may be performed when it is determined that the current line is the last line. The same applies to a page update process in a modification of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

  After executing the page update process (step S3060), the host control circuit 2100 executes a time counting process (step S3061). This time measurement process is a process of clearing the time measurement of the timer started in step S3058 and restarting the time measurement of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100. The timing of the timer is cleared and the timing is started again after the page update processing (step S3060) is executed (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) and the predetermined time ( This is because a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within 30 seconds.

  After executing the time counting process in step S3061, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3059 to determine whether a page update operation has been performed.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated in step S3062. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3062), the flow shifts to step S3072 to be described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3072 instead of step S3071 because “return” is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is not.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 121), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “clear” (see FIG. 122).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S3063), the host control circuit 2100 executes a timing process (step S3064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing was performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. Sometimes, a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed.

  After executing the clocking process of step S3064, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S3065, and determines whether or not “clear” has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 It is determined that "clear" has been determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3065), the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing all data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 123). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process in step S3065 is executed, the item of “return” is highlighted.

  In the above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a are erased, but not all data. The present invention is not limited to erasing data, and it may be possible to erase only some data. As a mode for erasing a part of the data, for example, as shown in FIG. 1 to No. 5, time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5, a setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, a plurality of operation types (setting change , Setting confirmation, and browsing), a mode in which date and time (time) information, operation type information, and set value information corresponding to a specific operation type are erased, and time (date and time) information, operation type information, and set value information A mode in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is deleted can be considered.

  Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066) be executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, input of a password may be used as a condition for enabling pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without inputting the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed only when the correct password is input. You can do so. This can prevent the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history from being accidentally cleared. Further, for example, it is considered that a person who has performed setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, for example, by allowing only a specific person such as a person who knows the password to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process, it is possible to suppress the setting change process and the browsing for unauthorized use. It becomes possible.

  After executing the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the host control circuit 2100 executes a time counting process (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process for clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064 and again starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timing is that the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 after the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066) is executed. This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all the data is erased.

  In step S3068, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3068), the process moves to step S3072 to be described later. In this case, the reason why the process proceeds to step S3071 instead of step S3072 is that “return” is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. . Therefore, if “return” is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data has been cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S3069), the host control circuit 2100 executes a timing process (step S3070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3067 and again starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is because a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when not performed.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “return” has been determined in step S3071. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 It is determined that "return" has been determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3071), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3073) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. This hole menu screen display processing is processing for displaying an initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  If “return” is not determined in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 (YES in step S3072), the process proceeds to step S3073, and ends the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and returns to the hall. The initial screen of the menu screen (see FIG. 110) is displayed. In other words, even if the "return" item is not selected and determined by the operator, if the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends, and the initial screen of the hole menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing from step S3053.

  As described above, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display device 16 during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen is closed after a predetermined time elapses without performing any operation. , A hole menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, even if there is no operation, the host control circuit 2100 controls the display of the hall menu screen to be continued without ending the hall menu screen as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. I do. In this case, the item of the end of the hole menu is not displayed on the hole menu screen.

  When it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the process that proceeds to step S3073 is performed by the hole menu process (that is, during setting change or step S303) in step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114). In the hole menu process (that is, after the setting change or the setting check is completed) in step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114), a different process is executed (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hole menu processing of step S313 (the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 in the hole menu processing of step S313 (step S3072) When the determination is YES), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S317 (see FIGS. 108 and 114), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen (step S317). And a hall menu display prohibition process (step S318). That is, in the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the screen returns to the hole menu screen (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, in the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the re-displayed hole menu screen after the setting change processing is completed, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again You can't do that.

  Also, when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the process returns to step S3053 also corresponds to the hole menu process (ie, setting) in step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) described above. This is a process during the change or the setting confirmation), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S313 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, even if the no-operation period has not reached the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S313 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen return process (step S317) and a hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) are executed. That is, in the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the screen returns to the hole menu screen (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed via the re-displayed hole menu screen after the setting change processing is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the inactivity time has not reached the predetermined time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed via the hole menu screen redisplayed after the setting change processing is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the predetermined end condition Unless is established, the processing of steps S3053 to S3072 is repeatedly executed.

  As described above, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing is completed, the operator has a certain time for browsing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and has a certain time ( If no operation is performed for, for example, 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends, and the game screen return processing (step S317) and the hole menu prohibition processing (step S318) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) cannot easily view confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, so that security can be ensured.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. A list screen showing all the information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. 119 (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 119) and third information in which time information and set value information at the time of browsing are displayed (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119). 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) may want to narrow down a target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen (for example, see FIG. 119) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list, the first information, the second information, and the third information Of these, it is preferable that the narrowed-down screen narrowed down to only specific information can be selectively displayed in the display area of the display device 16 according to the operator's intention. This makes it possible to enhance the convenience for the operator. In particular, the first information described above is useful not only for fraud detection, but also for information on how many days the business has been performed based on the set value. Since the above-described narrowing-down screen only needs to be able to display a target by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information (for example, current time information or the like) unrelated to the operation type may be displayed.

[10-21. Another example of the display screen displayed in the setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. However, since the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 is the same as that in FIGS. 117 and 118, a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 will be described in another example. A description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be omitted.

  FIG. 124 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 125 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and shows an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 126 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when a setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 127 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16 and is a diagram illustrating an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 128 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 124, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

  In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124, although the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124 is a screen on which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed. Note that the date and time when the time information is displayed displays the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing was performed, and the operation type where the operation type information is displayed includes the operation type (setting change, Settings confirmation and browsing) are displayed.

  In addition, in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, “setting display” is displayed in the second selection area 1690b in addition to “clear” and “return”. In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, “return” is selectively displayed (highlighted). In this other example, the item to be highlighted can be selected by operating the select button 664.

  When the user operates the select button 664 to select “setting display”, “setting display” is highlighted (see FIG. 125). When the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while “setting display” is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is displayed. The setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen that is not displayed (see FIG. 126). As described above, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and determining “setting display”, the setting value is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The newly set values are displayed in a list. When a setting change / confirmation history screen displaying time information, operation type information, and set value information is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. "Back" is highlighted.

  When the user operates the select button 664 to select “Page” on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 126) on which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed, “Page” is highlighted. (See FIG. 127). When the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while “Page” is selected (highlighted), the host control circuit 2100 executes a page update process. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 128) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. By operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on this page update screen, the page can be updated to the next page or the previous page.

  In addition, when “Page” is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 124) in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed. Also, the page update processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100. However, when this page update processing is executed, the page update screen in the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is displayed. Is displayed. By operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on this page update screen, the page can be updated to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the set value is not displayed. However, the page update processing may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed.

  In this other example, of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information, only the time information and the operation type information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 124, for example, as shown in FIG. 124 can be selectively displayed on a screen in which the setting information and the setting value information are displayed in a list. The screen shown in FIG. 124 is one of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

  Further, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition (for example, a person who has input an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

  FIG. 129 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a set value can be confirmed on the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of display device 16 of pachinko gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until the operation is completed. As shown in FIG. 129, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a hole menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for browsing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key 328, and turned off by turning in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It can be configured.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but is not limited thereto. The operation may be performed when at least one of the change process and the setting confirmation process is performed. The same applies to any of the modifications described below.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 111), the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates the main button 662 in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIG. 111) displayed in the second procedure. When pressed, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the setting change / confirmation history screen, date / time data, operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and set value are associated with each other.

  Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (an authorized person) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to third procedures. By viewing the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance the setting change of the set value that regulates the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the viewing of the confirmation, and the corresponding set value at a glance. . The person having the authority is a person who has been given authority for setting change, confirmation of setting change, and the like, and means a store manager or the like of the hall. Hereinafter, "authorized person" may be referred to as "administrative authority".

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation buttons 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and controls related to the game. A main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the control, and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables the setting, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the host control circuit 2100. The display control unit includes a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit, A sub-work RAM 2100a functioning as a backup memory capable of storing written information even in a non-energized state; The main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or a setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmitting means, and the host control circuit 2100 transmits the data received by the data receiving means to the setting change. Alternatively, in the case of setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a, and the setting change or setting confirmation stored in the subwork RAM 203 is stored. A setting display function for displaying date and time data on the display device 16 is provided. When the main button 662 is operated in a state where the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed, the setting value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. Is displayed.

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to the setting value and determine whether or not an incorrect setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Become

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time data at which the setting value is received from the RTC 209, and store the setting value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

  With this configuration, the set value after the change, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person specifies the date and time when the set value was changed. When a fraud such as changing a set value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time at which the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Is also good.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data at which the setting value was confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time at which the setting value was confirmed, and When a fraud such as checking a value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a setting value, and date and time data among the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change / confirmation history information, display of set value and date / time data, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are associated with each other can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can confirm whether the setting has been changed or whether an illegal setting change has been performed.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for performing control related to the game. The display device 16 includes a main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls display of the display device 16. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a unit and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit is configured to receive the various data from the data transmitting unit and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information, and an RTC 209 for clocking the date and time. The setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100 by the communication means. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub-work RAM 2100a A setting display function for storing setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16. When the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16, date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16. Have.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachislot according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time data on which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. It may be.

  With this configuration, the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed can be specified, and illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. If so, the fraud can be identified.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a setting value, and date and time data among the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change / confirmation history information, display of set value and date / time data, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information and the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation related to the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can determine whether or not the pachinko machine has been acted upon, as well as determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate an illegal act.

[10-22. Maintenance processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the host control circuit 2100 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed. This will be described in comparison with FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a maintenance process performed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 132 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16.

  In the maintenance processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, devices connected to the host control circuit 2100 (for example, various sensors, various types of operating materials, and the like), such as effect buttons such as the effect button switch 621 and the effect group 1000, are subjected to the maintenance process. Then, the operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation state display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) at substantially the center of the maintenance screen (refer to FIGS. 131 and 132). . The operation state display table includes, for example, a name column in which names of 28 various devices are displayed, and a number column in which serial numbers (1 to 28) assigned to various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operation state column indicating operation states of various devices. The “OFF” display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operation state column is changed from “OFF” display to “ON” display. For example, when the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the host control circuit 2100 changes the display of the operation state column of the effect button 1 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The “ON” display is displayed in red. The above “input from each device” is based on detection of an input port or the like by the host control circuit 2100. In addition, each of the attraction characters has a role detection sensor group 1002 (see FIG. 9) for detecting at least a normal position (for example, an initial position), and when the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON. It is assumed that the display is turned off, and the display is turned on when the accessory detection sensor group 1002 for detecting the normal position is off, that is, when the presentation accessory moves.

  Further, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed, the display returns to the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hole menu screen (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 132, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in outline indicating that the images are valid.

  In the maintenance process (see FIG. 130), the host control circuit 2100 first acquires sub device input information (Step S3081). The sub-device input information is a detection result of the operation states of the various devices denoted by the serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state where there is an input or an off state where there is no input.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub input state information editing process of reading out the sub input state information in the obtained sub device input information (step S3082).

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a maintenance screen display process of displaying a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step S3082). S3083). In this process, display of the maintenance screen and update of the display (for example, change from “OFF” display to “ON” display) are performed.

  Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have been simultaneously operated (step S3084). If it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have been operated simultaneously (YES in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 ends the maintenance processing and the hole menu processing (see FIG. 115), The process returns to step S304 of the whole menu task (see FIG. 108).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 returns the process to step S3081.

  By the way, some pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines in recent years have one device having a plurality of functions. For example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding and moving upward based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, when the “effect button 1” of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 performs maintenance on the operation function of the effect button 62. In addition, when the “production button 2” of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 performs the maintenance of the production function by moving the production button 62 upward to move. If the result of the maintenance operation is normal, the host control circuit 2100 executes a maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes a maintenance screen display process (changes from “OFF” display to “ON” display). ). The effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the “effect button 2” may be operated, for example, by operating the select button 664 to select another serial number item shown in FIG. In this case, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed and the maintenance mode is ended, the host control circuit 2100 returns to the normal state (the state before projecting upward). Controlled.

  Also, in recent years, some pachinko gaming machines and pachislots are provided with a plurality of effect components having different driving means, and in such a gaming machine, a plurality of effect components having different driving means are simultaneously operated. The maintenance may be executed, the driving means may operate each of the plurality of different stage productions at different timings to execute the maintenance, or may be operated independently to execute the maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine in which the driving means is provided with different renderings 1 to 3 in a game machine, for example, when “rendering 1 + 2” of serial number 14 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 The effect 1 and the effect 2 are simultaneously operated to perform the maintenance. Also, for example, when the serial number 17 “director 1 → 2” shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 first activates the director 1 and then activates the director 2 And perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing attraction 1” of serial number 11 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 operates the rendering attraction 1 alone to perform maintenance. In addition, for example, when the effects 1 and 3 simultaneously operate and interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, it is not possible to select the “effect 1 + 3” of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not validated.) In FIG. 132, the “directing effect 1 + 3” of the serial number 15 is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, the production 1 is operated first, If it does not interfere with the production of the special effect 3), for example, it may be possible to select and determine “production 1 → 3” of the serial number 18 shown in FIG. 132, for example. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of directing objects in a plurality, to operate at different timings, or to operate independently, and to simultaneously operate when simultaneous operation interferes. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve the maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of trouble.

  Although not shown in FIG. 132, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout secured ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot settlement button, and a sealed box are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine in which a game is made possible by circulating a game ball, it is preferable that a sensor for detecting the emission of the game ball and the like is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100 have been described as targets of maintenance processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and devices connected to the main CPU 101 are not limited thereto. (For example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, and the like) may be set as a target of the maintenance process. Furthermore, in the CR machine, a fake operation is performed between the ball rental machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of a CR pachislot, between the ball rental machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card. A typical signal communication may be performed, a normal state of the signal communication may be detected, and if normal, a maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from “OFF” display to “ON” display).

[10-23. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135.

  The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of making the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the portable terminal cooperate. By using the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to record detailed information on a game performed by the player or customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by satisfying a predetermined condition. Or you can.

  Examples of the predetermined condition include, for example, that the result of the special symbol big hit determination is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device, or that a specific effect is executed. In order to customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, music output during a jackpot game or a high-probability game state is changed to a special song, or the display device 16 And changing the costume of the character displayed in the item.

  When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. If, for example, a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 in a state where the decorative display displayed on the display area of the display device 16 is not being changed, an initial guide image is displayed on the display area of the display device 16.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The guide initial image includes characters “Unimemo (registered trademark)”, characters “Please select a favorite menu”, and a guide menu.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the items of the guide menu include "Start Unimemo", "Big hit symbol / number of rounds", "Model site", and "Return to game". In the guide initial image, “Start Unimemo” is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of guide menu items, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. When the main button 662 is operated, the item that is highlighted is determined. In FIG. 133, a plurality of items are surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “Start Unimemo” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

  When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the initial Unimemo image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When "big hit symbol / round number" is selected, the big hit symbol / round number is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown).

  When "return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the display device 16, an effect image displayed when performing a game, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 are not operated. Also, a demonstration video displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period is displayed. Also, even if a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the guide menu items, the display area of the display device 16 displays an effect image to be displayed when playing a game or the above-described demonstration image. Is done.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example when a unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The unimemo initial image displays characters “unimemo”, characters “customize favorite character”, and a unimemo menu. The items of the uni memo menu include “input password”, “record”, “record and end”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. In the initial Unimemo image, “Password input” is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. When the main button 662 is operated, the item that is highlighted is determined. In FIG. 134, a plurality of items are surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

  Then, when “password input” is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 135).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The password display image includes characters “Please enter a password” and a password input menu.

  The password input menu displays a plurality of items of the password input menu. The items in the password input menu are “enter”, “delete”, numbers “0” to “9”, alphabets “A” to “F”, “return to game”, and “return”. including. In the password display image, an item to be highlighted among "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated. , The highlighted number or alphabet is determined. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "OK" in the password input menu is selected and determined, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as a password to be input. Then, when "delete" is selected in the password input menu, characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

  When "return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the display device 16 displays an effect image to be displayed at the time of playing the game, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or the first A demonstration image displayed when neither the start port 420 nor the second start port 440 has won a prize for a predetermined period is displayed. When “return” is selected in the password input menu, a unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

[10-24. Modification of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modified examples 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[10-24-1. Modification 1 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
First, a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141.

  The setting change / confirmation history processing in Modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, except that the setting change / confirmation history processing has an authentication function for browsing setting values. . Hereinafter, differences from the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be described in detail. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, if no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) Has been described to perform the timing process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) so that is displayed. In the first modification as well, the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although a hole menu screen may be displayed at a time, description of the timing processing is omitted in the following description.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. This setting change / confirmation history processing is a state in which “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) from the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111) displayed in step S3006 in FIG. 115. Is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

  When the setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the host control circuit 2100 performs an authentication processing for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in Modification Example 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in the authentication process, the host control circuit 2100 first enters a password in the display area of the display device 16 where the hole menu screen is displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139. The requesting password request screen is further displayed (step S3101). FIG. 138 shows a password request screen displayed on the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. FIG. 139 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100.

  In the first modification, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (when the “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen), the main button 662 is pressed. And, for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting values are not displayed). May be displayed, and the password request screen may be displayed while the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying any of the hole menu and the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

  When the password is input, the host control circuit 2100 executes a password input process (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

  In step S3103, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the input password is appropriate. If the input password is appropriate (YES in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 ends the authentication process. On the other hand, when determining that the input password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 executes an authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, a screen shown in FIG. 140 is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, for example. Here, FIG. 140 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the input password is inappropriate in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG.

  When executing the authentication processing in step S3100, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is OK when determining that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is appropriate (YES in step S3103) (YES in step S3110). The process moves to step S3120. On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history processing.

  After the password is input on the password request screen, for example, when the main button 662 is pressed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the input password is appropriate. If the input password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without inputting the password, the above-described authentication NG process in step S3103 is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

  In step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the setting value are shown in association with each other is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

  After the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3130). If it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), a page update process is executed (step S3140), and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process moves to step S3150.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in step S3150. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 122) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” has been determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that "clear" has been determined (YES in step S3150), the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3180), and proceeds to step S3180. The above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all pieces of history data displayed in the display area of the display device 16 are deleted (for example, see FIG. 123). On the other hand, if “clear” has not been determined (NO in step S3150), the process moves to step S3170.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “return” has been determined in step S3170. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) in the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” has been determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3170), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3180), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if “return” is not determined (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130, and the process of step S3130 is continued.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating a setting change / confirmation in which a setting value can be confirmed on a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until a confirmation history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a hole menu when a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed as a first procedure for browsing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key 328, and turned off by turning in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 111), the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests input of a password (see FIGS. 138 and 139), and determines whether the input password is appropriate.

  As a fourth procedure, if the password input in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 126) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

  Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (an authorized person) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to fourth procedures. By looking at the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance each setting change of the set value that regulates the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, and history of each of the setting change and the viewing of the confirmation and the corresponding set value. . The person having the authority is a person who has been given authority for setting change, confirmation of setting change, and the like, and means a store manager or the like of the hall. Hereinafter, "authorized person" may be referred to as "administrative authority".

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation buttons 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and controls related to the game. A main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the control, and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables the setting, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the host control circuit 2100. The display control unit includes a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit, A sub-work RAM 2100a functioning as a backup memory capable of storing written information even in a non-energized state; The main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or a setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmitting means, and the host control circuit 2100 transmits the data received by the data receiving means to the setting change. Alternatively, in the case of setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a, and the setting change or setting confirmation stored in the subwork RAM 203 is stored. A setting display function for displaying date and time data on the display device 16 is provided. When the main button 662 is operated in a state where the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed, the setting value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. Is displayed.

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to the setting value and determine whether or not an incorrect setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Become

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time data at which the setting value is received from the RTC 209, and store the setting value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

  With this configuration, the set value after the change, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person specifies the date and time when the set value was changed. When a fraud such as changing a set value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time at which the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Is also good.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data at which the setting value was confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time at which the setting value was confirmed, and When a fraud such as checking a value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a setting value, and date and time data among the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change / confirmation history information, display of set value and date / time data, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are associated with each other can be saved and displayed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can confirm whether the setting has been changed or whether an illegal setting change has been performed.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 for displaying various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for performing control related to the game. The display device 16 includes a main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls display of the display device 16. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a unit and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit is configured to receive the various data from the data transmitting unit and a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information, and an RTC 209 for clocking the date and time. The setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100 by the communication means. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub-work RAM 2100a A setting display function for storing setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a on the display device 16. When the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed on the display device 16, date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16. Have.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachislot according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time data on which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. It may be.

  With this configuration, the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed can be specified, and illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. If so, the fraud can be identified.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a setting value, and date and time data among the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a are displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change / confirmation history information, display of set value and date / time data, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information and the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation related to the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can determine whether or not the pachinko machine has been acted upon, as well as determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate an illegal act.

[10-24-2. Modification 2 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146.

  The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the first modification except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, in particular, differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and is provided with a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, volume "high". , "Medium", and "small" are switched to one of the three volume positions, and are switched to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. When the order matches, the user is authenticated as a user having administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to a slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning a jog dial, and the volume may be determined by pressing the jog dial.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing has the authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the volume position change order. In the second modification, for example, a control program in which the authentication processing function is added to the audio / LED control circuit 2200 is stored, and the host control circuit 2100 executes an authentication process based on the volume password according to the control program.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process (see FIG. 143) in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. is there. The volume switch 108 is disposed, for example, in a circuit board of the sub-control circuit 200, and allows a slide operation for setting an initial set value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, also referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume levels of "low", "medium", and "high". In addition to the switching operation, the operation is sequentially switched to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when the initial setting value is set, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large” → “medium” → “small” → “medium”. That is, the host control circuit 2100 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

  On the other hand, when a user having an administrator authority (administrative authority) is set, a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from that at the time of initial setting according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. The operation is performed in a pattern, and the plurality of volume positions and the operation order are stored in a memory. When the administrator authority is required to view the set value change history, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the set value change history to be viewed.

  As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “low”) in FIG. 142, or volume position 2 to volume position 3 ( An operation pattern or the like representing a position change to a volume “loud” can be stored in advance.

  Thereby, the host control circuit 2100 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each of the above-mentioned volume positions of the volume switch 108, and determines whether or not the operation pattern matches a preset authentication operation pattern. Can be determined by a person.

  As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting a volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this authentication process, “setting change / confirmation history” is selected from the hole menu (see FIG. 110) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115 (YES in step S3006), and “setting change / confirmation” is displayed on the hole menu screen. The process is started when the main button 662 is pressed while “History” is highlighted (see FIG. 111).

  When the authentication process is started, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume password request display process for displaying a screen prompting the input of a volume password in a display area of the display device 16 on which the hole menu screen is displayed (step S3201). Execute

  FIG. 144 shows a password request screen in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. FIG. 145 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, in the volume password request display processing in step S3201 in FIG. 143, the host control circuit 2100 displays, for example, “* operates a volume switch to input a password in the display area of the display device 16. Please display the setting value after entering the password. "And the setting change / confirmation history information.

  In the second modification, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen). And, for example, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting values are not displayed). May be displayed and the volume password request screen may be displayed while the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying any of the hole menu and the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

  After the display of the volume password request display screen, the host control circuit 2100 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process of monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

  When the volume position information is input during the monitoring of the input of the volume position information, the host control circuit 2100 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and sets a predetermined authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed based on whether or not they match (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 executes the processing of step S3120 and subsequent steps in FIG. 136.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 displays an authentication NG display process of displaying that the authentication is NG in the display area of the display device 16. Is performed (step S3204). Accordingly, the host control circuit 2100 ends the authentication processing and shifts to the processing of step S3110 in FIG. 136. In the above-described authentication NG display process, a message such as “Volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning.” Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

  FIG. 142 illustrates an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the operation switch may include at least three arbitrary switches. A switch capable of taking a position may be used. In this case, the host control circuit 2100 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and obtains the position information (volume position information) detected by this position detection function, The configuration change / confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a may be displayed on condition that it matches a predetermined operation order stored in the RAM 2100a in advance.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 146, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, as a first procedure of confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information, the hole is set when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key 328, and turned off by turning in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 111), the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests input of a volume password (see FIGS. 144 and 145), captures the input volume password, and determines whether the captured volume password is appropriate. The determination as to whether the volume password is appropriate is made by comparing the captured volume password with an authentication operation pattern (authentication password). If the two match and the authentication is successful, the volume password is determined to be appropriate. to decide.

  As a fourth procedure, if the volume password input in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 126) in which the setting value is associated with the operation type corresponding to the operation type is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the display device 16 that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive at least the operation of the player, A non-game operation unit that is not operated by the player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs control related to the game, and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls display on the display device 16 The control unit includes: a setting switch 332 that enables a change or confirmation of a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6); and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit. Receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means; a subwork RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state; The main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the host control circuit 2100 by a data transmission unit, and the host control circuit 2100 transmits the data received by the data reception unit to the setting unit. In the case of change or setting confirmation, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a, and the setting change / confirmation history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. A configuration display function for displaying information on the display device 16 is provided, and the configuration change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order. ing.

  With this configuration, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a can be displayed on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or, it is possible to judge whether or not it is the opportunity to investigate the misconduct.

  Further, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the sub-work RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and displays the display device 16 May be configured to display the browsing history.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. . Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-game operation section may be an operation switch for adjusting a volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

  According to this configuration, authentication can be performed in the operation sequence known only to the authorized person, so that an operation switch for identifying an authorized person is not added, and the cost can be reduced. Note that this operation sequence is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to a hall, and is used only by a person having authority to change a setting or confirm a setting.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch that can take at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the host control circuit 2100 determines each volume position of the operation switch. The apparatus further comprises a detectable position detection function, wherein the setting display function obtains volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the order of the obtained volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. , The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a may be displayed.

  With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance, thereby identifying an authorized one. Authentication can be performed in an operation sequence known only to authorized persons without adding an operation switch.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate a fraudulent activity.

  As described above, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only a person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display the information. Although the configuration has been described, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, the input unit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The authentication using the input password may be configured.

[10-24-3. Modification 3 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 154.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a gaming system 210 according to Modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a portable wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged on a network 230. In the gaming system 210, as described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 cooperate to perform an authentication process for confirming the setting change / confirmation history information.

  In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. A function is provided for displaying the code in the display area of the display device 16A (see FIG. 150). The setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, and includes a set value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation unit that generates a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

  The portable wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured by a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a and the like (see FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute an operation display unit and an imaging unit in the present invention, respectively.

  The control unit 221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like. The CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in, for example, the storage device or the RAM. I do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes a captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change / confirmation history information and a URL, and a password input screen for inputting a password to the operation display unit 222 (see FIG. 153), an authentication result obtaining unit that transmits an input password input on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL, and obtains an authentication result notified from the server device 240. And a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a mode including the set value when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application previously installed in the storage device or the like. An extraction unit, an input screen display control unit, an authentication result acquisition unit, and a history information display control unit, which are components of the control unit 221 according to the present embodiment, are an extraction unit, an input screen display control unit, an authentication result An acquisition unit and a history information display control unit are configured.

  The server device 240 is realized by a computer and functions to manage a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the URL, receives an input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accessing the URL, and sets a password set in advance. And an authentication service function for notifying the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result by determining whether or not the password is correct. The server device 240 forms an authentication unit in the present invention.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the pachinko gaming machine 1A included in the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by selecting “change setting / change” from a plurality of hole menu items displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 109) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Confirmation history "is selected and determined, and the process is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed in a state where" Setting change / confirmation history "is highlighted on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 111).

  In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, if no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) Has been described to perform the timing process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) so that is displayed. In the third modification as well, the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hole menu screen may be displayed at the same time, the description of the modification 3 omits the description of the timing processing.

  When the setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and the two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. 161a (see FIG. 150) is generated (step S3301). Next, the host control circuit 2100 displays the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a on the display area of the display device 16A in a manner shown in FIG. 150, for example, in a two-dimensional code display process. Is executed (step S3302).

  After the execution of the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 receives a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to enabled state. The main button 662 is a button for performing a process return request. The select button 664 is a button for performing a cursor movement (page break) request. By operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

  After shifting to the acceptable state, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processing of steps S3303 to S3305. Although FIG. 148 omits the processing of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 117, in order to perform these processings, the processing of FIG. 117 is performed between step S3302 and step S3303 of FIG. Are added to the processing of steps S3056 to S3064.

  In FIG. 148, after the two-dimensional code display processing in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16, The host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” has been determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3303), the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the subwork RAM 2100a. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 123). If “clear” has not been determined (NO in step S3303), the process moves to step S3305.

  The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “return” has been determined in step S3305. When the operator presses the main button 662 while “return” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 150) displayed on the display area of the display device 16. , The host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” has been determined.

  If the host control circuit 2100 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3305), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3306) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “return” (NO in step S3305), the process moves to step S3303 to continue the processing from step S3303.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3303), the setting change / confirmation history displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 150). The information may be cleared. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but has not obtained the authentication result. Therefore, regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared. I can do it.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on the condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (for example, a liquid crystal display device) of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

  When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and instructs the display operation unit 222 to display the image data in the form shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

  Subsequently, in the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code, and temporarily stores the URL in, for example, a predetermined storage area in the RAM. A two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL, displays a password input screen (see FIG. 153), and executes a password input display process for receiving a password (step S3403).

  After executing the password input display processing in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 performs the password authentication processing through the following steps S3404 and S3405 in cooperation with the server device 240.

  In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 153) (step S3404), and then transmits the password from the numeric keypad 222b. A process of receiving the input of the password of the user is performed. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), control unit 221 transmits the input password to server device 240.

  The server device 240 checks the password transmitted from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 with a registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG based on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

  In response to this, after transmitting the input password accepted in step S3404, control unit 221 of portable wireless communication terminal 220 waits for notification of the authentication result from server device 240, and determines that the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. Then, it is determined whether the password is correct (step S3405).

  If it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S3405), control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process of displaying a message indicating that the password is authentication NG on display operation unit 222 ( Step S3410) Then, the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, for example, a message such as “The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning.” Is displayed in the message field 222d.

  On the other hand, if the password is determined to be correct (YES in step S3405), control unit 221 sets the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily stored in step S3402 to be displayed on display operation unit 222. A change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S3406). In the setting change / confirmation history display processing, the control unit 221 displays the display information in which the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S3402 is embedded (arranged) according to a preset display format. Then, based on this display information, a process of displaying the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 (see FIG. 154) is performed.

  FIG. 150 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) in FIG. 148, the host control circuit 2100 displays the setting change / confirmation history in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. A setting change / confirmation history screen including information and the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed on the display area of the display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. I have.

  Note that when displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 148) in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 displays, for example, “* The two-dimensional code on a portable terminal in the display area of the display device 16A. Please read and access the authentication service. "May be displayed.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This setting value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

  FIG. 152 is a view illustrating an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays a two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 152 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code reading and displaying process in S1101.

  FIG. 153 is a view illustrating an example of a password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. In the password input display processing (see FIG. 149) in step S3403, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 153 on the display operation unit 222.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the password input screen includes a numeric keypad 222b having keys "0" to "9" and "*" and "@", and a password display field 222c for displaying a password input by the numeric keypad 222b. Is displayed in the message field 222d. In the message field 222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, such as "* Please enter a password. The set value is displayed after the password is entered." In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 153, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

  FIG. 154 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 154, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g is a display where the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 is, for example, a display equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 154, in the setting change / confirmation history information, the set value is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

  In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application previously installed includes the display format described above, the display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. Supported. Accordingly, during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. 149, the control unit 221 performs the setting change / confirmation history display processing in S1107, and then determines the setting change / confirmation history information displayed on the display operation unit 222. The state shifts to a receivable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the button 222e and the select button 222f can be received.

  After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether a page update operation has been performed (step S3407). When it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407). An update process is performed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the page update operation has been performed by operating the select button 222f (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached), scrolling of the page continues. A page update process is performed (step S3408).

  If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, if it determines that the operation of the select button 222f has been stopped and the enter button 222e has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in step S3409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3071), control unit 222 executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that “return” has not been determined (NO in step S3409), control unit 222 returns to step S340.

  In the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A converts the setting change / confirmation history information into so-called raw data as a two-dimensional code and displays it in the display area of the display device 16A (FIG. 148). Steps S3301 and S3302), the portable radio communication terminal 220 captures the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and returns the setting change / confirmation history information to the raw data. (See steps S3401 and S3402 in FIG. 149).

  On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years have a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code as standard equipment.

  In this regard, in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and it is possible to display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A by the dedicated application.

  In other words, on a mobile communication terminal on which the dedicated application is not installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, the mobile terminal is displayed in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. And it is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the portable wireless communication terminal 220, sufficient confidentiality that only authorized persons can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the setting value is provided. Can be secured.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is captured by the portable wireless communication terminal 220. However, the data is read as shown in FIG. 154 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Will be displayed. Therefore, without having a dedicated application having the display format, even if it is read with a general-purpose barcode reader, it is not possible to make the user understand what kind of display the character string obtained by reading the two-dimensional code is. A certain level of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered, and can be obtained only by authorized persons.

  In the present embodiment, the password authentication is notified of the authentication result from the server device 240, and whether or not the password is correct is determined based on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but is not limited thereto. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 may receive a password from the server device 240, determine whether the input password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the input password is correct. In order to further secure confidentiality, the pachinko gaming machine 1A encrypts the setting change / confirmation history information, generates and displays a two-dimensional code, and uses a dedicated application to be installed in the portable wireless communication terminal 220. A configuration may be added in which a function of decrypting the setting change / confirmation history information corresponding to the encryption is added.

  Next, a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 151, as a first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. Display the hole menu screen when it is done. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key 328, and turned off by turning in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A performs the “setting change / confirmation history” by selecting and determining “setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 111). Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A operates in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 111) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the subwork RAM 2100a is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (FIG. 150). reference).

  As a fourth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 152). After capturing the two-dimensional code, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

  As a fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third procedure, and enters the password from the password input screen (see FIG. 153) provided by the dedicated site. Make the input.

  This password is, for example, a password disclosed by a manufacturer of the gaming system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 210 or the individual pachinko gaming machine 1A or the like. In the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and performs password authentication by comparing it with the registered password. Here, when the authentication is OK, server device 240 notifies portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the fact.

  As a sixth procedure, when the authentication OK is obtained in the fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure in a screen of a predetermined display format (FIG. 154). (See Reference) on the display operation unit 222 with the content including the set value. Thus, the administrative authority who has input the password can check the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display / operation unit 222 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment includes the display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive various operations, and control for performing control related to the game. And a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16A. The control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, and a data transmitting unit for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The display control unit includes a receiving unit for receiving various data from the data transmitting unit, and a writing unit for writing data even in a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a sub work RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the acquired information, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. By means, the setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100. If the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation in the subwork RAM 2100a. Setting display for setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in subwork RAM 2100a in the display area of display device 16A. A configuration in which a setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code when a main button 662 serving as an operation unit is operated in a state in which a setting change function or a setting confirmation and date and time data are displayed by a setting display function. have.

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the date and time means are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. Thus, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the sub work RAM 2100a can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the display is permitted after reading the two-dimensional code in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and authenticating the password, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper act.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed by the setting display function, the host control circuit 2100 uses the displayed date and time data as the browsing history. The configuration may be such that the browsing history is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a and displayed in the display area of the display device 16A.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored as the browsing history in the subwork RAM 2100a, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16A. be able to. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, triggers portable wireless communication based on information from a predetermined server device 240. The configuration change / confirmation history information may be displayed on the terminal 220.

  With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the portable wireless communication terminal 220 The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the password entered in the step (c) matches. Therefore, since authentication can be performed with a password known only to the authorized person, the cost can be reduced without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Note that this password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and is used only by a person having authority to change settings or confirm settings.

  The gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-described pachinko gaming machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication. The server device 240 further has a generation function of generating the two-dimensional code of the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the site stored in the work RAM 2100a, and the server device 240 replaces the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 with a preset password. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 includes an authentication service machine that performs comparison and authentication, and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 includes a display operation unit 222 having display and operation functions, and a display area of the display device 16A. Camera section that captures the displayed 2D code, analyzes the captured 2D code, and records setting changes and confirmations Information, an extraction unit for extracting a URL, an input screen display control unit for displaying a password input screen for inputting a password, and an input password on the password input screen transmitted to the server device 240 based on the URL. The configuration includes an authentication result acquisition unit that acquires the notified authentication result, and a history information display control unit that displays setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 when the acquired authentication result is correct.

  With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A with the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and sends the two-dimensional code to the portable wireless communication terminal 220 through authentication by the server device 240. The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also an unauthorized operation can be performed. It will be possible to determine whether it is a time to investigate an action.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1A and a gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is a time to investigate a fraudulent activity.

  As above, the gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described including its operation and effect. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[10-25. Example of application to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to a pachislot. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachislot, a procedure for executing a setting change process and a setting confirmation process is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the pachi-slot, the processing shifts to the setting change process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or when the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is determined.

  In order to be able to display the history of the setting change, the main CPU of the pachi-slot inputs the signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key after the setting change described above has been performed, and then confirms that the start lever has been operated. When receiving the signal indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU transmits data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value. In addition, the main CPU of the pachislot configures a control unit that performs control related to the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

  On the other hand, if the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that a setting change has been made, the sub CPU sets operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting change has been made, and RTC Then, the date and time data that is currently timed, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received, is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a as setting change confirmation history information. The sub CPU of the pachislot constitutes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit. The sub CPU constitutes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit.

  In the pachislot, the confirmation of the set value means that the set key is operated (turned to the right) and the current set value is displayed on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. . As described above, the pachi-slot shifts to the setting confirmation process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is on, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The setting switch of the pachi-slot constitutes a setting unit which enables the setting value to be changed or confirmed together with the main CPU.

  In order to be able to display the set value check history, the main CPU checks the set value by the above-described operation, and confirms the set value by inputting a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the set key. And a setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are transmitted to the sub CPU.

  On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information representing setting confirmation) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received is stored as setting change confirmation history information in the subwork RAM 2100a functioning as a backup memory. The sub-work RAM 2100a can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state.

  The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hole menu display process for displaying a hole menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot. The hole menu screen displayed in the pachislot is replaced with “total prize ball information” displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "medal information" displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hole menu screen displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

  In pachislot, browsing refers to operating the setting key (turning to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hole menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the subwork RAM 2100a is displayed, for example, as a setting change / confirmation history screen, on condition that the main button is pressed in a state where the main button is pressed.

  The sub CPU of the pachislot executes processes similar to the processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as a hole menu process, a setting change / confirmation history process, a maintenance process, and an authentication process. can do. When the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to a pachislot machine, the hole menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. A screen similar to the screen displayed when the input password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the portable wireless communication terminal.

  In the pachislot, when “bonus win” is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of “SBB”, “BB”, and “RB” is determined by the bonus allocation lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, one of "SBB or BB" and "RB" is determined by the bonus sorting lottery, and one of "SBB" and "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. You may.

  In the pachislot, the “BB precursor flag” is on when the “SBB” or “BB” precursor game is being played. That is, the precursor games of “SBB” and “BB” are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which a precursor flag for “SBB” and a precursor flag for “BB” are provided. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “BB”.

  In the pachislot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART end on condition that each of the games of the staying game number has been consumed, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that a predetermined number of navigations (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of staying games of “SBB” in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, “100”, and similarly to “BB”, the number of games added to the number of staying games during “SBB” may be increased. A configuration in which addition (addition) is performed may be employed.

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of games in which the effects of additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in the BR may be fixed to, for example, “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional games A, B, and C are determined, “2” may be set in the additional game game counter. However, the number of games in which the additional A, B, and C effects are produced may be variable. For example, the value to be set in the additional game counter may be made different depending on the type of the additional game effect (addition game A, B, C).

  In the pachislot, the number of staying games of the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games, for example, “50”, or alternatively, a predetermined number of games may be set to one (for example, , One set of “50 games”), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of stay games of the second ART may be set to two sets of one set of “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games. In this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not decrementing the value of the ART game counter for each game. Further, an additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in the predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period is ended when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop sequence other than the forward pushing is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted from the next game after the irregular push is performed by "1" for each game. May be.

  Also, in the pachislot, as the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rotating accessory unit 122 having the rotating accessory 123 rotated by driving the stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[11. Appendix]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machine can be provided.

[11-1. Each gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1-1 to Supplementary Note 1-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the pitching tendency of each gaming table can be set arbitrarily, a structural element that affects the ball entry rate to the entrance and the balling tendency is determined. Alternatively, it is only possible to change the state of the control element according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment is necessarily large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving interest. is there.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-1 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 1-1
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
A variation pattern determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed by the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
A variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern;
A symbol display control unit that performs the symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol variation display) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, and stops and displays in a manner indicating the result of the lottery. For example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
With
The variation pattern table storage means,
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 4) that is defined such that the probability that the fluctuation time is determined to be a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases. 23 (a special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 23).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time, and thus the more the lottery results. Expectation is raised, and it becomes possible to improve game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of executions of the lottery from a specific time is further provided.
The variation pattern table storage means,
As the setting value set by the setting change control means increases, the probability of being determined as the short variation pattern becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table. And a special symbol change time determination table when the indicated change number is 1001 or more.
The variation pattern determination means,
When the number of times of execution of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols has been performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the number of lotteries executed by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, a variation pattern can be determined using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time increases remarkably, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times of execution, the degree of expectation of the player is increased, and it is possible to improve the gaming interest. Note that the “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, a case where a big hit lottery of a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to progress even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the display of the symbol is changed (for example, the display of the change of the special symbol), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery on the symbol change display, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of appropriateness or inadequacy, The game is configured not to proceed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-2 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 1-2,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118);
A display effect (for example, a display device 16) on which a symbol effect by a predetermined symbol (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed, and a result of the lottery can be indicated by a stop mode of the symbol;
A stop mode determining unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S205) for determining a stop mode of the symbol that can be shown on the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
A stop mode table storage unit (for example, a sub-main ROM 2050) that stores a stop mode table (for example, a decorative symbol determination table in FIG. 24) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining unit;
A symbol effect control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S207) for controlling the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination unit;
When the symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a first mode, a second mode, or a specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of profits that are advantageous to the player (For example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 20) for giving any profit among (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit);
With
The profit providing means,
The symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and when the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits are displayed. Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit with a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, a 10R probability variable jackpot),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases, the probability that the symbol stop mode is stopped in the specific stop mode is increased. The stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be raised.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the symbol stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control unit is the same, regardless of the setting value, while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. , The symbol stop mode is determined so that the probability of the symbol stop mode being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting change is performed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means becomes higher, the probability of stopping in the specific stop mode is increased, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. In addition, even if the stop mode of the symbol is determined to be stopped in the specific stop mode by the stop mode determination unit, a game control unit that controls so that the game cannot proceed (for example, the process of step S722 is executed) Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a decorative symbol fluctuating effect) is being performed, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a specific result and that the pattern stop mode is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining whether game information is appropriate or inappropriate. When it is determined that the game is not proceeded. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-3 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 1-3,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, including a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery);
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing a selection rate of a main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in FIG. 26 or 27 is a big hit);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing at least a variable display of symbols,
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) for performing a variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner indicating the result of the lottery;
The symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, Toku-zu 1-1 to Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-1 to Toku-zu 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit providing means (for example, FIG. 20 of FIG. 20) that provides one of a plurality of profits (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit) that are advantageous to the player. A main CPU 101 for executing a jackpot game control);
With
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables storing different lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability change big hit) among the plurality of profits in accordance with a set value are stored.
The lottery means,
The lottery is configured to be able to be performed using a lottery table corresponding to a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having relatively high advantages differ according to the set value, the setting change control means sets the lottery. It is possible to vary the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value thus set, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to a player and a high-probability game state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability in a game state after the completion of the special game state is provided. And
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs according to a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time reduction game state) is further provided,
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state is different depending on a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state is different depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the symbol change display is being performed, if the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit, a lottery for the symbol change display is performed. Even if the result is the result of giving the specific profit, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed,
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery relating to the variable display of the symbols is a result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-4 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 1-4
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery in different lottery modes based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of game balls into each of the plurality of starting ports (for example, a main lottery that can execute the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) CPU 101);
Special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game;
With
The special lottery means,
In performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, the special lottery is performed in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control unit. Can be done differently,
The specific game execution means,
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, a higher frequency is obtained when a game ball enters the second start port than when a game ball enters the first start port. The specific game is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and the probability of the specific result can be changed regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means. The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second start port than when the game ball enters the first start port. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific game in accordance with the set value on the assumption that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve interest.

  Note that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when a game ball enters the second start port than when a game ball enters the first start port". When a game ball enters the starting port of the game ball, a hit determination (including a probability of 0) for a specific result is performed, but the probability that the specific result is obtained in the hit determination is entered for the second starting port. This includes not only a mode lower than the above but also a mode in which a hit determination situation for a specific result is not performed when a game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20) for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port;
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable starting control means (for example, , Main CPU 101);
The first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball is moved to the second starting port (first starting port 440). Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variation display of the second special symbol based on the approach;
The first game state (for example, a normal game in which both the probable change flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF) such that the time (for example, an average time of 1000 seconds) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol affects the progress of the game. State), or a second game state (for example, a shorter time of the variable display (for example, average time 1 sec) of the second special symbol is shorter than a time (for example, an average time 10 sec) of the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a favorable game state in which the probable change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second gaming state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. In addition, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the suitability determination means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball enters the start opening (for example, the second start opening). Is determined, the game cannot be advanced without executing the specific game by the specific game execution means even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if a game ball enters a starting port (for example, a second starting port), a special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, Before the result of the second special lottery is indicated (for example, during the special symbol change display), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-5 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary note 1-5,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port,
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on a result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
A normal starting port (for example, a passing gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 20) for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port;
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable starting control means (for example, , Main CPU 101);
Based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific area in which a specific port is provided. A specific area variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that a game ball can easily enter (for example, receive) the game ball;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on a game ball being received in the specific port provided in the specific area;
With
The specific area variable control means,
The predetermined movable piece is configured to be actuated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area may vary according to the set value set by the setting change control unit. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result is made different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and the opportunity to give the privilege can be made different according to the set value, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
The ease of entry (e.g., acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (e.g., the probability of a normal hit is changed, By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is reduced by the set value. It is characterized in that it is performed in such a way that it can be different depending on

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will be different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
By making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is improved. Is performed in such a manner as to be different depending on the set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege granted based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area is different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting port, when it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing of step S722 A main CPU 101 for execution);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), even if a game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is displayed (for example, a special symbol) Of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined to be appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness of the game information Is configured such that the game cannot be advanced before the predetermined movable piece operates. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-6 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 1-6
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118);
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), a special game state control means (for example, executing the big hit game control of FIG. 20) which can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state). Main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, a step S169) in which a game state after the special game state is ended can be controlled to an advantageous game state (for example, a high-probability game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A main CPU 101 which proceeds with the game after setting a flag)
After being controlled to the special game state, a counting unit (for example, a main unit) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state. CPU 101);
With
The game state control means,
When the result of the lottery in the advantageous game state is the special result, the special game state is configured to be controllable,
When the number counted by the counting means reaches a specified number, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state,
The prescribed number of times,
The apparatus is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to the specified number of times, and the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
The prescribed number of times determining means,
The lottery for determining the specified number of times is configured to be performed such that an expected value for the specified number of times differs according to a set value set by the setting change control unit.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), the specified number of times that the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for the specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Therefore, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination unit, the counting unit may perform the counting even if the number counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the game so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the specified number (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or inappropriateness of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced without reaching the specified number of loops. I have. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-7 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 1-7,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, and step S118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control shown in FIG. 20). A main CPU 101 for execution);
Effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state;
With
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode that the higher the set value set by the setting change control means the higher the advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be longer as the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher. It is characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the lottery is performed in a mode in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect is performed. Can be longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not the special game state is being controlled, it is possible to extract a random number based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port,
The adequacy determination means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine the suitability of the game information,
The game control means,
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, a game progress non-permission that controls so that the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the appropriateness / inappropriate determination of the game information may be executed even when the gaming machine is controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. At the same time, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In order to solve the first problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 1-8 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 1-8,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., a continuously operated left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., a continuously operated right gate 1110);
An entry permitting unit (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances;
Different profits (for example, when the number of rounds is different, or when there is a starting port below the entrance), a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance. A profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 20) capable of giving the player different execution or not);
With
The approach permitting means,
Out of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball is configured to be different according to a set value set by the setting change control means. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. Thus, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance can be varied according to the set value set by the setting change control means. In addition, the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, so that the state of the game element according to the setting can be improved while improving the game entertainment. Can be suitably changed.

  Note that "a different profit can be given to a player when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance", for example, when a game is played at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs between when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting port which is a lottery trigger and the other entrance is a lottery This corresponds to the case where the winning port is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) for performing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Game information relating to the progress of the game including the information of the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and the variable display, the set value) Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the player is notified even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without giving a profit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the fluctuation display of the symbol, when the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit has not been given yet, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / inappropriate game information is determined in some cases. In this case, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness of the game information even though a profit may be provided to the player, the game proceeds without providing the player with a profit. It is configured so that it cannot be done. As a result, security can be ensured.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result, at least the first entry port and the second entry port are provided with entry validating means for validating the entry of a game ball (for example, a main device for operating a condition device) CPU 101).
The profit providing means,
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, an 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R big hit game state) having a profit degree higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a higher profit is likely to be given, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Becomes

  According to each of the gaming machines described in Supplementary Notes 1-1 to 1-8 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[11-2. Game machine of Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, for example, anomalies may occur in game setting values and the like, and security is ensured. Is hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

  In order to solve the second problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 2
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) for performing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440);
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of step S72 and step S82) that determines whether the game information is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving a game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
If the symbol information is determined to be inappropriate when the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the appropriateness / inappropriate determination of the game information may be performed when the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is possible to improve.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2 having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving security.

[11-3. Game machine of Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Third subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily imply a light design load. Hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

  In order to solve the third problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 3
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 for generating a random number value by executing a program);
Random number extracting means for extracting a random number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S73);
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, big hit random number determination table) for defining a total random number (for example, a range of big hit determination random numbers) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data); ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extracting means (for example, the process of step S118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data), the game is controlled to a special game state. Possible special game state control means;
With
The table storage means,
A lottery table in which at least the number of the total random numbers is different according to a setting value set by the setting change control means is stored,
The random number generating means,
The apparatus is characterized in that a total number of random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of being controlled to the special gaming state is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the random number for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Jackpot probability), it is possible to set the jackpot probability finer for each set value compared to a method in which the range of the jackpot determination random number is fixed and the number of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
When a random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the suitability determining means (step S1) determines whether or not the total random number generated by the random number generating means is suitable or not until the symbol variation display is started. S72, the main CPU 101 which performs the processing of step S82);
A game control means (for example, a main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game to be unable to proceed when the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be inappropriate, the game is not allowed to proceed. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[11-4. Each gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4-1 and Supplementary Note 4-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, a player can be arbitrarily set by setting the payout tendency arbitrarily. , There is a possibility that interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. It is in.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 4-1 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 4-1
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of winning ports (for example, a first starting port 420, a second starting port 440, and general winning ports 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including a starting port;
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) for granting a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on that a game ball is received in any of the plurality of winning ports;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
A display unit (for example, a display device 16) for performing at least a symbol fluctuation effect performed based on the result of the lottery;
When a variable effect of the symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening of the plurality of winning openings Setting suggestion means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the reception of the game ball at
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball is received in the specific winning opening when the symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect). Since the setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. In addition, when the symbol fluctuating effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
A specific mode determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) that determines whether to perform the symbol fluctuating effect in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect);
A specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening when it is determined by the specific aspect determining means that the symbol variation effect is to be performed in the specific mode; (For example, the main CPU 101);
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the specific winning opening is determined not at a fixed winning opening but randomly at any of the plurality of winning openings, so that it is possible to enhance amusement of gaming. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning opening be kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, it is interesting for the player to determine which winning opening should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the setting change control means sets the game information even if a game ball is received in the specific winning opening. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information on the set value;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not suggested yet, the game information storage is performed. Suitability or inadequacy of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness, the setting value set by the setting change control unit is determined. The game cannot be advanced without suggesting the set value information. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 4-2 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 4-2,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Starting ports (for example, first starting port 420, second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) for performing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control shown in FIG. 20). A main CPU 101 for execution);
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition relating to acceptance of a game ball to the starting port (for example, that an overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.) Setting suggestion means capable of suggesting value information (for example, a host control circuit 2100);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port. Since the setting value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. Further, the execution of the game is promoted so that the game ball is received in the starting port. In addition, `` the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port are satisfied '' means, for example, that although the game ball was received at the starting port and the upper limit of the holding was reached, It is assumed that there were no points, or points were accumulated when the game ball was accepted at the starting port and it was not suspended because it was at the upper limit of retention but the point reached the predetermined point, etc. But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The game control means,
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball is received in the starting port ( For example, even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc., a game progress non-permission means (e.g., a game progress non-permission means (e.g., , And a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition may be satisfied when a game ball is received at the starting port, in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness of the game information performed by the game ball being received by the starting port. When it is determined that the game is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means. As a result, security can be ensured.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4-1 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4-2 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the game element in accordance with the setting.

[11-5. Game machine of Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fifth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, payout management may not be easy.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payouts.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 5
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
Payout means (for example, a payout device 350) for paying out game media based on winnings as a result of the game;
Special game execution means (for example, A main CPU 101 for executing the jackpot game control in FIG. 20);
Data totaling means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of totalizing data relating to the game medium paid out by the payout means;
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
With
The data aggregation means includes:
All history totaling means for totalizing the data based on all game histories,
A set value-based history tally unit that totals the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine configured to display data totalized by the all history totaling means and / or data totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), either one or both of the data totaled by the total history totaling means and the data totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means can be displayed. Ball management can be performed easily.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5 having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily manage payouts.

[11-6. Game machine of Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, and thus the exchange of storage means for storing effect data necessary for executing the effect is performed. Is unnecessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that simply changing the specifications may lack interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 6 configured as follows.
(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 6
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game performance is determined in accordance with the set value. Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6)
A game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game with the game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
With
The game control means,
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on a game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means;
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big hit game control in FIG. 20) in which a privilege according to the set value set by the setting change control means is provided based on a result of the lottery;
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to execute a game with a different game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means on one gaming machine. It is possible to give a variety of ways to utilize the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means,
When the lottery is set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending the game,
When the plurality of set values are set to the second set value, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game controller (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, a probable loop specification);
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), although both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are controlled to the high-probability game state, the first game control means The high-probability gaming state may end prematurely without continuing to the next big-hit gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is controlled to the next special gaming state by the second gaming control means. It is greatly different in that it is continuously executed until In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine with a wider range. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving entertainment.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 6 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[11-7. Each of the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes 7-1 to 7-12]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Seventh task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or confirm the set value, or set the set value due to noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in the file name.

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by a person having authority, and the management requires convenience.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-1 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 7-1
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and an information screen for restricting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game even if the predetermined operation is performed Limiting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hole menu task when NO is determined in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing in step S317 when YES is determined in step S316). Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-2 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-2
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and at least one set value (For example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing the set value information as history information;
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The display control means,
A first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 124) in which history information not including the setting value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation; (For example, the host control circuit 2100 displaying the setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 124);
Second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 126) showing history information including at least the set value information on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, a host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 126).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information. Therefore, it is possible to cope with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 124) in which history information not including setting value information in history information is displayed, is displayed. On the condition that the screen is displayed, a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 126) showing history information including setting value information is displayed.

  The transmitting means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the information has been updated. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The second screen display control means includes:
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the second screen showing the history information including the set value information is displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the set value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, a case where an appropriate password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and information for restricting the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game It has a screen limiting means.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-3 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 7-3
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed, based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. And information screen display restricting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the hole menu display prohibition processing in step S318) for restricting screen display.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For this reason, once the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information screen cannot be browsed, and even if an unauthorized person attempts to browse illegally, it cannot be easily browsed and security can be secured. Becomes

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 7-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 7-4
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
A normal screen (e.g., a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (e.g., a player) and a specific screen (e.g., a gaming machine administrator) that can be viewed only by A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens, including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed, on the display unit; , And
The display control means,
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on when at least the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is turned on). Characterized in that it is configured to be displayed on the display.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be browsed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine manager) And an information screen that can be viewed only by the user. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated. It is configured not to be displayed unless there is. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to suppress unauthorized viewing.

  By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being viewable by an unspecified person, for example, when only the player who has registered as a member can view it, Since anyone can browse (if there is only a desire to browse), it can be said that the screen is a normal screen that can be browsed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if the user wants to view the information screen. For example, the information screen is a screen that can be viewed only by an authorized person such as a gaming machine administrator.

  Furthermore, in the information screen that can be browsed only by a specific person, the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information, so that it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restriction means for restricting the display of the information screen during execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301) The host control circuit 2100 terminates the hole menu task when determined, and the host control circuit 2100 executes the process of step S317 when determined to be YES in step S316).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-5 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7-5
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation;
An information erasing unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S3066 or step S3160) that deletes the history information from the second storage unit when a specific operation is received,
The information erasing means,
It is configured to receive the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the item of “clear”) is received, the history information is erased. Only when the condition is satisfied (for example, when the input password is appropriate), it can be accepted. For this reason, for example, even if an unauthorized person attempts to delete the history of the change of the set value, the confirmation of the set value, or the browsing of the set value for the purpose of fraud, the erase cannot be performed unless a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally erased. Further, for those who have the authority, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be improved.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 126) in which the history information includes the setting value information,
The information erasing means,
The history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. In addition, since such a useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, convenience can be improved.

  The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The information erasing means,
When the history information is deleted from the second storage means, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means as the history information can be deleted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by an authorized person, so that the convenience is improved. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one set operation information, one date and time information, and one set value information (for example, see FIG. 126). The information erasing means may delete the associated history information (for example, for each No shown in FIG. 126), or may delete the information for each of a plurality of items of information included in the history information ( For example, all of the items of the date and time, the operation type, and the setting value shown in FIG. 126 may be deleted.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-6 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 7-6
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The setting operation information includes:
It is information that can distinguish the operation type of the information indicating that the one set value has been changed or the information indicating that the one set value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means,
Regardless of the type of the setting operation information, a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are all shown as history information;
A specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the set value information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be selectively displayed. It is characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the setting operation information, the time information and the setting value information all correspond to a specific type of the setting operation information, and an information screen of a list shown as history information. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the set value information can be selectively displayed on a specific information screen displayed as history information, the convenience of an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) is improved. Can be.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, a case where an appropriate password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The transmitting means,
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
An information screen including the set value information in the history information can be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. In addition, since such a useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, convenience can be improved.

  The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-7 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-7
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
A normal screen (for example, a hole menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed based on a predetermined operation, and when a predetermined operation is performed in the normal screen, an information screen (in which the history information is displayed) A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen);
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. (For example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316).
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Until the display of the information screen is restricted, even if the number of times the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen is a plurality of times, as one browsing history. It is configured to be stored.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Further, the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  The information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one set history information. Is done. This makes it difficult for a person who has changed settings, confirmed settings, browsed an information screen, or the like for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of the browsing history, unlike the change or confirmation of the set value, the browsing is performed a plurality of times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to create a large number of histories intentionally.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-8 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7-8
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, discriminating whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed) Transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55) capable of transmitting the setting operation command).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing the setting information as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information;
A normal screen (for example, a hole menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed based on a predetermined operation, and when a predetermined operation is performed in the normal screen, an information screen (in which the history information is displayed) Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen).
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed, can be stored as one of the history information,
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one set value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, while both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed,
When the one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  By the way, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with the setting change history not stored in the gaming machine manager's memory. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the setting confirmation history. In addition, it is considered that a person who conducts fraud mainly views after confirming the setting, rather than viewing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation unit is operated, when one set value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browse history information are displayed. Is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information of the setting change history information and the viewing history information is displayed. This makes it possible to minimize the amount of history information displayed on the display unit, and to prevent the total number of histories from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to detect fraud.

  Note that "when the one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information among the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed." By storing only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed, and both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although the information may be stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these pieces of information may be displayed under the control of the display control means. The former is more preferable.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-9 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 7-9
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage unit exceeds a predetermined amount, a history deletion unit that executes control for deleting at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit (for example, , A host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S306).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  By the way, the above-mentioned history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the subwork RAM 2100a), but since the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means has an upper limit, the history information is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of the history information increases, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is deleted to record new history information. It prevents the situation that you cannot do it.

  Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is deleted". The history information may be erased by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage unit with the new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage unit. At this time, when there is a possibility that the history information exceeds the predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be deleted before storing the history information. Also, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage unit, if the history information exceeding the upper limit may exceed the upper limit when stored in the second storage unit, the history information may be stored in the second storage unit. At least a part of the history information may be deleted.

  The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and information for restricting the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game A screen control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for ending the hole menu task when NO is determined in step S301, and a host control circuit 2100 for executing step S317 when determining YES in step S316). It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-10 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 7-10
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed or the one set value is confirmed. Setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling to a setting confirmation state in which the setting can be performed;
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed is transmitted. A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display unit, and the setting change state or / and the setting can be displayed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of restricting display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends.
The display control means,
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without restricting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (for example, step S312, step S313). Can be executed) and
Even if the setting change state ends, control can be performed so that display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( Steps S313 to S316 can be repeated).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed on the information screen shown as the history information, various problems relating to the setting value can be viewed. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, since the information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security such that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen is ensured. In addition, at least when the setting change state is controlled, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the end of the setting change state. In addition, the convenience for the operator can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
In the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which the set value information on the one set value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the history screen is displayed, the set value information for one set value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. . In particular, since the set value information for one set value is useful information for sales, it can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The display control means,
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, when the reception unit receives specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. (For example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S316).

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forcibly performed when the receiving unit receives specific information related to the progress of the game. , The execution of the game is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and to suppress unauthorized use by an unauthorized third party while ensuring a state in which a game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, it is configured to be able to grasp that the game is executable without obstructing the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, , While the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, while the setting is changed or the setting is completely checked, and the LED 25 is completely lit in red.)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (4) above, in the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, a state in which a game can be executed without hindering a predetermined operation on the information screen from being performed. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the fact that the game can be executed.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-11 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 7-11
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed is transmitted. A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hole menu screen, a screen of a hole menu item) on which various information can be displayed in the setting state on the display means; And
The information screen includes:
A history screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is shown, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Menu screen) and at least a plurality of information screens,
The display control means,
A screen updating unit (for example, a step updating unit) that controls to display another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display unit. A host control circuit 2100 that executes processing of S3051, step S3057, step S3073, and the like;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed without performing the predetermined operation (for example, when the hole menu display process of step S302 is performed). If no item is selected in the process of step S303, the hole menu screen is continuously displayed. On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or more. Specific display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S317 when determining YES in step S3072) that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1), at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed on the history screen in which the history information is displayed as the history information. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed a setting value or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the history screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud has been performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, a non-history screen in which history information is not displayed is continuously displayed without performing a predetermined operation, but a history screen in which history information is displayed is terminated if a predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or more. I do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and viewed by an unauthorized third party. Note that “continuous display” also includes terminating the display once and displaying again. That is, it is important whether the display is performed or the display is not performed even when the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or more.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
When the history screen is displayed on the display unit in the setting state, it is configured to also display set value information on the one set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the history screen is displayed, the set value information for one set value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. . In particular, since the set value information for one set value is useful information for sales, it can be used for hall management.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 7-12 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7-12
The control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and the information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value can be stored. First control means having one storage means (for example, main control circuit 100);
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the first storage unit;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is operated and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed is set. A setting change state control unit to be controlled (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24);
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one set value is changed, a set value for the one set value The information (for example, the changed set value information when the set value is changed) and the erasing process for erasing the information stored in the first storage unit are executed. Transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55) capable of transmitting information (for example, an initialization command) indicating that
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information at which the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) A second storage unit (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing
Information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying on the display means an information screen on which the history information is shown at least in the setting change state;
Erasure execution information notifying means (for example, a display control circuit 2300, a sound / LED control circuit 2200 for controlling the sound output of the speaker 24, and a sound / LED for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25) capable of notifying that the deletion processing has been executed. A control circuit 2200).
The erasure execution information notifying means,
When the erasing process (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, a first mode (for example, in the display area of the display device 16) in which the erasing process can be grasped. A first notification means (host control circuit 2100) for notifying by a character display such as "RAM is cleared", a voice output such as "RAM is cleared", and the LED 25 is all lit red.
When the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control of the setting change state, it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process is executed than in the first aspect so that the visual recognition of the information screen is not hindered. The second notification means (host, for example, which does not perform display on the display device 16 and only issues a sound output such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized” and only the red light of the LED 25). A control circuit 2100).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed on the information screen in which the history information is displayed. Can be handled. In particular, when there is a possibility that a third party who has no authority has changed the set value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the fraud was performed. It is possible to do. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  The erasing process for erasing the information stored in the first storage means (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, and also when the setting is changed to the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the erasing process is notified in the first mode in which the erasing process is executed, so that the erasing process is executed by a third party without authority, for example. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is more difficult to grasp than in the first mode. Further, when the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control of the setting change state, an information screen showing the history information is displayed. In the second embodiment, the information screen is displayed so that the visibility of the information screen is not hindered. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A voice output unit (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined voice is further provided.
The second control means includes:
The apparatus further includes audio control means (for example, an audio / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling audio output from the audio output means,
The first notifying means,
Notifying that the erasing process has been performed using both the display unit and the audio output unit,
The second notification means,
It is characterized in that the execution of the erasing process is notified by using only the audio output unit among the display unit and the audio output unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the erasing process (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the notification is made by using both the display means and the sound output means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been performed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, the notification is performed using only the audio output unit of the display unit and the audio output unit, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasure processing while preventing the erasure processing from being performed, and to suppress the execution of the erasure processing by a third party who does not have authority, for example, while improving the convenience.

  According to each of the gaming machines of Supplementary Notes 7-1 to 7-12 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can cope with a problem related to a set value.

[11-8. Game machine of Appendix 8]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eighth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or confirm the set value, or set the value by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as a change of the control board or an unauthorized replacement of the control board.

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 8
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
With
The first control means includes:
At least when the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the one set value to a setting state capable of changing or confirming the one set value )When,
Storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information on at least the one setting value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means and capable of transmitting at least the set value information of the one set value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55) And having
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information, determine whether the one setting value is appropriate. Setting determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that determines whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match);
An abnormal-time process executing unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a set-value abnormal-time process) that executes an abnormal-time process when the setting determination unit determines that the one set value is inappropriate. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the second control means determines the suitability of the one set value by using the set value information about the one set value transmitted plural times from the first control means. It becomes possible. In other words, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of one set value, the one set value is normal, for example, when the first control means is exchanged improperly. Regardless of whether the set value is abnormal or not, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability of the one set value, even if the first control means is exchanged improperly, etc., for example, Compliance can be found immediately.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
It is also possible to transmit setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed,
The second control means includes:
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage unit capable of storing as history information. Means (for example, subwork RAM 2100a);
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as the history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  When transmitting both the setting operation information and the setting value information, the transmitting unit capable of transmitting various types of information to the second control unit may transmit these pieces of information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the information has been updated. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  According to the gaming machine of Additional Configuration 8 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to the set value.

[11-9. Game machine of Appendix 9]
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to a player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

  As this kind of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions in one device has been proposed. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505 discloses that in order to be pressed by a player and to give an impact to the player, the player jumps out of a main body of the gaming machine to a position largely protruding regardless of the operation of the player. A disclosed push button is disclosed.

(Ninth problem)

  By the way, in the case of checking the operation of the accessory, various sensors, etc., for example, a device having a plurality of functions in one device, such as a push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, has poor maintainability. There is a fear of concern.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions. is there.

  In order to solve the ninth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to attachment 9 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 9
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on establishment of a predetermined condition and execute a game that is advantageous to the player based on a result of the lottery;
An accessory (for example, an accessory group 1000) operable based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, a production button 62);
Various sensors (for example, a first starting port switch 421, etc.) provided for the progress of the game,
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
At least a maintenance item determination unit that determines a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the accessory, a function check of the composite unit, and a detection check of the various sensors (for example, the process of step S3084 An executable host control circuit 2100);
In deciding the maintenance item, a selection screen (see FIG. 132, for example) for selecting any one of a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the accessory, a function check of the composite unit, and a detection check of the various sensors. A maintenance screen display control unit that displays at least a maintenance screen (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that can execute the process of step S3083);
With
The maintenance item determination means includes:
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected in the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
The composite means having one but a plurality of functions is configured to be displayed on the selection screen so that an item can be selected for each function. It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of “staging button 2”)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as for the composite means having one but a plurality of functions, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen on which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since the information is displayed, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The composite means,
At least, having an operation function and a directing function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determination means includes:
When the item of the operation function (for example, the effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the item of the effect function (for example, the effect button 2) is selected. In such a case, it is characterized in that it can be determined as a maintenance item related to the staging function.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item relating to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item relating to the effect function is determined. Since it is configured to be able to be determined, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance for both the operation function and the effect function.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 9 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of a single device having a plurality of functions.

[11-10. Amusement Machine of Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on a result of a lottery performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine including a movable role that operates based on a result of the lottery is known. I have.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine provided with a first movable role and a second movable role, each of which has a different driving source, as a movable role that operates based on a result of a lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2018-15273).

(Tenth task)
By the way, in a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2018-15273 having a plurality of movable objects having different driving sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable objects having different driving sources may interfere with each other.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to reduce the burden of maintenance work even when the driving source includes a plurality of different movable roles. It is to provide a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the tenth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 10
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on establishment of a predetermined condition and execute a game that is advantageous to the player based on a result of the lottery;
A first character and a second character that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different driving sources,
Various sensors (for example, a first starting port switch 421, etc.) provided for the progress of the game,
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
At least a maintenance item determination unit (for example, a step) that determines a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the first accessory, an operation check of the second accessory, and a detection check of the various sensors. A host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the processing of S3084);
In deciding the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, selectable from among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the first accessory, an operation check of the second accessory, and a detection check of the various sensors) 132, a maintenance screen display control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the processing in step S3083).
With
The maintenance item determination means includes:
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected in the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
On the selection screen, not only the first character and the second character but also the operation confirmation when both the first character and the second character are operated are selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayed so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of “director 1 + 2” in FIG. 132 is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), not only the operation check of each of the first character and the second character but also the operation check when both the first character and the second character are operated. Can also be selected on the selection screen, so that the burden of maintenance work can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The maintenance screen display control means,
It is configured such that the operation confirmation when the second character is operated after the first character is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, “directing character 1 → 2” in FIG. 132). Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), even when the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check at the time of operation of can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
A third character that is operable based on a result of the lottery and has a driving source different from any of the first character and the second character;
The maintenance screen display control means,
When there is a possibility that the first and / or the second character and the third and the third character may interfere with each other when they operate, the first and / or the second character 132 is configured to be able to display the selection screen in such a manner that neither of the third character and the third character can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of “directing character 1 + 3” in FIG. 132 cannot be selected). )
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when there is a possibility that the first and / or the second character and the third character may interfere with each other when they are operated, the first screen is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select the mode of operating either the first and / or the second and third accessories, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 10 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-11. Each gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11-1 and Supplementary Note 11-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eleventh problem)

  By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, occurrence of power interruption or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a set value can be appropriately maintained.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 11-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 11-1
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is turned on, a state control unit that controls the one set value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, , A main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S24.
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is changed to the setting change state. The power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped or when the supply of power is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is performed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if, for example, a power interruption or the like occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, when the power is turned on thereafter, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change state or the power supply is turned off. Since the power is restored in the setting change state when the supply was stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is appropriately maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation where a set value is not set due to an unintended power interruption or the like in a setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The control means includes:
When the setting operation unit is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value determination unit that fixes the one set value to the changed set value (for example, And a main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2480.
The setting value determination means,
When the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when power is restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped, the setting operation unit is turned ON. And when the OFF operation is further performed, the one set value is set to the changed set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation is performed. Although it is necessary to once turn on the operation unit, by performing an operation that is not different from the normal operation such as turning off the setting operation unit, it is possible to determine one set value. Thus, even when the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, a complicated operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a set value is not set.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 11-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 11-2
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. Control means having means (for example, main control circuit 100);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
According to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit, the state after power is turned on, the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed, and the one setting There is a state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.) that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state capable of confirming a value. And
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and the power supply is thereafter turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. (For example, executing the processing of steps S22 to S28),
The power supply was stopped in the setting change state, and when the power was turned on thereafter, the control could be performed in the setting change state or the power supply was stopped regardless of the operation state of the setting operation unit and the specific operation unit. The power can be restored in the setting change state at this time (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the situation that the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like while securing the convenience for the operator. That is, the setting check state is a state in which one set value can only be checked and one set value cannot be changed. For example, even if an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, one set value can be checked. It is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed. For example, when an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power supply is thereafter turned on, the power supply is switched to one of a plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. Control, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is subsequently turned on, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By restoring the power, the convenience of the operator is secured, and the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power interruption or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The state control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is turned on, the control unit switches to the setting change state,
The control means includes:
When the setting operation unit is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value determination unit that fixes the one set value to the changed set value is further provided. Have
The setting value determination means,
When the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when power is restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped, the setting operation unit is turned ON. And when the OFF operation is further performed, the one set value is set to the changed set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation is performed. Although it is necessary to once turn on the operation unit, by performing an operation that is not different from the normal operation such as turning off the setting operation unit, it is possible to determine one set value. Thus, even when the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, a complicated operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a set value is not set.

  According to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 11-1 and Supplementary Note 11-2 configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining set values.

[11-12. Amusement Machine of Appendix 12]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Twelfth task)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player, because the set value is related to payout. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, generation of noise or fraud.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a set value can be appropriately maintained.

  In order to solve the twelfth problem, a game machine according to attachment 12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 12
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
A setting change state control means for controlling the setting operation means to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is turned on; (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24);
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) for determining whether the information stored in the storage unit is appropriate or not;
If it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is inappropriate, the control unit switches to an abnormal state (for example, a state where the processing of steps S722 to S727 is executed) (the processing of steps S722 to S727). A main CPU 101), and
In the case where the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting is not controlled to the changed state after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if an operation for deleting information stored in the storage unit is performed. Control is performed so that the game cannot be performed (for example, the process of step S1790 is not performed when NO is determined in step S1770), while control is performed so that the game can be performed when the setting is changed to the setting change state after power-on (for example, step S1770). A game execution unit (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S17) that executes a process of step S1790 when YES is determined in S1770 and YES is determined in step S1780.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, generation of noise or misconduct, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the gaming machine is not controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. When the game is executed, the game cannot be executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, and the game can be executed when the game is controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. . When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the set value is controlled to be changed so that one set value is always changed, The game can be executed, and the set value is appropriately maintained.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

[11-13. Attached note 13:
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Thirteenth task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or confirm the set value, or set the set value due to noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in the file name.

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 13 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 13
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
State control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is turned on (for example, a setting key is turned on). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.);
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, the game execution means (for example, in the setting processing in step S20 in which the game return processing in step S30 has not been executed yet, the game is executed, Although the setting process of step S20 is not possible, the game return process of step S30 is executed, and the main CPU 101 that executes a power-on process that enables execution of the game, and
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the change or confirmation of the one set value is performed can be transmitted by a transmission means (for example, A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed has been set, and a setting operation effect execution unit (eg, And a host control circuit 2100 for executing control for fully turning on the LED 25 in red via the audio / LED control circuit 2200).
The setting operation effect execution means,
Even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, until the predetermined period elapses, it is configured to be able to execute an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which a game cannot be executed. Further, even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. For this reason, it is possible to easily find such a fraud in the case where the setting value is illegally changed or the setting value is confirmed, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The setting operation effect execution means,
After the setting state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be visually recognized as a state in which the game can be executed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed in such a manner that the user can visually recognize that the game can be executed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The state control means includes:
A setting change state control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the one set value to a setting change state capable of changing the set value;
The second control means includes:
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). And storage means (for example, a subwork RAM 2100a) capable of storing as history information;
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of restricting display,
The display control means,
When receiving the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended by the receiving means, even if the setting change state has ended, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. The information screen is configured to be displayed (for example, the processing of steps S312 to S316 can be executed).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), in the setting state, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means, and when the setting state ends, the display of the information screen is restricted. Therefore, in the setting state, it is possible to cope with various problems related to the setting value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales. Furthermore, when the setting screen ends, the display of the information screen is restricted, and when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until a predetermined time elapses. Can display an information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is performed, the fraud can be easily found, and the fraud itself can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of Additional Configuration 13 with the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to the set value.

[11-14. The gaming machine of Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and a big hit game is performed if the result of the lottery is a big hit.

  As a gaming machine of this type, a long press effect that changes the execution mode of a specific game effect is performed on the operating means on condition that a predetermined long press operation is performed by a player, and a short press operation shorter than the long press operation is performed. 2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a continuous hitting effect on condition that a continuous hitting operation in which a pressing operation is performed a plurality of times is performed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, when a long press operation is performed within a long press operation acceptance valid period for determining whether a long press operation is performed, a long press effect is executed.

(14th task)
As in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if control is performed by judging whether a long-press operation or a continuous-stroke effect has been performed on the operation means, the control load increases, which is not preferable. .

  However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest by performing an effect capable of giving a further visual impact.

  In order to solve the fourteenth problem, a game machine according to attachment 14 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 14
A gaming machine capable of executing a main process (for example, a main loop process) in which various processes (for example, various request control processes) are performed every predetermined time (for example, 33.3 msec),
Predetermined operation means (for example, a main button);
An interrupt process is performed every time shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 1 msec), and based on the input state of the operation unit detected by the interrupt process, the main process can generate input information. Means (for example, host control circuit 2100);
With
The control means includes:
As the input information, after the input state of the operation means changes from the OFF state to the ON state, as the input information, after the input state of the operation means changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the ON state is maintained for a predetermined time. (For example, 10 frames), it is determined that the ON state has occurred periodically as long as the input state of the operation means continues to be ON for a shorter time (for example, 4 frames) than the fixed time (for example, 4 frames). An input information generation unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1309) that generates information that can be determined (for example, ON edge information with a repeat function);
Device control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing control of a predetermined device based on information (for example, the ON edge information with the repeat function) generated by the input information generation means. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), after the input state of the operation means changes from the OFF state to the ON state based on the input state of the operation means (for example, input information of the sub device), the ON state is constant. As long as the input state of the operating means continues to be ON for a shorter time than the predetermined time after it is determined that the ON state has continued, by generating information capable of periodically determining that the ON state has occurred, It is possible to easily perform control such as control of a continuous hit effect of the sub device and control of a long press effect.

  According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 14, it is possible to execute control according to the mode of the operation means while reducing the control load.

[11-15. Each gaming machine in Appendix 15-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery.

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device that emits light by a backlight is disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(15th task)
However, if the brightness of the light emitting means of the backlight is unstable, for example, the display of the effect image on the display device may be unstable, which is not preferable.

  In order to solve the fifteenth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 15-1 and a gaming machine according to attachment 15-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 15-1
Light-emitting means (e.g., backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
Data storage means (for example, FIFO data area) for storing drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the light emission means in a predetermined area;
A light emission drive unit (for example, an LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage unit to the light emission unit;
Data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S1346);
With
The data setting means,
The drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means is configured to set new drive data when the number of drive data settable in the predetermined area reaches the reference data number. And

  According to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 15-1 of the above (1), when the number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined data area in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number, the new drive data Is set, it is possible to output a control signal (for example, a signal equivalent to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of the SPI) output by the light emission driving means. It is possible to emit light stably without the need.

  Note that the above “reference data number” corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area) of the data storage means is up to 64, for example. Considering that the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means must not become 0, it is preferable that the number is two or more. The number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more pieces of luminance data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is, for example, two or more, and the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below the first number (eg, two), the second number is set. (For example, one) of luminance data may be supplemented.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 15-2
Light-emitting means (e.g., backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
Data storage means (for example, FIFO data area) for storing drive data (for example, luminance data) corresponding to the light emission mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area (for example, FIFO data area);
A light emission drive unit (for example, an LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in a predetermined area of the data storage unit to the light emission unit;
Data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S1346);
A timer means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1356) capable of timing an elapsed time since the drive data is set in a predetermined area of the data storage means;
With
The data setting means,
The drive data can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (the processing of step S1354 can be executed) based on the lapse of a predetermined time or more by the time counting means. And

  According to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 15-2 of the above (1), the drive data is stored in the predetermined area of the data storage means based on the lapse of a predetermined time or more. It is set in a predetermined area of the storage means. For example, if a certain process takes time, the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage unit is exhausted until the timing of setting the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage unit. There is a risk that it will. In this regard, according to this gaming machine, even if the drive data is not set in a predetermined area of the data storage means, the drive data is stored in the data storage means based on the lapse of the predetermined time or more. The drive data set in the predetermined data area can be prevented from becoming empty. Therefore, it is possible to output a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of the SPI) output from the light emission driving unit, and to stably operate the light emission unit without passing through a driver. It is possible to emit light.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of Appendix 15-1 and the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2, it is possible to suppress the light emission of the light emitting unit from becoming unstable.

[11-16. Each gaming machine in Supplementary Note 16-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery.

  As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that is provided for effects and decorations by causing a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting elements such as LEDs provided on the front side to emit light in a predetermined mode. . In addition, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, JP-A-2008-295551).

(Sixteenth task)
By the way, in recent years, the effect has become fancy, including a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting elements such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the luminance of the light emitting device is high, some players may feel it stressed. If the brightness of the light emitting device can be controlled by a player or the like, the player can adjust the brightness to a desired brightness, but that alone may not be enough.

  In order to solve the sixteenth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 16-1 and a gaming machine according to blowing 16-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 16-1
A first light emitting unit (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
Operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of levels;
A first light emission control means capable of changing the luminance of the first light emission means to any one of a plurality of levels based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host control circuit for executing the processing of step S1384) 2100),
A second light emitting means (for example, a board-side LED or a frame-side LED) provided separately from the first light-emitting means,
A second light emission control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1385) that can change the luminance of the second light emission unit;
With
The second light emission control means includes:
Changing the brightness of the second light emitting means to one of the plurality of levels at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It is characterized in that it can be configured.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the operating means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the second light is emitted at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed. While the brightness of the light emitting means is also changed, the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed to one of a plurality of levels, so that the degree of freedom in changing the brightness by the player can be increased. .

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Data storage means (for example, a data area of a FIFO) for storing drive data corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area;
Light-emitting drive means (for example, LSI) for outputting a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light-emitting means;
Data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S1346);
With
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means is the reference data number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, the drive data is newly set,
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the luminance is changed is set as the new driving data.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined data area of the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from a serial data output terminal of the SPI) output by the light emission driving means can be output, and the light emission means can be stably emitted without a driver. It is possible to do. In addition, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can emit light stably according to the set brightness.

  Note that the above “reference data number” corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area) of the data storage means is up to 64, for example. Considering that the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means must not become 0, it is preferable that the number is two or more. The number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more pieces of luminance data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is, for example, two or more, and the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below the first number (eg, two), the second number is set. (For example, one) of luminance data may be supplemented.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 16-2
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S45);
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16);
A variable display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) for performing a variable display of a symbol (for example, an effect identification symbol) on the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
A first light emitting unit (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
Operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of levels;
A first light emission control unit capable of changing the luminance of the first light emission unit to one of a plurality of levels based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control that executes the process of step S1394) Circuit 2100);
A second light emitting means (for example, a board-side LED or a frame-side LED) provided separately from the first light-emitting means,
A second light emission control unit (a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1392) that controls the light emission mode of the second light emission unit based on a predetermined request;
With
The second light emission control means includes:
Changing the luminance of the second light emitting means based on the operation of the operating means after the luminance of the first light emitting means has been changed and after the variable display of the symbol has been completed; (For example, the process of step S1399 is executed).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the operating means is operated, the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed. Further, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variable display of the symbol is finished. Here, since the light emission mode of the second light emitting means is controlled based on a predetermined request, the control load is minimized by changing the luminance of the second light emitting means after the symbol change display is completed. It is possible to change the brightness of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means while keeping the brightness to a minimum.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Data storage means (for example, a data area of a FIFO) for storing drive data corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area;
Light-emitting drive means (for example, LSI) for outputting a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light-emitting means;
Data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S1346);
With
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means is the reference data number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, the drive data is newly set,
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the luminance is changed is set as the new driving data.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined data area of the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from a serial data output terminal of the SPI) output by the light emission driving means can be output, and the light emission means can be stably emitted without a driver. It is possible to do. In addition, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can emit light stably according to the set brightness.

  Note that the above “reference data number” corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area) of the data storage means is up to 64, for example. Considering that the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means must not become 0, it is preferable that the number is two or more. The number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more pieces of luminance data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is, for example, two or more, and the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below the first number (eg, two), the second number is set. (For example, one) of luminance data may be supplemented.

  In addition, according to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 16-1 and the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 16-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player or the like to more appropriately adjust the luminance of the light emitting device.

[11-17. Supplementary note 17
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery.

  As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that is provided for effects and decorations by causing a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting elements such as LEDs provided on the front side to emit light in a predetermined mode. . In addition, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (see, for example, JP-A-2008-295551).

(17th task)
By the way, in recent years, the effect has become fancy, including a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting elements such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the intensity of the light received from the light emitting device is high, some players may feel it stressed.

  In order to solve the seventeenth problem, a game machine according to attachment 17 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 17
The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A first light emitting unit (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
Operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means to any one of a plurality of levels;
A first light emission control means capable of changing the luminance of the first light emission means to one of a plurality of levels based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host control circuit for executing the processing of step S1394) 2100),
A second light emitting means (for example, a board-side LED or a frame-side LED) provided separately from the first light-emitting means,
A second light emission control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1406) that can change the light emission mode of the second light emission unit;
With
The second light emission control means includes:
Based on the operation of the operating means, the mode of the light emission effect executed by the second light emitting means is restricted and executed at a timing different from the timing at which the luminance of the first light emitting means is changed. It is characterized in that it can be configured.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the operating means capable of changing the luminance of the first light emitting means is operated, the mode of the light emitting effect executed by the second light emitting means is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the intensity of the light received from the second light emitting unit with a simple process.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Data storage means (for example, a data area of a FIFO) for storing drive data corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area;
Light-emitting drive means (for example, LSI) for outputting a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light-emitting means;
Data setting means for setting the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S1346);
With
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means is the reference data number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined area, the drive data is newly set,
When the operating means is operated, the driving data after the luminance is changed is set as the new driving data.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of drive data that can be stored in the predetermined data area of the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from a serial data output terminal of the SPI) output by the light emission driving means can be output, and the light emission means can be stably emitted without a driver. It is possible to do. In addition, when the brightness is changed, the changed drive data is set as new drive data, so that the first light emitting means can emit light stably according to the set brightness.

  Note that the above “reference data number” corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a FIFO data area) of the data storage means is up to 64, for example. Considering that the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means must not become 0, it is preferable that the number is two or more. The number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient that at least two or more pieces of luminance data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is, for example, two or more, and the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below the first number (eg, two), the second number is set. (For example, one) of luminance data may be supplemented.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine of attachment 17, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a player or the like can appropriately adjust the intensity of light received from the light emitting device.

[11-18. The gaming machine of Appendix 18]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine in which an effect depending on an RTC (real-time clock) is performed is known.

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that determines an abnormality of an RTC when power is turned on, notifies a date and time when there is an abnormality, and can quickly cope with the abnormality when an abnormality of the RTC is recognized. It is publicly known (for example, see JP-A-2017-51853 (for example, paragraph [0094])).

(18th task)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51853, if there is an abnormality in the RTC, the date and time is reported. There is a possibility that the effect that does not become possible.

  In order to solve the eighteenth problem, a game machine according to attachment 18 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 18
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) capable of outputting time information;
A time information management unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1413) that acquires time information from the real-time clock and that can update the acquired time to current time information;
An effect executing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, an RTC effect) based on the current time information being specific time information (for example, a specified time);
Abnormality determining means for determining abnormality of the real-time clock (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1414);
With
The time information management means,
If it is determined that the real-time clock is abnormal, the previous time information previously obtained by the time information management unit is maintained as current time information (for example, step S1415), and it is determined that the real-time clock is normal. Then, the previous time information can be updated to the current time information (for example, the processing in step S1416),
The effect executing means,
The specific effect is executed on condition that the current time information is the specific time information (YES in step S1417) and the previous time information and the current time information do not match (YES in step S1418) (step S1419). ).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to suitably perform an effect depending on the RTC.

[11-19. Game Machines of Supplementary Notes 19-1 and 19-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on a display device or the like based on a result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started.

  As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine which decodes compressed image data, converts the decoded image data as appropriate, stores the decoded image data in a frame buffer, and outputs the decoded image data to a display device. (For example, JP 2014-87402 A (see paragraph [0100], for example)).

(19th issue)
In recent years, the variation of the effect image displayed on the display device has increased, and the control of the effect image tends to be complicated. In such a case, it is desired to efficiently control the effect image.

  In order to solve the nineteenth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 19-1 and a gaming machine according to attachment 19-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 19-1
A gaming machine capable of executing a process (for example, a bank flip) of switching between a drawing output destination buffer having a drawing function and a frame buffer having a display function.
Registration means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 capable of executing step S1449 and step S1458) capable of registering image information (for example, composition) related to the effect image displayed on the predetermined display means in the drawing output destination buffer When,
After switching from the drawing output destination buffer to the frame buffer (for example, after the process of step S1446 is performed), the effect image is displayed on the predetermined display unit based on the image information registered by the registration unit. Effect image display control means (e.g., display control circuit 2300) for controlling the display to be displayed;
With
The registration means,
When the image information registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer includes image information for temporarily stopping an image (for example, when YES is determined in step S147), First registration means for registering image information in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, a display control circuit 2300 for executing the processing of step S1449);
Even if there is no image information registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, even if it is determined to be NO in step S1444), the effect image displayed on the predetermined display means is registered in the frame buffer. When the upper limit of the image information is reached (for example, when YES is determined in step S1450), the second registration unit (for example, step S1458 which can execute step S1458) registers the image information in the drawing output destination buffer. Display control circuit 2300).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), while the image information is registered on the condition that the image information is not registered, even if the image information is registered, the specific Since the image information is registered when the image information is included, it is possible to efficiently control the effect image.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 19-2
A plurality of display means (for example, a display) capable of reproducing a predetermined effect image;
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of controlling image information related to the effect image reproduced on the plurality of display means;
With
The display control means,
A number-of-layers determining unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1441) that determines the appropriateness of the number of layers relating to image information reproduced simultaneously by the display unit;
When the number of layers is appropriate (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1441), the number of display means determining means for determining the appropriateness of the number of display means used for reproducing the effect image (for example, step A display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of S1442);
When the number of display units used for reproducing the effect image is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1442), a display unit that determines the presence of a display unit to be registered with the image information is present Determining means (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1443);
When there is a display unit to which the image information is to be registered (for example, when YES is determined in step S1443), an image information registration unit for registering the image information reproduced on the display unit (for example, step S1449) And a display control circuit 2300 that executes the processing of step S1458).
After registering the image information reproduced on one of the plurality of display units by the image information registration unit, the image information is registered on another display unit different from the one display unit. In addition, the determination by the number-of-display-means determination means and the determination by the presence-of-display-means determination means are performed (the processing of performing the processing of step S1449 and then performing the processing of returning to step S1442).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when there are a plurality of display means and the number of layers relating to the image information is appropriate, after the image information relating to the effect image displayed on one display means is registered. Since the image information related to the effect image displayed on another display means different from the one display means is registered, it is possible to efficiently register the image information determined to have the appropriate number of layers. Become.

  As described above, according to the gaming machines of Appendix 19-1 and the gaming machines of Appendix 19-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently performing control relating to effect images.

[11-20. Each gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 20-1 and Supplementary Note 20-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, sound effects are also output.

  As a gaming machine of this type, it is determined whether or not the timing to determine the abnormality of the digital amplifier has been reached. For example, when the operation determination timing to be determined at a time interval of about several seconds has been reached, the input port Pi2 is used. There is known a gaming machine that acquires an abnormality notification signal ERR and determines whether or not a digital amplifier is at an abnormal level (see JP-A-2006-209723 (for example, paragraphs [0178] and [0179])).

(20th issue)
In recent years, due to an increase in variations of effect images displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like, the effect contents have been advanced, and the interest has been improved. However, with the sophistication of production contents, the production contents of game sounds also tend to be sophisticated, and in order to output normal game sounds, it is necessary to properly determine the amplification device that amplifies the game sounds. There is.

  In order to solve the twentieth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 20-1 and a gaming machine according to attachment 20-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 20-1
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (eg, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time elapses,
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound;
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means;
An abnormality determining means for performing an abnormality determining process for determining whether or not the amplifying hand is normal (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for performing the processing of step S1503, step S1511, step S1515, and the like);
With
The abnormality determining means includes:
The abnormality determination processing can be performed by dividing the abnormality determination processing into a plurality of abnormality determination processings (for example, processing of step S1503, step S1511, step S1515, and the like).
In the one predetermined process (for example, one frame) executed within the predetermined time, a part of the abnormality determination process (for example, step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515) divided into the plurality of times is performed, It is characterized in that part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing after the next time.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the predetermined processing (for example, one frame), a part of the abnormality determination processing of the amplification unit (for example, the normal amplifier or the bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames. In addition, it is possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification unit over a plurality of frames.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (eg, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time elapses,
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound;
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means;
Setting information checking means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, etc.) for checking the setting information of the amplifying means;
With
The setting information confirmation unit includes:
The confirmation process can be performed by dividing into a plurality of confirmation processes,
A part of the confirmation process divided into the plurality of times in one predetermined process executed within the predetermined time (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, and the like) And a part or all of the remaining confirmation processing can be executed in the predetermined processing from the next time.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), a part of the confirmation processing of the setting information of the amplifying means (for example, the normal amplifier or the bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire process of confirming the setting information of each amplifying unit over a plurality of frames.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 20-2
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (eg, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time elapses,
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound;
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means;
The abnormality determination process for determining whether or not the amplifying means is normal can be performed by dividing the abnormality into a plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, the process of check status = 0, 2, and 3). An abnormality determination unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing of step S1503, step S1511, step S1515, and the like) that performs the determination processing over a plurality of times of the predetermined processing;
A progress management unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that manages a check status) that manages the progress of the abnormality determination process;
With
The progress management means includes:
It is possible to determine whether one of the plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, the process of check status = 0, 2, 3) is completed in one predetermined process,
The abnormality determining means includes:
When the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of the check status 0) is completed in the one predetermined process, another one different from the one abnormality determination process in the next or later (for example, the next frame or later) predetermined process. If an abnormality determination process (for example, check status 2 process) is executed and the one abnormality determination process (for example, check status 0 process) is not completed in the one predetermined process, the next and subsequent predetermined processes are performed. The one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of the check status 0) is configured to be executable again.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), in the predetermined processing (for example, one frame), a part of the abnormality determination processing of the amplification unit (for example, the normal amplifier or the bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames. In addition, it is possible to execute all of the abnormality determination processing of each amplification unit over a plurality of frames. In addition, if one abnormality determination process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one abnormality determination process is performed in the next or later (for example, next frame or later) predetermined process. Since the processing is executed again, any abnormality determination processing is executed until completion.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 20-2 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (eg, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time elapses,
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound;
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means;
The process of confirming the setting information of the amplifying means can be executed by dividing the process into a plurality of confirmation processes (for example, the process of check status = 1, 5). Setting information confirmation means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, and the like);
A progress management unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that manages a check status) that manages the progress of the setting information confirmation process;
With
The progress management means includes:
It is possible to determine whether one of the plurality of confirmation processes (for example, the process of check status = 1, 5) has been completed in one predetermined process,
The setting information confirmation unit includes:
When the one confirmation process (for example, the process of check status = 1) is completed in the one predetermined process, another confirmation process different from the one confirmation process (for example, check status = 5), and if the one confirmation process is not completed in the one predetermined process, the one confirmation process can be executed again in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), a part of the confirmation processing of the setting information of the amplifying means (for example, the normal amplifier or the bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to execute the entire process of confirming the setting information of each amplifying unit over a plurality of frames. In addition, if one confirmation process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or an interrupt process), the next confirmation process is performed in the next and subsequent (for example, next frame and later) predetermined processes. Since the process is executed again, all the confirmation processes are executed until the process is completed.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20-1 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing the determination process of the amplifying device.

[11-21. Each gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 21-1 and Supplementary Note 21-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine that writes a SAC number into a voice control register to cause a simple access controller to function and output voice data such as a game sound from a voice memory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H11-163873). 2017-79971).

(21st task)
In recent years, the variation of the game sound has increased with the increase of the variation of the effect image. For example, if a plurality of game sounds overlap, the effect of the precious game sound may be reduced by half.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned twenty-first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 21-1 and a gaming machine according to attachment 21-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 21-1
Setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of assigning sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel and setting the channel;
Sound output means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit) capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel;
With
The setting means,
In assigning sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction), any one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is transmitted for at least a predetermined time. A first setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) that sets the delay with (for example, one frame) or more delayed;
Under the condition that the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, it is determined to be NO in the process of step S1543), without delay for the predetermined time or more ( For example, in the frame, a second setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S1546 and S1547) for setting the plurality of pieces of sound information is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of sound information is set for one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, any one of the sound information is delayed. Since the setting is made, a sound effect by delaying (for example, a sound effect by silencing) can be enjoyed. On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying according to the situation, it is possible to ensure quickness of the process while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The specific sound information is
At least includes first sound information (for example, SHOT reproduction) reproduced only once and second sound information (LOOP reproduction) reproduced plural times,
The first setting means includes:
The apparatus is characterized in that the second sound information can be set with a delay of a predetermined time or more after setting the first sound information.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the second sound information to be reproduced a plurality of times is set with a delay of a predetermined time or more after the first sound information to be reproduced only once is set. It is possible to prevent the first sound information reproduced only once from becoming difficult to hear.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 21-2,
Setting means (for example, a voice / LED control circuit) capable of assigning sound information (for example, a SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel and setting the channel;
Sound output means capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel,
With
The setting means,
In assigning sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT + chain chain reproduction), one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is transmitted for at least a predetermined time (for example, loop reproduction). A first setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) for setting by delaying one frame or more;
Under the condition that the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, it is determined to be NO in the process of step S1543), without delay for the predetermined time or more ( A second setting unit (for example, in the frame) that sets the plurality of pieces of sound information (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that performs the processing of step S1546 and step S1547);
Has,
The second setting means,
When mute is set for all channels (for example, when it is determined to be YES in the process of step S1545), sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting (for example, the process of step S1546 is performed). On the other hand, when the mute setting is not for all channels but for one channel (for example, when NO is determined in step S1545), the mute setting is overwritten and sound information is set (for example, step S1547). ).

(1) According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, if the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, any one of the sound information is delayed. Therefore, a sound effect due to delay (for example, a sound effect by silencing) can be enjoyed. On the other hand, if the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, the plurality of sound information is set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying according to the situation, it is possible to ensure quickness of the process while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay. Further, when the plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, when the mute setting is set for all the channels, the sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting. When the mute setting for the channel is set, sound information is set by overwriting the mute setting. ) Can be secured.

  As described above, according to the gaming machines of Supplementary Notes 21-1 and 21-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately outputting game sounds.

[11-22. Supplementary note 22:
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine that outputs a sound that excites a game in conjunction with an effect image displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like (see, for example, JP-A-2014-144066).

(22nd task)
However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-144066, since the secondary volume is maintained at a fixed value and the volume of the production sound is controlled by the primary volume, it is necessary to increase the variation of the volume of the production sound. There is a limit.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned twenty-second problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 22 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 22
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound;
Sound data setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of setting sound data (for example, audio data) relating to a game sound output from the output means;
Volume control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing a sound request) having a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, CH1 to CH31) and capable of controlling the volume output from the output means;
With
The volume control means,
First volume control means (e.g., a volume control unit capable of changing information relating to the volume of all of the plurality of reproduction channels based on a predetermined operation (for example, a hardware switch operation or a screen operation by a user) being performed) A host control circuit 2100 for executing a volume control 2810 by a hardware switch, a user volume control 2820 by a volume setting screen, and a debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging.
A second volume control unit (for example, a first playback channel primary control 2840, a second playback channel primary control 2850, and a second volume control unit) capable of changing information related to volume for each of the plurality of playback channels. A host control circuit 2100) for executing volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data;
And the information relating to the volume by the first volume control means and the information relating to the volume by the second volume control means are multiplied to change the volume output from the output means. ,
The second volume control means includes:
Volume control (first reproduction channel primary control 2840) for controlling, for each reproduction channel, the information related to the volume to be changed when the predetermined operation is performed;
Even if the predetermined operation is performed for each reproduction channel, a volume that controls output of information related to a fixed volume before and after the operation is performed (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound when an illegal act is performed). And control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), the game sound output from the output means is defined by multiplying the information on the volume by the first volume control means and the information on the volume by the second volume control means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety in the volume of the game sound. In addition, the second volume control means controls, even if a predetermined operation is performed, for each reproduction channel, to output information relating to a constant volume before and after the operation is performed. Thereby, even if a predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to execute a control of outputting information related to a constant volume before and after the operation is performed only in a specific reproduction channel, not in the entire channel. .

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The first volume control means includes:
It is characterized in that information related to volume can be controlled by debugging volume control during debugging.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), at the time of debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is, and the work efficiency at the time of debugging can be improved.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving variety to the variation of the volume of the effect sound.

[11-23. Each of the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes 23-1 to 23-58]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine capable of adjusting the volume of a game sound output from a speaker by a player's operation (see, for example, JP-A-2011-229766).

(23rd task)
However, if the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by the operation of the game sound, there is a possibility that a sound whose volume is not desired to be changed, such as an error sound or a warning sound, may be affected. Is not preferred.

  In order to solve the twenty-third problem, a gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes 23-1 to 23-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 23-1
A plurality of output means (for example, speakers 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound;
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means;
Sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing a sound request control process) capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means;
With
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information (for example, output by the second playback channel primary control 2850) having information of a constant volume before and after the operation is performed even when the operation unit is operated. Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having information on the volume that is changed based on the operation of the operation unit. And
The plurality of output units include a dedicated output unit (for example, a dedicated speaker) used for outputting a specific sound and a shared output unit (for example, a shared speaker) used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound. And at least
The sound control means,
Regarding the dedicated output unit, a specific sound control unit (for example, a step) that can execute control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated. A host control circuit 2100 that executes S1559);
The non-specific sound control means (for example, the host executing step S1558) capable of executing control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means A control circuit 2100).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound outputs a constant volume before and after the operation is performed even if an operation hand capable of operating the volume is operated. Is controlled to be That is, the volume can be controlled, but a constant volume is output without changing the volume before and after the operation of the operation unit. Further, as for the shared output means used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound, the second information in which the volume information is changed based on the operation of the operator who can control the volume is output, It is possible to suitably adjust the volume.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The exclusive output means is a vibration speaker.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), it is possible to output a specific sound (for example, an error sound or a warning sound) at a constant volume from a vibration speaker.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
When power is turned on (for example, during various types of initialization processing in step S1201), dedicated output setting means (for example, executing the processing in step S1201) for setting which of the plurality of output means is to be the dedicated output means A host control circuit 2100),
The data relating to the specific sound (for example, audio data relating to the specific sound specified by the SAC number) specifies that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated output unit. And

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the power is turned on, the output destination of the data relating to the specific sound is defined in the special output means, so that it is possible to set which output means is the special output means. At the same time, it is specified that audio data relating to a specific sound having a fixed volume to be output is output from a dedicated output unit, so that versatility can be improved.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 23-2
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound;
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means;
Sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing a sound request control process) having a plurality of reproduction channels and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means;
With
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information (for example, output by the second playback channel primary control 2850) having information of a constant volume before and after the operation is performed even when the operation unit is operated. Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having information on the volume that is changed based on the operation of the operation unit. And
The plurality of reproduction channels include at least a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound,
The sound control means,
Regarding the dedicated channel, specific sound control means (for example, step S1580) capable of executing control for outputting the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even when the operation means is operated. A host control circuit 2100 that executes
For the shared channel, non-specific sound control means capable of executing control for outputting the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, a host control for executing step S1581) Circuit 2100).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the operating means is operated, the dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound is controlled so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. . That is, the volume can be operated, but the volume is not changed before and after the operation of the operation means, and constant volume information is output. In addition, the shared channel used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound is controlled so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operator who can operate the volume, so that the adjustment of the volume is preferable. Can be performed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
When the power is turned on, a dedicated channel (for example, CH31, CH32) used for outputting the specific sound and a shared channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) used for outputting sounds other than the specific sound are set. Channel setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1201);
Sound information registration means (for example, a host for registering a SAC number) for registering sound information (for example, a SAC number) relating to data of each of the specific sound and the sound other than the specific sound in the dedicated channel or the shared channel. Control circuit 2100);
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the power is turned on, a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound are set and specified. Since the sound information relating to the data of each of the sound and the sound other than the specific sound is registered in each channel, versatility can be improved.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 23-3 is
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound;
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means;
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing a sound request control process) having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means;
With
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information (for example, output by the second playback channel primary control 2850) having information of a constant volume before and after the operation is performed even when the operation unit is operated. Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having information on the volume that is changed based on the operation of the operation unit. And
The sound control means,
Data determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing step S1599) for determining whether or not the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is specific data of a specific sound;
When the data discriminating unit determines that the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated. A specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing step S1600) capable of executing control for outputting the first information,
If the data discriminating means determines that the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific data, the second information is changed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operating means. And a non-specific sound control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing step S1601) capable of executing output control.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), when the data of the game sound being reproduced is determined to be the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. When the data of the game sound being reproduced is determined to be non-specific data, the sound volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is possible to perform it suitably.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 23-4
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound;
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means;
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing a sound request control process) having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means;
With
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information (for example, output by the second playback channel primary control 2850) having information of a constant volume before and after the operation is performed even when the operation unit is operated. Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having information on the volume that is changed based on the operation of the operation unit. And
The sound control means,
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. Specific sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing step S1621) capable of setting the first information in the reproduction channel,
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the reproduction is performed such that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. A non-specific sound control unit capable of setting the second information in a channel (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing step S1623) is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), if the sound information (for example, the SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific sound information, the constant volume is maintained even if the operation means is operated. When the sound information (for example, the SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the volume is controlled based on the operation of the operation means. Since it is changed, the sound volume can be adjusted appropriately.

(1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 23-5:
Output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound;
Operating means (for example, a volume setting screen) capable of operating the volume output from the output means;
A sound control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing a sound request control process) having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation means;
With
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having a constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 285). An audio signal to be output), second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first playback channel primary control 2840) having information on a volume that is changed based on the operation of the operation unit, Third information (for example, an audio signal output by volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 embedded in audio data) having volume information embedded in audio data specified from audio information registered in the reproduction channel. ) And defined by
The sound control means,
When the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (for example, sound data that is not affected by volume adjustment), Identification information setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1632) that previously sets identification information (for example, a flag indicating whether or not each channel is affected by volume adjustment) that can identify the presence of the channel; ,
In setting the volume for the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, the SAC number) can be identified by the identification information as the specific sound data (for example, it is determined as YES in step S1637). When the operation unit is operated, the first information can be set to the reproduction channel so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. A host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of S1641);
In setting the volume for the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information can be identified by the identification information as not the specific sound data (for example, when NO is determined in step S1637), the operation is performed. Second volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the processing of step S1638) capable of setting the second information to the reproduction channel so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the means;
In setting a volume for the reproduction channel, the apparatus further includes a third volume setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1644) for setting third information to the reproduction channel.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), identification information capable of identifying that the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data is set in advance and specified from the sound information. When the sound information can be identified by the identification information as specific sound data, a setting is made so that a constant volume is output even if the operation means is operated. Also, the sound volume is set to be changed based on the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel. Further, third information having volume information embedded in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is set in the reproduction channel. In this way, it is possible to suitably adjust the volume.

  In the gaming machine described above, when the sound data specified from the sound information (for example, the SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel can be identified by the identification information as the specific sound data (for example, YES in step S1637) When the operating means is operated, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. However, the constant volume in this case is information related to the maximum volume at all times. Is also good. However, even if the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (first information related to a certain volume), the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, SAC number) ) Is multiplied by the volume incorporated in the sound data specified in the above, the output volume may not be constant.

  As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Supplementary Notes 23-1 to 23-5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately adjusting the volume.

[11-24. The gaming machine of Appendix 24]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game in which a light emitting means composed of a light emitting body such as an LED is provided on the front side of the game machine, and a light emitting effect of lighting or flashing the light emitting means in a predetermined mode is known. ing.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine capable of adjusting the luminance of a light emitting unit by, for example, an operation by a player or the like (see, for example, JP-A-2008-295551).

(24th task)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295551, the luminance of the light emitting means can be challenged by an operation by a player or the like, but if the light emitting means can emit light in full color, the light emission is changed. There is a risk that the color will change significantly.

  In order to solve the twenty-fourth problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 24 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 24
Predetermined light emitting means (for example, a lamp (LED) group 25);
Operating means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) operable to select the brightness of the light emitting means;
A storage unit (for example, an attenuation table) that stores a luminance information table (for example, an attenuation table) in which luminance information is set for each of a plurality of colors (for example, RGB) as luminance information (for example, a luminance attenuation rate) relating to the luminance of the light emitting unit. Sub-main ROM 2050),
When brightness is selected by the operation means, a brightness control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the brightness of the light emitting means based on the brightness information table;
With
The storage means,
A brightness information table in which the brightness information is set for each of the plurality of colors is stored in correspondence with brightness selectable by the operation means,
The brightness control means,
Based on the luminance information table corresponding to the luminance selected by the operation means, the luminance of the light emitting means can be controlled so that the blue attenuation rate is the largest and the red attenuation rate is the smallest among the plurality of colors. It is characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), based on the luminance information set for each of the plurality of colors, the light emitting means such that the blue attenuation rate is the largest and the red attenuation rate is the smallest among the plurality of colors. Is controlled, for example, even if the luminance of the light emitting means is changed by an operation of a player or the like, it is possible to suppress a change in the light emitting color, that is, to maintain the white balance.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of changing luminance while suppressing a change in emission color.

[11-25. Supplementary note 25:
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a movable body is provided on a game board, and the movable body is actuated to give an impact to a player and increase the desire for a game. (See, for example, JP-A-2006-288694).

(25th task)
For example, in a gaming machine in which a movable body is operated as disclosed in JP-A-2006-288694, the movement of the movable body has been diversified in recent years, and accordingly, control for operating the movable body has been complicated. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load while giving a variety of movements of the movable body.

  In order to solve the twenty-first problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 25 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 25
Predetermined characters,
Control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory,
An operating member (for example, a solenoid) capable of operating a member constituting the accessory,
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs);
A plurality of connection units (for example, Port0 to Port23) capable of transmitting a signal to the connected light emitting unit by being connected to any of the plurality of light emitting units;
A light emission control unit (for example, a voice / LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the light emission unit by transmitting a signal to the light emission unit through the connection unit;
With
The operating member is
It is connected to any one of the plurality of connection portions, and is configured to be able to operate a member constituting the accessory by a signal from the light emission control means,
The control means includes:
An operating member connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions can be operated in synchronization with the predetermined accessory.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the number of operating members increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, the control for operating the accessory while maintaining the diversity of the movement of the accessory is provided. The load can be suppressed, and the accessory and the operating member can be synchronized.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load.

[11-26. Supplementary note 26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on a result of the lottery.

  As this type of gaming machine, compressed data is read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of a still image or a moving image displayed on a liquid crystal display, and the read compressed data is expanded and image data to be output to the liquid crystal display. Is known (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-159026).

(26th task)
However, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-159026, for example, when image data to be read out from a CGROM and image data to be output is generated, if the data amount is large, the load processing takes time. . In this case, a watchdog reset may occur even though the load processing is normally proceeding, which is not preferable.

  In order to solve the twenty-sixth problem, a game machine according to attachment 26 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 26
A read-only storage area (for example, a sub main ROM 2050 or a CGROM 2060) in which game data relating to the game is stored;
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 2100b or built-in VRAM 2370) from which game data relating to the game can be read and written,
A transfer execution unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the data load process of FIG. 93) that executes a load process of reading the game data stored in the read-only storage area and writing the game data to the volatile storage area;
A watchdog timer,
Clearing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) for clearing the clock of the watchdog timer when a predetermined time has elapsed;
With
The transfer executing means,
If the load processing exceeds a predetermined time, the watchdog timer is reset, and a load reprocessing unit (the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1656) that executes the load processing again is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the time required for the load processing by the transfer executing means exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the load processing is terminated and the load processing is executed again. Even if a long time is required, it is possible to automatically return.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 26, even when a long time is required for the loading process, the loading process can be favorably advanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The clearing means,
If the load processing has not exceeded the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is cleared (for example, the processing of step S1655), and the time of the watchdog timer is counted only when the load processing has exceeded the predetermined time. The error processing (for example, the processing of step S1656) is executed without clearing the data.
The transfer executing means,
The load processing is executed again as the error processing.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), the watchdog timer is cleared when the load processing does not exceed the predetermined time, but the watchdog timer is not cleared only when the load processing exceeds the predetermined time. Since the error processing is executed in the first step, it is possible to know that the load processing could not be completed due to the occurrence of the error.

[11-27. Game Machines of Supplementary Note 27-1 and Supplementary Note 27-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a starting port, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display for displaying an effect image is provided, and the effect image determined by lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display.

  In this type of gaming machine, lottery is performed in various situations. Such a lottery is performed by generating and acquiring random numbers. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-023629 discloses that the number of digits of a newly obtained random number is determined, a single digit is calculated from the reference random number by the determined number, and the calculated value is assigned to each digit. A method of arranging and obtaining a new numerical value is described.

(27th task)
In the random number acquisition process for acquiring random numbers, it is required that the acquired random numbers hardly have regularity. However, if the processing is complicated, the control load increases, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to perform random number acquisition processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in control load.

  In order to solve the twenty-seventh problem, a gaming machine according to attachment 27-1 and a gaming machine according to attachment 27-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 27-1
A gaming machine that performs a lottery using a predetermined random number,
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) capable of outputting time information;
A random number generation unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of FIGS. 95 and 96) that generates a random number used for a predetermined lottery;
With
The random number generation means,
Initialization means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a random number initialization process) that acquires time information from the real-time clock and generates an initial value of a random number using the acquired time information;
Non-stationary updating means (the host control circuit 2100 executing the processing of FIG. 96) for updating the random number when the generated random number is used for the lottery;
A regular updating means (the host control circuit 2100 executing the processing of FIG. 95) for periodically updating the random number even if the generated random number is not used for the lottery;
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the initial value of the random number is generated using the time information obtained from the real-time clock, the obtained random number can be made random, and the obtained random number is biased. Can be suppressed. In particular, since the initial value of the random number is related to the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, the initial value can be made different every time.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 27-2
A gaming machine that performs a lottery using a predetermined random number,
Random number table creation means (for example, executing the process of step S1704) for creating a random number table in which a plurality of random numbers are registered using any one of a plurality of random number seeds (for example, random number seeds a to h) Host control circuit 2100);
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number to be used for a predetermined lottery by referring to the random number table created by the random number table creation means (for example, in the random number acquisition processing of step S1706, the random number acquisition means A host control circuit 2100 for obtaining a random number);
A reference position updating unit that updates a reference position of the random number table at a timing different from a timing at which the random number table is created (a host control circuit that updates the reference position of the random number table when a random number is acquired from the random number table in step S1706) 2100),
With
The random number acquiring means,
After obtaining the random number by referring to the random number table, the random number used for the predetermined lottery can be obtained by referring to the same random number table in which the reference position is updated without creating the random number table (for example, The packet reception loop shown in FIG. 98 can execute the random number acquisition process in step S1706).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the random number acquisition opportunity occurs a plurality of times, the random number is acquired only by updating the reference position using the same created random number table. It is possible to reduce the control load while giving random numbers irregularities.

  As described above, according to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 27-1 and the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 27-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in control load. .

[11-28. Supplementary note 28]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variation display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on a result of the lottery. When the symbol stops in a specific combination, the game shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. In addition, various effects are performed when the symbol fluctuation display is performed,

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable auditorium, when a problem occurs such that the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position, processing for returning the movable auditorium to the initial position (retry processing) ) Has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2007-268038).

  In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on a detection result of the reference position sensor. Retry processing is being performed. Then, when a problem that the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position occurs, if the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position even if retry processing is continuously performed, it is determined that an error has occurred, and a predetermined error is determined. Processing is being performed.

(28th task)
However, as a problem related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the symbol change display is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that the error is an error even in the case of such a minor error, there is a problem that unnecessary error processing increases.

  In order to solve the twenty-eighth problem, a game machine according to attachment 28 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 28
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is stopped to execute one game, thereby enabling a game control means ( For example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100),
Effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member (for example, the accessory group 1000);
With
The game control means,
At least, the start information of the variable display of the symbol and the stop information of the variable display of the symbol can be transmitted to the effect control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
A first determination unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19141) that determines whether a state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a timing when the symbol change display is started;
When it is determined in the determination by the first determination unit that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a first restoration process (for example, an initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) can be executed so as to be normalized. First recovery control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19147);
A second determination unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19171) that determines whether a state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a timing when the symbol change display is stopped;
If it is determined in the determination by the second determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a second recovery process (for example, a motor driver reset process in step S19176) can be executed so as to be normalized. 2 recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19176).
The first determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the symbol change display is started,
The first restoration control means includes:
Each time the first determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games, the first recovery processing can be executed,
The second determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the fluctuation display of the symbol is stopped,
The second recovery control means includes:
Each time it is determined by the second determination means that the game is not normal in the plurality of games, the second recovery process can be executed,
The effect control means further comprises:
A first counting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144) that counts the number of times the first restoration process has been executed by the first restoration control unit;
Second counting means for counting the number of times the second restoration processing has been executed by the second restoration control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S19177);
The result of counting by the first counting means has reached a first specified number (for example, 10 times) and the result of counting by the second counting means has become a second specified number (for example, 10 times). When at least one of the above conditions is satisfied, there is provided an accessory disabled unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that sets an inoperative state (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) in which the operation of the movable member is not possible. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the operation of the movable member is determined not to be normal only by the first determination means, the operation is not disabled, and the first restoration process is performed. Similarly, if the state relating to the operation of the movable member is not determined to be normal by the second determination means, the operation is not disabled and the second restoration process is performed. Then, when the number of games in which the first restoration process has been executed has reached the first specified number of times, or when the number of games in which the first restoration process has been executed has reached the first specified number of times, the movable member is moved. Operation is disabled. Therefore, the operation is not disabled only when a minor error occurs, and the operation is disabled when the first recovery processing or the second recovery processing is executed over a plurality of games but cannot be recovered. Thus, occurrence of a serious error can be suppressed.

  In addition, the determination as to whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is made at each of the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is started and the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is stopped. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started and the timing when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the number of games in which the recovery process and the recovery process are executed is separately counted, and the number of times the recovery process is executed is performed. When either of them has reached the specified number of times, the operation is disabled, so that the occurrence of serious errors can be further suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Position detection means (for example, an accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, an initial position);
Driving means capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a prescribed position (for example, a maximum movable range);
Further comprising
The first determining means includes:
It is determined that the movable member is not normal when not at least at the specific position,
The second determining means includes:
When the driving means cannot move the movable member from the specific position to at least the predetermined position (for example, when a motor error is detected), it is determined that the movable member is not normal.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), it is determined whether the state related to the operation of the movable member, which is performed at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started, is normal, and the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is stopped. Since the determination as to whether the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is performed from different viewpoints, the accuracy of the error occurrence determination can be improved. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error with higher accuracy while preventing the operation from being disabled due to the occurrence of only a minor error.

  As described above, according to the supplementary note 28, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately perform error processing.

[11-29. Game Machines of Supplementary Note 29-1 to Supplementary Note 29-3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variation display of a symbol is displayed in a display area based on a result of the lottery. When the symbol stops in a specific combination, the game shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. In addition, various effects are performed when the symbol fluctuation display is performed,

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that performs an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor is known. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable auditorium, when a problem occurs such that the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position, processing for returning the movable auditorium to the initial position (retry processing) ) Has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2007-268038).

  In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-268038, a reference position sensor for detecting whether or not a movable accessory is at an operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on a detection result of the reference position sensor. Retry processing is being performed. Then, when a problem that the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position occurs, if the movable auditorium does not return to the initial position even if retry processing is continuously performed, it is determined that an error has occurred, and a predetermined error is determined. Processing is being performed.

(29th task)
However, as a problem related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is also a minor error that is resolved when the symbol change display is executed a plurality of times. If it is determined that such a minor error is an error, unnecessary error processing increases, which is not appropriate. On the other hand, production using movable auditoriums is an important factor in enhancing the entertainment interest, so if a game is played on a gaming machine with an error related to the operation of the movable auditorium, the decrease in interest will be denied Absent. Therefore, it is preferable that the gaming machine in which the movable auditorium cannot operate normally be managed by an authorized person in charge of the hall, including the determination whether to continue or stop the operation.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned twenty-ninth problem, a gaming machine according to Supplementary Note 29-1 to 229-3 in the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine described in Appendix 29-1
Control relating to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and a predetermined symbol is displayed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the change display of the symbol when the end condition is satisfied;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one set value;
Effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member;
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
With
The game control means,
At least when the power-on operation is performed in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, the setting change state control unit that controls the setting value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, in step S24). A main CPU 101 capable of executing processing, and capable of transmitting various information (for example, information relating to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 and step S19147) that determines whether the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game;
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, recovery processing is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset processing in step S19176). ), A recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100),
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means,
The determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine at a predetermined timing in each game whether the state of the operation of the movable member is normal,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the determination means is not normal in the plurality of games, the recovery process is configured to be executable,
The effect control means further comprises:
Counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing the processing of step S19144 and step S19177) for counting the number of times the recovery processing is executed by the recovery control means;
When the result of the counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory operation disabling means (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) in which the operation of the movable member is impossible (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) A host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19146 and step S19179);
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory operation disable means based on receiving the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed (for example, executing the process of step S311 And a host control circuit 2100).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the recovery process is performed only by determining that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal by the determination means, without setting the operation disabled state. Then, when the number of times the restoration process has been performed reaches the specified number, the movable member is set in the operation disabled state. For this reason, a minor error does not result in an inoperable state, but a recovery error is executed over a number of games, but when recovery is not possible, the inoperable state is set and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

  By the way, the effect using the movable member is an important element for enhancing the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, if the game is played on a gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally, the entertainment interest cannot be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine of (1), the movable member can be operated by releasing the inoperable state based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. It is possible to make an important determination as to whether or not to operate a gaming machine that has become inoperable by an authorized person in the hall, and prevent an unauthorized person from canceling the error motor operation stop state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Position detecting means (for example, a group of accessory detection sensors 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, an initial position);
The determining means includes:
A position determining unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when it is not at least at the specific position,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the position determining means that the movable member is not at the specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, an initial position restoration operation shift setting in step S19147) is performed. Position recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19147)
The release means,
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times the position restoration process has been executed counted by the counting unit is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the operation is not in the disabled state, when the number of times the position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position is performed is one or more, the position restoration process is performed. Can be reset based on receiving the setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. Therefore, the resetting of the number of times the position restoration process is executed is also performed by the person having the authority having the authority, not by the person having no authority, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) that can move the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepared,
The determining means includes:
When the drive unit cannot move the movable member from the specific position to at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal (for example, A host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S19171),
The recovery control means,
Operation restoration control for executing operation restoration processing for resetting the driver of the driving means (for example, motor driver reset processing in step S19176) each time the operation judging means judges that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Means (for example, a host control circuit 2100),
The release means,
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times that the operation restoration process has been performed counted by the counting unit is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the operation is not in the disabled state, when the number of times the operation recovery processing for resetting the driver of the driving means has been executed is one or more, this operation recovery processing is performed. The number of executions can be reset based on receiving setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times that the operation restoration process is executed is also performed by a person who has the authority and is not performed by a person who does not have the authority, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(1) The gaming machine described in Supplementary Note 29-2
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and has storage means (for example, a main ROM 102) capable of storing game information related to the progress of the game, When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is stopped to execute one game, thereby enabling a game control means ( For example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100),
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one set value;
A specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) operated at least when erasing the game information stored in the storage means;
Effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member;
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
With
The game control means,
When the operation of the specific operation unit and the power-on operation are performed in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, a setting change state control that controls the one set value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed. Means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24);
When at least the operation of the specific operation means and the power-on operation are performed, game information erasing means capable of erasing game information stored in the storage means (for example, the processing of step S2420 is executable). Main CPU 101);
And various information (for example, information relating to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed, and information indicating that the game information has been deleted) to the effect control means. Transmission is possible (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 and step S19147) that determines whether the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game;
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, recovery processing is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset processing in step S19176). And a recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing
The determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine at a predetermined timing in each game whether the state of the operation of the movable member is normal,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the determination means is not normal in the plurality of games, the recovery process is configured to be executable,
The effect control means further comprises:
Counting means for counting the number of times the recovery processing has been performed by the recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of steps S191444 and S19177);
When the result of the counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory operation disabling means (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) in which the operation of the movable member is impossible (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) A host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19146 and step S19179);
Release means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S311) that releases the inoperable state by the accessory operation disable means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
The release means,
When the setting change state is not controlled after power-on, even if an operation for erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the operation disable state is not released by the accessory operation disable means even if an operation is performed, It is configured to release the inoperable state by the accessory operation disabler (for example, execute the process in step S311) when the setting is changed to the setting change state after power-on.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the recovery process is performed only by determining that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal by the determination means, without setting the operation disabled state. Then, when the number of times the restoration process has been performed reaches the specified number, the movable member is set in the operation disabled state. For this reason, a minor error does not result in an inoperable state, but a recovery error is executed over a number of games, but when recovery is not possible, the inoperable state is set and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

  By the way, the effect using the movable member is an important element for enhancing the entertainment interest of the game. Therefore, if the game is played on a gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally, the entertainment interest cannot be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the above (1), when the game is not controlled to the setting change state, the inoperable state is not released even if an operation for erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, and the setting is not canceled. The inoperable state is canceled when controlled to the changed state. As a result, important decisions such as whether or not to operate a gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate can be made by an authorized person in charge of the hole, and an unauthorized person cannot cancel the error motor operation stop state. You can do so.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a specified position is further provided.
The determining means includes:
When the drive unit cannot move the movable member from the specific position to at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal (for example, A host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S19171),
The recovery control means,
Even if the determination unit determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation disable state is not set until the result of the counting by the counting unit reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times). A bonus effect non-permission means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19180) that sets a role effect non-permission state so that a performance using the movable member cannot be performed;
The release means,
If the setting change state is not controlled after turning on the power, even if an operation for erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the operation disable state by the accessory operation disable means is not released, The character effect non-permission state by the character effect non-permission means is configured to be releasable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation cannot be performed until the number of times the restoration process is performed reaches the specified number (for example, 10). Without making the state, the effect using the movable member is not permitted so that the effect cannot be executed. In the case where the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if an operation for erasing the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the operation inoperable state is not released, but the character effect non-permitted state About to cancel. In this way, the important judgment is made by the person in charge of the authorized hall, and the operation of erasing the game information when the error is not so serious as to be in an inoperable state, such as a state in which the production is not permitted, is performed. Convenience can be ensured by releasing the performance non-permission state.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 29-3
Control relating to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variation display of the symbol is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the symbol is displayed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the fluctuation display of the symbol;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one set value;
Display means (for example, display device 16) on which a predetermined image is displayed;
Effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member;
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
With
The game control means,
At least when the power-on operation is performed in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, the setting change state control unit that controls the setting value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, in step S24). A main CPU 101 capable of executing processing, and capable of transmitting various information (for example, information relating to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determining means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 and step S19147) that determines whether the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game;
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, recovery processing is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset processing in step S19176). ), A recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100),
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means,
The determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine at a predetermined timing in each game whether the state of the operation of the movable member is normal,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the determination means is not normal in the plurality of games, the recovery process is configured to be executable,
The effect control means further comprises:
Counting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing the processing of step S19144 and step S19177) for counting the number of times the recovery processing is executed by the recovery control means;
When the result of the counting by the counting means reaches a specified number of times (for example, 10 times), the accessory operation disabling means (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) in which the operation of the movable member is impossible (for example, an error motor operation stopped state) A host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19146 and step S19179);
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory operation disable means based on receiving the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed (for example, executing the process of step S311 Host control circuit 2100),
Based on the disabled state by the accessory operation disabled unit, a storage unit capable of storing time information of the disabled state as history information (for example, the history recording process of step S306 and step S307 A subwork RAM 2100a) for storing history information when performed.
Display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for displaying the error information history screen of FIG. 116 via the display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the recovery process is performed only by determining that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal by the determination means, without setting the operation disabled state. Then, when the number of times the restoration process has been performed reaches the specified number, the movable member is set in the operation disabled state. For this reason, a minor error does not result in an inoperable state, but a recovery error is executed over a number of games, but when recovery is not possible, the inoperable state is set and a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the information screen in which the time information in which the operation is disabled is displayed as the history information is displayed, it is possible to manage the history of serious errors.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Position detecting means (for example, a group of accessory detection sensors 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, an initial position);
The determining means includes:
A position determination unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that determines that the movable member is not normal at least when the movable member is not at the specific position (for example, NO in step S19141);
The recovery control means,
Each time the position determination unit determines that the movable member is not at the specific position (for example, it is determined to be NO in step S19141), the position restoration process of returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, A position restoration control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100) for executing the initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147);
The release means,
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times that the position restoration process has been executed counted by the counting unit is reset (for example, in step S323). Process),
The storage means,
It is possible to store at least one of position restoration processing history information including time information at which the position restoration processing was executed, and position restoration processing count reset history information where the number of times the position restoration processing was executed has been reset. ,
The display control means,
Information indicating at least one of the position restoration processing history information and the position restoration processing count reset history information based on receiving the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed. It is characterized by being configured to display a screen.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), each time it is determined that the movable member is not at the specific position, the position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position is executed, and one set value is changed. The number of times that the position restoration process has been executed is reset based on the information. Then, based on the change of the one set value, based on the position recovery processing history information including the time information at which the position recovery processing was performed, and the time information at which the number of times the position recovery processing was performed is reset. An information screen is displayed in which at least one of the location recovery processing count reset history information is included. For this reason, although serious errors such as inoperable state have not been reached, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of serious errors such as inoperable state by browsing the position recovery processing history information and the position recovery processing count reset history information. And the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Driving means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) that can move the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepared,
The determining means includes:
When the drive unit cannot move the movable member from the specific position to at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected), an operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal (for example, A host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S19171),
The recovery control means,
Operation restoration control for executing operation restoration processing for resetting the driver of the driving means (for example, motor driver reset processing in step S19176) each time the operation judging means judges that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Means (for example, a host control circuit 2100),
The release means,
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times that the operation restoration process has been performed counted by the counting unit is reset (for example, in step S323). Process),
The storage means,
It is possible to store at least one of operation restoration process history information including time information at which the operation restoration process is executed, and operation restoration process count reset history information in which the number of times the operation restoration process is executed is reset. ,
The display control means,
Information indicating at least one of the operation restoration process history information and the operation restoration process count reset history information based on receiving the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed. It is configured to be able to display a screen (for example, to be able to execute the hole menu display processing in step S302).

  According to the gaming machine of (3), each time it is determined that the state related to the movable member is not normal, the operation restoring process of resetting the driver of the driving unit is performed, and one set value is changed. Based on this, the number of times the operation restoration process has been executed is reset. Then, based on the change of one set value, the operation recovery processing history information including the time information at which the operation recovery processing was executed, and the time information at which the number of times the position recovery processing was executed was reset. An information screen showing at least one of the operation restoration process number reset history information and the operation restoration count information is displayed. For this reason, although serious errors such as inoperable state have not been reached, it is possible to grasp in advance the possibility of serious errors such as inoperable state by viewing the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing count reset history information. And the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

  As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Supplementary Notes 29-1 to 29-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately perform error processing and management of the gaming machine.

[12. Other extension examples etc.]
In the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described.However, all inventions described in the present specification may be implemented without departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines and all other gaming machines.

  In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, each of the examples, and each of the modified examples, including the above-mentioned additional notes, are examples. It is needless to say that each configuration shown in each embodiment, each example, and each modified example can be partially replaced or combined in another embodiment, another example, and another modified example. No. That is, the components described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 Liquid crystal display 24 Speaker 35 Power switch 100 Main control circuit 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 RWM (Main RAM)
106 Command output port 201 Sub CPU
203 Subwork RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 338 Power supply circuit 662 Main button 664 Select button 1000 Accessory group 1002 Accessory detection sensor group 2010 Relay board 2100 Host control circuit

Claims (3)

Control relating to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a variation display of the symbol is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the symbol is displayed. A game control means capable of executing a single game by stopping the variable display of symbols,
Setting operation means operated when changing at least the one set value;
Effect control means capable of executing control related to the operation of the movable member,
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
With
The game control means,
At least when the power-on operation is performed in a state where the setting operation unit is operated, the setting operation unit includes a setting change state control unit that controls a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed. Can be transmitted to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
Determining means for determining whether or not a state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game;
When it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal in the determination by the determination unit, a recovery control unit capable of executing a recovery process to be normalized,
And can receive various information transmitted from the game control means,
The determining means includes:
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine at a predetermined timing in each game whether the state of the operation of the movable member is normal,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the determination means is not normal in the plurality of games, the recovery process is configured to be executable,
The effect control means further comprises:
Counting means for counting the number of times the restoration processing has been executed by the restoration control means,
When the result of the counting by the counting means reaches a specified number, the accessory operation disabling means to make the movable member inoperable and inoperable,
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory operation disable means based on receiving setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed. Gaming machine. Further comprising a position detecting means capable of detecting that the movable member is present at a specific position,
The determining means includes:
A position determining unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when it is not at least at the specific position,
The recovery control means,
Each time the position determining unit determines that the movable member is not at the specific position, the position determining unit includes a position recovery control unit that performs a position recovery process of returning the movable member to the specific position.
The release means,
Resetting the number of times the position restoration process has been executed, counted by the counting means, based on receiving setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed. Item 7. The gaming machine according to Item 1. The movable member further includes a driving unit capable of operating from a specific position toward a specified position,
The determining means includes:
An operation determining unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position by the driving unit,
The recovery control means,
Each time it is determined by the operation determination unit that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, has an operation recovery control unit that performs an operation recovery process to reset the driver of the driving unit,
The release means,
Resetting the number of times the operation recovery process has been executed counted by the counting means based on receiving setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed. Item 3. The gaming machine according to item 1 or 2.

Images